Table of Contents
- Notations Used in This Guide
- Contents
- Introduction
- Preparing the Projector
- Installing the Projector
- Removing and Attaching the Projector Lens Unit
- Installation Settings
- Screen Settings
- Displaying the Test Pattern
- Adjusting the Position of the Projected Image (Lens Shift Adjustment)
- Adjusting the Image Size
- Correcting the Focus
- Registering and Loading Lens Adjustment Values
- Adjusting the Height of the Projected Image (for Normal Installment)
- Adjusting the Horizontal Tilt (for Normal Installment)
- ID Settings
- Setting the Time
- Other Settings
- Connecting Equipment
- Installing the Projector
- Basic Usage
- Turning On the Projector
- Turning Off the Projector
- Projecting Images
- Adjusting the Projected Images
- Correcting Distortion in the Projected Image
- Selecting the Projection Quality (Selecting Color Mode)
- Setting the Brightness
- Setting the Amount of Light of the Projected Image
- Changing the Aspect Ratio of the Projected Image
- Adjusting the Image
- Adjusting Image Resolution (Image Enhancement)
- Projecting 3D Images
- Useful Functions
- Using the Projector on a Network
- Configuration Menu
- Troubleshooting
- Using the Help
- Reading the Indicators
- Reading the Status Display
- Problem Solving
- Problems Relating to Images
- No images appear
- Moving images are not displayed
- Projection stops automatically
- Not supported is displayed
- No Signal is displayed
- Images are fuzzy, out of focus, or distorted
- Interference or distortion appear in images
- The image is truncated (large) or small, the aspect is not suitable, or the image has been reversed
- Image colors are not right
- Images appear dark
- Problems when Projection Starts
- Problems with Content Playback Mode
- Other Problems
- There are afterimages (screen burn-in) in the projected image
- No sound can be heard or the sound is faint
- The remote control does not work
- Nothing appears on the external monitor
- I want to change the language for messages and menus
- Email is not received even if a problem occurs in the projector
- The battery that saves your clock settings is running low. is displayed
- Problems Relating to Images
- About Event ID
- Maintenance
- Appendix
- Monitoring and Controlling
- Optional Accessories and Consumables
- Screen Size and Projection Distance
- Adjustment Range for Projected Images
- Supported Monitor Displays
- Specifications
- Appearance
- General Notes
- List of Safety Symbols
- Index
Epson EB-L1070U User Manual
Displayed below is the user manual for EB-L1070U by Epson which is a product in the Data Projectors category. This manual has pages.
Related Manuals
User's Guide
Notations Used in This Guide
•Safety indications
The documentation and the projector use graphical symbols to show how to use the projector safely.
The indications and their meaning are as follows. Make sure you understand them properly before reading the guide.
Warning
This symbol indicates information that, if ignored, could possibly result in personal injury or even death due to incorrect handling.
Caution
This symbol indicates information that, if ignored, could possibly result in personal injury or physical damage due to incorrect handling.
•General information indications
Attention
Indicates procedures which may result in damage or injury if sufficient care is not taken.
a
Indicates additional information and points which may be useful to know regarding a topic.
sIndicates a page where detailed information regarding a topic can be found.
[Name] Indicates the name of the buttons on the remote control or the control panel.
Example: [Esc] button
Menu Name Indicates Configuration menu items.
Example:
Select Brightness from Image.
Image - Brightness
Make sure you read the following before you use the projector.
s Safety Instructions
Warning and Cautions on Installation
An optional ceiling mount is required when suspending the projector from
a ceiling.
s "Optional Accessories" p.233
Warning
•Do not use or install the projector where it may be subject to water or rain,
or high humidity, such as outdoors, in a bathroom, or shower room, and so
on. Otherwise, it could cause a fire or electric shock.
•Do not install in locations where salt damage could occur, or in locations
subject to corrosive gas such as sulphuric gas from hot springs.
Otherwise, corrosion could cause the projector to fall. It could also cause the
projector to malfunction.
•A special method of installation is required when suspending the projector
from a ceiling (ceiling mount). If installation work is not carried out
correctly, the projector could fall down. This may result in injury or
accidents. Contact your local dealer or the nearest address provided in the
Epson Projector Contact List.
s Epson Projector Contact List
•Failure to install the ceiling mount and projector may cause the projector to
fall. After installing the specific Epson mount that supports your projector,
make sure you secure the projector and the mount using wire that is strong
enough to hold their weight.
•If you use adhesives on the ceiling mount fixing points to prevent the screws
from loosening, or if you use things such as lubricants or oils on the
projector, the projector case may crack causing it to fall from its ceiling
mount. This could cause an accident or injury to anyone under the ceiling
mount.
When installing or adjusting the ceiling mount, do not use adhesives,
lubricants, oils, and so on to prevent the screws from loosening.
Warning
•Do not install the projector in locations subject to high humidity or dust, or
locations subject to oil or steam, such as kitchen counters, kitchens, or near
humidifiers. Otherwise, electric shock or fire could occur. Also, oily particles
in the air could cause the projector case to deteriorate causing the projector
to fall from the mount if it is suspended from a ceiling.
•Do not cover the projector's air intake vent or air exhaust vent. If either of
the vents are covered, the internal temperature could rise and cause a fire.
•Do not place flammable objects in front of the lens. If you set the schedule to
turn on the projector automatically, any flammable objects placed in front of
the lens could cause a fire.
•Do not tie the power cord and other connection cables together. Otherwise, it
could cause a fire.
•Only use the specified power-supply voltage. Otherwise, it could cause a fire
or electric shock.
Safety Warning and Cautions
3
Warning
•Be careful when handling the power cord. Otherwise, it could cause a fire or
electric shock. Note the following when handling the power cord.
- Do not plug multiple power cords in a single electric outlet.
- Do not plug in the power cord if there are any foreign substances, such
as dust, stuck to it.
- Make sure you insert the power cord all the way in.
- Do not plug in or unplug the power cord with wet hands.
- Do not pull the cord when unplugging the power cord. Make sure you
hold it by the plug.
•Do not use a damaged power cord. Otherwise, it could cause a fire or electric
shock. Note the following when handling the power cord.
- Do not alter the power cord.
- Do not place any heavy objects on the power cord.
- Do not bend, twist, or pull the power cord forcibly.
- Do not layout the power cord near a heating device.
Caution
Do not place the projector on an unstable surface, such as on an unstable table
or tilted surface. When projecting vertically, install the projector appropriately
to prevent the projector from falling.
Otherwise it may cause an injury.
Attention
•Do not install the projector in a location that is subject to vibration or
shock.
•Do not install the projector near a high-voltage line or object that generates
magnetism. Otherwise the projector may not work correctly.
•Do not use or store the projector in a location that is subject to extreme
temperatures. Also, avoid sudden temperature changes.
Make sure you maintain the operating or storage temperature ranges.
s “Projector General Specifications” p.279
•When installing the projector in an environment in which a high-powered
laser beam is being used, make sure it is installed so that the laser beam does
not hit the surface of the projection lens.
•When using at an altitude that exceeds 1,500 m, set High Altitude Mode to
On.
s Extended - Operation - High Altitude Mode p.146
•The projector can be installed at any angle. There is no vertical or horizontal
limit to how the projector can be installed.
•You may need dedicated installation mounts to tilt and install the projector.
Contact a professional and prepare the mount.
•Plan so that the mount does not fall.
Safety Warning and Cautions
4
Attention
•Make sure you secure the following space around the projector so as not to
block the air exhaust vent and the air intake vent.
•When setting up multiple projectors, make sure there is a gap of at least
70 cm between the projectors. Also, make sure that the heat from the air
exhaust vent does not go into the air intake vent.
•Secure the following space when placing a partition between projectors.
Attention
•Do not stack projectors directly on top of each other.
•When using the ceiling mount or the portrait mount, use commercially
available M6 screws (up to a depth of 14 mm) to fix the projector's ceiling
mount fixing points and the mount at four points.
a
•We recommend setting the focus, zoom, and lens shift at least 20
minutes after you start the projection, because images are not stable
right after turning on the projector.
•When adjusting the image height with the vertical lens shift, adjust
by moving the image from the bottom to the top. If it is adjusted
from the top to the bottom, the image position may move down
slightly after adjusting.
Safety Warning and Cautions
5
Warning and Cautions on Usage
Warning
•Do not cover the projector's air intake vent or air exhaust vent. If either of
the vents is covered, the internal temperature could rise and cause a fire.
•Do not look into the lens while projecting. The powerful light emitted could
cause damage to eyesight. Take particular care when there are children
present. When turning on the projector at a distance using the remote
control, make sure there is no one looking into the lens.
•During projection, do not block the light from the projector with the lens
cover (removable) or a book and so on.
If the light from the projector is blocked, the area on which the light shines
becomes hot which could cause it to melt, burn, or start a fire. Also, the lens
may get hot due to the reflected light which could cause the projector to
malfunction. To stop projection, use the A/V Mute function, or turn off the
projector.
•Do not open the projector's case. Never disassemble or remodel the projector.
There are high-voltage components inside the projector that could cause fire,
electric shock, or an accident.
•If an error occurs, disconnect the power cord from the electrical outlet, and
contact your local dealer or the nearest address provided in the Epson
Projector Contact List. If you continue using the projector as it is, it could
cause an electric shock, fire, or even damage to eyesight.
s Epson Projector Contact List
Caution
Do not place objects that may become warped or otherwise affected by heat
near the air exhaust vent and do not put your face or hands near the vent
while projection is in progress.
Attention
•Only remove the lens unit when necessary. If dust or dirt enter the projector,
projection quality deteriorates and it could cause a malfunction.
•Try not to touch the lens section with your hand or fingers. If fingerprints or
oils are left on the surface of the lens, projection quality deteriorates.
• If you continue to project while the surface of the lens is dirty, projection
quality deteriorates. Make sure you clean the lens. s “Cleaning the Lens”
p.204
•Store the projector with the lens unit installed.
If the projector is stored without the lens unit, dust and dirt may get inside
the projector and cause malfunctions or lower the quality of projection.
•When storing, make sure you remove the batteries from the remote control.
If the batteries are left in the remote control for an extended period of time,
they may leak.
Safety Warning and Cautions
6
a
•About the LCD panel
- The LCD panel may contain pixels that are missing or appear bright all
the time. This is not a sign of an error.
- When a high-powered laser beams through the surface of the projection
lens even when it is not being used, it can cause a malfunction in the
LCD panel. Attach the lens cover when storing the projector.
•About the light source
The projector uses a laser as the light source. The laser has the
following characteristics.
- Depending on the surroundings, the brightness of the light source may
decline. The brightness declines a lot when the temperature gets too
high.
- The brightness of the light source declines the longer it is used. You can
change the relationship between usage time and decline in brightness in
Brightness Settings.
s "Relationship between Brightness Level and light source operation
time" p.78
•About Light Source Calibration
-When Run Periodically is set to On for Light Source Calibration, every
time the usage time reaches 100 hours, calibration starts automatically
for the light source when the projector is turned off. However, this does
not start automatically when the projector is used continuously for
more than 24 hours, or when direct shutdown is used regularly. Set
Light Source Calibration in the scheduling function.
s "Scheduling Function" p.112
- When performing Light Source Calibration, the difference between the
white balance and the brightness level for the light source is corrected.
s Reset - Light Source Calibration - Run Periodically p.162
Warning and Cautions on the Laser
Warning
•Laser warning labels are attached inside the projector and on the side of the
projector.
Inside
Side
Warning
•Do not open the projector's case. The projector contains a high-powered
laser.
•Do not look into the lazer beam being emitted from the projection lens while
projecting. (Based on the RG2 IEC/EN 62471-5: 2015)
•This projector may become RG3 when an interchangeable lens with a throw
ratio greater than 3.5 is installed. See the manual for the lens list and
hazardous distances before operation. Such combinations of projector and
lens are intended for professional use only, and are not intended for
consumer use.
Safety Warning and Cautions
7
Caution
•This projector is a Class 1 laser product that complies with the IEC/
EN60825-1: 2014 international standard for lasers.
•Do not disassemble the projector when disposing of it. Dispose according to
your local or national laws and regulations.
Notes on Transporting
There are many glass parts and precision components inside the projector.
To prevent damage due to impacts when transporting, handle the projector
as follows.
Caution
The projector should not be carried by one person. At least two people are
needed to unpack or carry the projector.
Attention
•Moving Nearby
- Turn off the power to the projector and disconnect all cables.
- Attach the cover to the lens.
•When Transporting
After checking the points in "Moving Nearby", prepare the following and then
pack up the projector.
- Remove the lens unit if an option lens is installed.
- If the projector does not have a lens, attach the cover that was on the
lens mount when you purchased the projector.
- Attach the lens if the projector has a built-in lens. Upon purchase,
attach the protective pad that is attached around the lens unit.
- Move the lens position to the home position.
s "Adjusting the Position of the Projected Image (Lens Shift
Adjustment)" p.34
- Enclose the projector securely in packaging material to protect it from
shock, and place it into a strong container. Be sure to notify the carrier
company that it is precision equipment and that it needs to be kept
horizontally during transportation.
Safety Warning and Cautions
8
Notations Used in This Guide ........................ 2
Introduction
Part Names and Functions .................................. 15
Front/Top...................................................15
Rear.......................................................16
Connector Ports.............................................. 17
Base......................................................18
Control Panel................................................18
Remote Control...............................................20
Handy remote control operations................................22
Replacing the remote control batteries ............................. 23
Remote control operating range .................................24
Connecting a cable to the remote control...........................24
Preparing the Projector
Installing the Projector ..................................... 27
Removing and Attaching the Projector Lens Unit ........................27
Attaching.................................................27
Lens Calibration ............................................29
Removing.................................................30
Installation Settings............................................31
Changing the direction of the image (projection mode).................31
Screen Settings...............................................32
Adjusting the position of the image on the projected screen..............32
Displaying the Test Pattern....................................... 33
Adjusting the Position of the Projected Image (Lens Shift Adjustment).........34
Adjusting the Image Size ........................................37
Correcting the Focus ...........................................38
Correcting Distortion (Image Warping).............................38
Registering and Loading Lens Adjustment Values.......................39
Adjusting the Height of the Projected Image (for Normal Installment)..........41
Adjusting the Horizontal Tilt (for Normal Installment).....................42
ID Settings..................................................42
Set the projector ID..........................................42
Checking the projector ID......................................43
Setting the remote control ID...................................43
Setting the Time ..............................................44
Other Settings................................................45
Settings related to basic operations...............................45
Settings related to display......................................46
Connecting Equipment ..................................... 47
Connecting a Computer ......................................... 47
Connecting Image Sources.......................................49
Connecting External Equipment...................................51
Connecting a LAN Cable.........................................52
Connecting an HDBaseT Transmitter................................53
Installing the Wireless LAN Unit....................................54
Attaching the Cable Cover .......................................55
Attaching.................................................55
Basic Usage
Turning On the Projector ................................... 58
Home Screen................................................ 59
Turning Off the Projector ................................... 60
Projecting Images ......................................... 61
Automatically Detecting Input Signals and Changing the Projected Image (Source
Search)....................................................61
Switching to the Target Image by Remote Control.......................62
Adjusting the Volume..........................................63
Adjusting the Projected Images ............................. 64
Correcting Distortion in the Projected Image...........................64
H/V-Keystone..............................................65
Quick Corner...............................................66
Curved Surface.............................................67
Corner Wall ................................................71
Contents
9
Point Correction ............................................ 74
Selecting the Projection Quality (Selecting Color Mode)...................76
Setting the Brightness..........................................77
Guide to Estimated Remains ....................................78
Relationship between Brightness Level and light source operation time......78
Setting the Amount of Light of the Projected Image ......................79
Changing the Aspect Ratio of the Projected Image.......................80
Changing methods ..........................................80
Adjusting the Image...........................................81
Hue, Saturation, and Brightness adjustment.........................81
Gamma adjustment ..........................................82
Adjusting Image Resolution (Image Enhancement).......................83
4K Enhancement (EB-L1075U/EB-L1070U/EB-L1065U/EB-L1060U/EB-L1050U
only)....................................................83
Image Preset Mode ..........................................84
Frame Interpolation .......................................... 85
Noise Reduction ............................................ 86
MPEG Noise Reduction ........................................ 86
Super-resolution ............................................87
Detail Enhancement.........................................87
Projecting 3D Images...........................................87
Useful Functions
Multi-Projection Function . ................................. 90
Adjustment Procedure .......................................... 90
Advance preparation ......................................... 90
Adjusting the projected position.................................90
Adjusting the projected images..................................90
Tiling......................................................90
Edge Blending...............................................91
Black Level ..................................................93
Color Matching ............................................... 96
Displaying a Scaled Image.......................................97
Projection Functions ....................................... 99
Projecting Two Images Simultaneously (Split Screen).....................99
Input Sources for Split Screen Projection ............................ 99
Operating procedures....................................... 100
Restrictions during split screen projection ..........................102
Hiding the Image and Sound Temporarily (A/V Mute).................... 102
Freezing the Image (Freeze)..................................... 103
Enlarging Part of the Image (E-Zoom)............................... 104
Saving a User's Logo ...........................................104
Content Playback Feature ................................. 106
Switching to Content Playback Mode............................... 106
Playing a Playlist ............................................. 106
Adding Effects to Images (Effect Feature)............................ 107
Restrictions on Content Playback Mode............................. 108
Memory Function ......................................... 110
Saving/Loading/Erasing/Resetting the Memory........................ 110
Scheduling Function ...................................... 112
Saving an Event ..............................................112
Setting an Event ........................................... 112
Checking an Event..........................................113
Editing an Event ........................................... 113
Security Functions ........................................ 115
Managing Users (Password Protection).............................. 115
Kinds of Password Protection.................................. 115
Setting Password Protection ................................... 115
Entering the password....................................... 116
Restricting Operation .......................................... 117
Control Panel Lock .......................................... 117
Lens Lock................................................ 118
Remote control button lock ....................................118
Anti Theft/Fall Prevention....................................... 119
Contents
10
Using the Projector on a Network
Wired Network Projection ................................. 121
Selecting Wired Network Settings................................. 121
Wireless Network Projection . . ............................. 124
Selecting Wireless Network Settings Manually ......................... 124
Selecting Wireless Network Settings in Windows....................... 127
Selecting Wireless Network Settings in Mac ........................... 127
Setting Up Wireless Network Security............................... 127
Supported Client and CA Certificates............................. 129
Using a QR Code to Connect a Mobile Device..........................130
Using a USB Key to Connect a Windows Computer ...................... 131
Secure HTTP ............................................. 132
Importing a Web Server Certificate Using the Menus..................... 132
Supported Web Server Certificates ...............................133
Setting a certificate using a Web browser .......................... 133
Configuration Menu
Configuration Menu Operations ........................... 136
List of Functions .......................................... 137
Configuration Menu Table ...................................... 137
Network menu............................................ 138
Image Menu ................................................ 140
Signal Menu................................................ 142
Settings Menu...............................................143
Extended Menu ..............................................146
Network Menu.............................................. 151
Notes on operating the Network menu ............................152
Soft keyboard operations ..................................... 152
Basic menu...............................................153
Wireless LAN menu......................................... 154
Wired LAN menu........................................... 157
Notifications menu......................................... 158
Others menu..............................................159
Reset menu............................................... 160
Info Menu (Display Only)........................................161
Reset Menu.................................................162
Batch Setup .............................................. 164
Setup Using a USB Flash Drive.................................... 165
Saving settings to the USB flash drive............................. 165
Reflecting saved settings to other projectors ........................ 167
Setup by Connecting the Computer and Projector with a USB Cable . . . . . . . . . . 168
Saving settings to a computer.................................. 168
Reflecting saved settings to other projectors ........................ 169
When Setup Fails .............................................171
Troubleshooting
Using the Help ........................................... 173
Reading the Indicators . . . . . . .............................. 175
Reading the Status Display ................................ 182
Explanations of the Display Content................................183
Problem Solving .......................................... 190
Problems Relating to Images..................................... 191
No images appear.......................................... 191
Moving images are not displayed ................................191
Projection stops automatically..................................192
Not supported is displayed.................................... 192
No Signal is displayed........................................192
Images are fuzzy, out of focus, or distorted......................... 193
Interference or distortion appear in images ......................... 193
The image is truncated (large) or small, the aspect is not suitable, or the image has
been reversed .............................................194
Image colors are not right.....................................195
Images appear dark......................................... 195
Problems when Projection Starts.................................. 196
The projector does not turn on................................. 196
Contents
11
Problems with Content Playback Mode..............................197
Cannot play the playlist...................................... 197
Other Problems.............................................. 197
There are afterimages (screen burn-in) in the projected image............ 197
No sound can be heard or the sound is faint ........................ 198
The remote control does not work ............................... 198
Nothing appears on the external monitor .......................... 199
I want to change the language for messages and menus................ 199
Email is not received even if a problem occurs in the projector ............ 200
The battery that saves your clock settings is running low. is displayed....... 200
About Event ID ........................................... 201
Maintenance
Cleaning the Parts ........................................ 204
Cleaning the Projector......................................... 204
Cleaning the Lens............................................ 204
Cleaning the Air Filter and Air Intake Vent ............................ 204
Cleaning the air filter ........................................ 205
Cleaning the air intake vent....................................206
Replacing Consumables ................................... 208
Replacing the Air Filter......................................... 208
Air filter replacement period................................... 208
Replacing the air filter ........................................208
Image Maintenance ....................................... 210
Panel Alignment............................................. 210
Color Uniformity ............................................. 212
Appendix
Monitoring and Controlling ............................... 215
Epson Projector Management .................................... 215
Changing Settings Using a Web Browser (Epson Web Control).............. 215
Displaying the Epson Web Control Screen..........................215
Basic Control Screen.........................................216
OSD Control Pad Screen...................................... 217
Lens Control Screen......................................... 218
Status Information Screen .....................................220
Changing Settings Using a Web Browser (Content Playback Mode)...........220
Remote................................................. 222
Playlists................................................. 223
USB Memory Device.........................................223
Time Table............................................... 224
OSD Control Pad........................................... 224
Using the Mail Notification Function to Report Problems..................225
Reading error notification mail .................................. 225
Management Using SNMP...................................... 226
ESC/VP21 Commands ..........................................226
Command list............................................. 226
Cable layouts............................................. 226
About PJLink................................................227
About Crestron Connected
®
..................................... 228
Operating a projector from your computer......................... 228
About Web API.............................................. 232
Optional Accessories and Consumables .................... 233
Optional Accessories.......................................... 233
Consumables............................................... 233
Screen Size and Projection Distance ........................ 234
Projection Distances for EB-L1075U/EB-L1070U/EB-L1065U/EB-L1060U/EB-L1050U/
EB-L1070W/EB-L1060W . ....................................... 234
ELPLM08................................................ 234
ELPLX01/ELPLX01W......................................... 235
ELPLU03.................................................236
ELPLU04/ELPLU02.......................................... 237
ELPLW05................................................ 238
ELPLW06/ELPLW04......................................... 239
ELPLW08................................................ 240
ELPLM15/ELPLM09/ELPLS04 ................................... 241
ELPLM10/ELPLM06......................................... 242
ELPLM11/ELPLM07......................................... 243
Contents
12
ELPLL08/ELPLL07 ...........................................244
ELPLR04................................................. 245
Projection Distances for EB-L1070 . . ............................... 247
ELPLM08................................................ 247
ELPLX01/ELPLX01W ......................................... 248
ELPLU03.................................................249
ELPLU04/ELPLU02.......................................... 250
ELPLW05................................................ 251
ELPLW06/ELPLW04......................................... 252
ELPLW08................................................ 253
ELPLM15/ELPLM09/ELPLS04 ................................... 254
ELPLM10/ELPLM06......................................... 255
ELPLM11/ELPLM07......................................... 256
ELPLL08/ELPLL07 ...........................................257
ELPLR04................................................. 258
Polarizer (ELPPL01) Installation Distance ............................. 259
EB-L1075U/EB-L1070U/EB-L1065U/EB-L1060U/EB-L1050U . . . . . ..........259
EB-L1070W/EB-L1060W...................................... 259
EB-L1070................................................ 259
Adjustment Range for Projected Images .................... 261
H/V-Keystone ............................................... 261
Curved Surface .............................................. 261
Corner Wall.................................................268
Supported Monitor Displays ............................... 274
Supported Monitor Displays..................................... 274
PC..................................................... 274
SD..................................................... 276
HD.....................................................276
4K (EB-L1075U/EB-L1070U/EB-L1065U/EB-L1060U/EB-L1050U only) . . . . .... 277
Specifications ............................................ 279
Projector General Specifications...................................279
Appearance .............................................. 284
General Notes ............................................ 285
About Notations............................................. 285
Trademarks and Copyrights ......................................285
List of Safety Symbols . . . . ................................. 287
Index .................................................... 289
Contents
13
Introduction
This chapter explains the names for each part.
The illustrations in this guide show the lens unit attached to the projector.
Front/Top
Name Function
AAir intake vent Takes in air to cool the projector internally.
Name Function
BProjection lens Images are projected through here.
Warning
Do not look into the lens while projecting. This
could cause damage to eyesight due to the power‐
ful light emitted.
Caution
When shifting the lens, do not put your hands near
the lens unit. Your fingers may get caught between
the lens unit and the projector, and cause an in‐
jury.
CRemote Receiver Receives signals from the remote control.
DStatus indicators The color of the indicators and whether they are flashing
or lit indicate the status of the projector.
s "Reading the Indicators" p.175
EAir intake vent
(air filter)
Takes in air to cool the projector internally.
s "Cleaning the Air Filter and Air Intake Vent" p.204
FUSB-A port •Allows you to install the optional wireless LAN unit and
connect the projector to the network.
•Allows you to connect a commercially available USB
flash drive and play the playlist in Content Playback
mode.
GWireless LAN indicator Indicates the access status to the optional wireless LAN
unit.
s "Optional Accessories and Consumables" p.233
HCable cover Cover for the port connectors section at the rear to protect
connected cables.
s "Attaching the Cable Cover" p.55
Part Names and Functions
15
Name Function
ILens replacement
cover
Remove when attaching or removing the lens.
s "Removing and Attaching the Projector Lens Unit"
p.27
Caution
When moving the projector, do not hold the lens
replacement cover. The lens replacement cover
may be removed and the projector may fall, which
could cause an injury.
JAir exhaust vent Exhaust vent for air used to cool the projector internally.
Caution
While projecting, do not put your face or hands
near the air exhaust vent, and do not place objects
that may become warped or damaged by heat near
the vent. Hot air from the air exhaust vent could
cause burns, warping, or accidents to occur.
Rear
Name Function
APower inlet Connects the power cord to the projector.
BControl panel s "Control Panel" p.18
CSecurity slot The security slot is compatible with the Microsaver
Security System manufactured by Kensington.
s "Anti Theft/Fall Prevention" p.119
DConnector Ports s "Connector Ports" p.17
Part Names and Functions
16
Connector Ports
Name Function
ABNC port For analog RGB signals from a computer and component
video signals from other video sources.
BComputer Port For analog RGB signals from a computer and component
video signals from other video sources.
CAudio3 port Inputs audio from equipment connected to the HDMI
port or the DVI-D port.
DAudio1 port Inputs audio from equipment connected to the Computer
port.
EMonitor Out port Outputs to an external monitor the analog signal from the
computer connected to the Computer port or the BNC
port. You cannot output signals input from other ports or
component video signals.
FAudio Out port Outputs audio from the currently projected image to an
external speaker.
GAudio2 port Inputs audio from equipment connected to the BNC port.
Name Function
HCable holder Run a commercially available cable tie to secure cables.
IRS-232C port When controlling the projector from a computer, connect
it to the computer with an RS-232C cable. This port is for
control use and should not normally be used.
s "ESC/VP21 Commands" p.226
JRemote port Connects the optional remote control cable set and inputs
signals from the remote control. When the remote control
cable is plugged into the Remote port, the remote receiver
on the projector is disabled.
s "Optional Accessories and Consumables" p.233
KService port This is used for batch settings. This port is for control use
and should not normally be used.
s "Batch Setup" p.164
LHDMI port Inputs video signals from HDMI compatible video
equipment and computers.
MDVI-D port Inputs the computer DVI-D signals.
NHDBaseT port Connects a LAN cable to the optional HDBaseT
Transmitter.
s "Connecting an HDBaseT Transmitter" p.53
s "Optional Accessories and Consumables" p.233
OLAN port Connects a LAN cable to connect to a network.
Part Names and Functions
17
Base
Name Function
AFront feet When setup on a surface such as a desk, extend and retract
the feet to adjust the height or tilt of the image.
s "Adjusting the Height of the Projected Image (for
Normal Installment)" p.41
s "Adjusting the Horizontal Tilt (for Normal
Installment)" p.42
BRear feet
CSecurity cable
installation point
Pass a commercially available anti-theft wire lock or a wire
to prevent the projector from falling through here and lock
it in place.
s "Anti Theft/Fall Prevention" p.119
Name Function
DScrew holes to fix the
cable cover
Screw holes to fix the cable cover in place.
s "Attaching the Cable Cover" p.55
EAir filter cover fixing
screw
Screws to fix the air filter cover in place.
FCeiling mount fixing
points (ELPMB47/
ELPMB48, 4 points)
Attach the optional ceiling mount here when suspending
the projector from a ceiling.
s "Installing the Projector" p.27
s "Optional Accessories and Consumables" p.233
GCeiling mount fixing
points (ELPMB22, 4
points)
Control Panel
Name Function
A[] button Turns the projector on.
B[Source Search]
button
Changes to the next input source that is sending an image.
s "Automatically Detecting Input Signals and Changing
the Projected Image (Source Search)" p.61
C[Menu] button Displays and closes the Configuration menu.
s "Configuration Menu Operations" p.136
Part Names and Functions
18
Name Function
D[] button •When the Configuration menu or the Help screen is
displayed, it accepts and enters the current selection and
moves to the next level.
•If pressed while projecting analog RGB signals from the
Computer port or the BNC port, you can automatically
optimize Tracking, Sync., and Position.
E[]/[ ] buttons •Displays the Control Panel Lock screen allowing you to
make settings to lock the control panel buttons.
s "Restricting Operation" p.117
•If pressed when the Configuration menu or the Help
screen is displayed, this button selects menu items and
setting values.
s "Configuration Menu Operations" p.136
s "Using the Help" p.173
F[]/[ ] buttons •Displays a test pattern.
s "Displaying the Test Pattern" p.33
•If pressed when the Configuration menu or the Help
screen is displayed, this button selects menu items and
setting values.
s "Configuration Menu Operations" p.136
s "Using the Help" p.173
G[A/V Mute] button Turns the video and audio on or off.
s "Hiding the Image and Sound Temporarily (A/V
Mute)" p.102
H[Lens] button Displays the adjustment screens for lens shift, zoom,
focus, and distortion in that order each time the button is
pressed.
If pressed for more than three seconds, the lens position
moves to the home position.
Name Function
I[]/[ ] buttons •Displays the Info menu from the Configuration menu.
s "Info Menu (Display Only)" p.161
•If pressed when the Configuration menu or the Help
screen is displayed, this button selects menu items and
setting values.
s "Configuration Menu Operations" p.136
s "Using the Help" p.173
J[]/[ ] buttons •Performs screen adjustments using the settings in
Geometry Correction from the Configuration menu.
s Settings - Geometry Correction p.143
•If pressed when the Configuration menu or the Help
screen is displayed, this button selects menu items and
setting values.
s "Configuration Menu Operations" p.136
s "Using the Help" p.173
K[Esc] button •Stops the current function.
•If pressed when the Configuration menu is displayed, it
moves to the previous menu level.
s "Configuration Menu Operations" p.136
L[t] button Turns the projector off.
Part Names and Functions
19
Remote Control Name Function
A[] button Turns the projector on.
B[t] button Turns the projector off.
CChange input buttons Changes to images from each input port.
s "Switching to the Target Image by Remote Control"
p.62
The [SDI] button is unavailable.
D[Aspect] button Each time the button is pressed, the aspect mode changes.
s "Changing the Aspect Ratio of the Projected Image"
p.80
E[Auto] button If pressed while projecting analog RGB signals from the
Computer port or the BNC port, you can automatically
optimize Tracking, Sync., and Position.
F[Freeze] button Images are paused or unpaused.
s "Freezing the Image (Freeze)" p.103
G[Test Pattern] button Displays a test pattern.
s "Displaying the Test Pattern" p.33
H[Lens Shift] button Press to adjust the lens shift.
s "Adjusting the Position of the Projected Image (Lens
Shift Adjustment)" p.34
If pressed for more than three seconds, the lens position
moves to the home position.
I[Zoom] button Press to adjust the zoom.
s "Adjusting the Image Size" p.37
J[Menu] button Displays and closes the Configuration menu.
s "Configuration Menu Operations" p.136
Part Names and Functions
20
Name Function
K[][ ][ ][ ]
buttons
•Press to adjust focus, zoom, distortion, and lens shift.
s "Adjusting the Position of the Projected Image
(Lens Shift Adjustment)" p.34
s "Adjusting the Image Size" p.37
s "Correcting the Focus" p.38
•When the Configuration menu or the Help screen is
displayed, pressing these buttons selects menu items
and setting values.
s "Configuration Menu Operations" p.136
L[] button When the Configuration menu or the Help screen is
displayed, it accepts and enters the current selection and
moves to the next level.
s "Configuration Menu Operations" p.136
M[A/V Mute] button Turns the video and audio on or off.
s "Hiding the Image and Sound Temporarily (A/V
Mute)" p.102
N[Page] buttons
[[][]]
•Press to change the test pattern while a test pattern is
displayed.
•Moves to the previous or next image file when
projecting images from a computer connected via a
network.
O[Volume] buttons
[a][b]
[a] decreases the volume.
[b] increases the volume.
s "Adjusting the Volume" p.63
P[] button Displays the Info menu from the Configuration menu.
s "Info Menu (Display Only)" p.161
Q[User1] button
[User2] button
[User3] button
Select any frequently used item from the Configuration
menu items, and assign it to any of these buttons. By
pressing the button, the assigned menu item selection/
adjustment screen is displayed, allowing you to make one-
touch settings/adjustments.
s "Settings Menu" p.143
Name Function
RNumeric buttons •Enter the Password.
s "Setting Password Protection" p.115
•Use this button to enter numbers in Network settings
from the Configuration menu.
S[ID] button Hold down this button and press the numeric buttons to
select the ID for the projector you want to operate using
the remote control.
s "ID Settings" p.42
T[ID] switch Use this switch to enable (On)/disable (Off) ID settings for
the remote control.
s "ID Settings" p.42
URemote port Connects the optional remote control cable set and
outputs signals from the remote control.
s "Optional Accessories" p.233
When the remote control cable is plugged into this remote
port, the remote control light-emitting is disabled.
V[] button Displays and closes the Home screen.
s "Home Screen" p.59
W[Num] button Hold down this button and press the numeric buttons to
enter passwords and numbers.
s "Setting Password Protection" p.115
X[Geometry] button Corrects distortion in the projected image.
s "Correcting Distortion in the Projected Image"
p.64
Y[Memory] button Performs operations and makes settings for the memory
function.
s "Memory Function" p.110
Z[E-Zoom] buttons
[z][x]
Enlarges or reduces the image without changing the
projection size.
s "Enlarging Part of the Image (E-Zoom)" p.104
Part Names and Functions
21
Name Function
a[Default] button Enabled when [Default]: Reset is displayed on the
configuration menu guide. The settings being adjusted are
returned to their default values.
s "Configuration Menu Operations" p.136
b[Esc] button •Stops the current function.
•If pressed when the Configuration menu is displayed, it
moves to the previous level.
s "Configuration Menu Operations" p.136
c[Focus] button Each time the button is pressed, the adjustment screens for
focus and distortion are displayed in that order.
s "Correcting the Focus" p.38
d[Split] button Each time the button is pressed, the image changes
between projecting two images simultaneously by
splitting the projected screen, or projecting one image as
normal.
s "Projecting Two Images Simultaneously (Split
Screen)" p.99
e[Color Mode] button Each time the button is pressed, the Color Mode changes.
s "Selecting the Projection Quality (Selecting Color
Mode)" p.76
f[Search] button Changes to the next input source that is sending an image.
s "Automatically Detecting Input Signals and Changing
the Projected Image (Source Search)" p.61
g[] button Illuminates the buttons on the remote control for
approximately 15 seconds. This is useful when using the
remote control in the dark.
hIndicator A light is emitted when outputting remote control signals.
iRemote control light-
emitting area
Outputs remote control signals.
Handy remote control operations
You can perform the following operations by simply pressing one of the
buttons on the remote control.
Operation Set
Reverse the projected image vertically.
(Switch the Projection between Front and
Front/Ceiling)
s "Changing the direction of the image
(projection mode)" p.31
Hold down the [A/V Mute] button for more
than five seconds.
Selecting the password security settings.
s "Managing Users (Password
Protection)" p.115
Hold down the [Freeze] button for more
than five seconds. The Password Protection
screen is displayed, and you can select
various settings.
Locking or unlocking some of the operation
of the buttons on the remote control.
s "Remote control button lock" p.118
Hold down the [ ] button for more than
five seconds.
Initializing the settings for the Remote
Receiver in the Configuration menu.
(Enables all Remote receivers for this
projector.)
Hold down the [Menu] button for more than
15 seconds.
Part Names and Functions
22
Operation Set
Displaying frequently used Configuration
menu items.
Press the [User1], [User2], or [User3]
button. You can set the menu item you want
to assign to each button in User Button.
s Settings - User Button p.143
The following items can be assigned.
Light Source Mode, Multi-Projection,
Resolution, On-Screen Display, Display
the QR Code, Image Enhancement, Frame
Interpolation, Link Menu, Content
Playback, USB
When you press the button for which On-
Screen Display is assigned, menus or
messages are not displayed on the screen.
When the same button is pressed, they are
displayed again. If On-Screen Display is
enabled, you cannot operate the
Configuration menu (except to switch the
color mode and input source).
Replacing the remote control batteries
If delays in the responsiveness of the remote control occur or if it does not
operate after it has been used for some time, it probably means that the
batteries are becoming flat. When this happens, replace them with new
batteries. Have two AA size alkaline or manganese batteries ready. You
cannot use other batteries except for the AA size alkaline or manganese.
Attention
Make sure you read the following manual before handling the batteries.
s Safety Instructions
a
Remove the battery cover.
While pushing the battery compartment cover catch, lift the cover
up.
b
Replace the old batteries with new batteries.
Caution
Check the positions of the (+) and (-) marks inside the battery holder to
ensure the batteries are inserted the correct way.
If the batteries are not used correctly, they could explode or leak causing
a fire, injury, or damage to the product.
Part Names and Functions
23
c
Replace the battery cover.
Press the battery compartment cover until it clicks into place.
Remote control operating range
a
To restrict reception of the operation signals from the remote control,
set Remote Receiver.
s Settings - Remote Receiver p.143
Connecting a cable to the remote control
You can make operations securely with the optional remote control cable
set when you use multiple units of this projector in the same place or when
there are obstacles around the remote receiver.
Part Names and Functions
24
s "Optional Accessories" p.233
a
•When the remote control cable is plugged into the Remote port, the
remote receiver on the projector is disabled.
•You can also connect the optional HDBaseT transmitter and remote
control with the cable to control the projector.
s "Connecting an HDBaseT Transmitter" p.53
Part Names and Functions
25
Preparing the Projector
This chapter explains how to install the projector and connect projection sources.
Removing and Attaching the Projector Lens Unit
Warning
Make sure you disconnect the power cord from the projector before removing
or attaching the lens unit to the projector. Otherwise, it could cause an electric
shock.
Attaching
Attention
•Do not attach the lens unit when the projector's lens insertion section is
facing up. Dust or dirt could enter the projector.
•Try not to touch the lens section with your hand or fingers. If fingerprints or
oils are left on the surface of the lens, projection quality deteriorates.
a
•The projector supports lens with the following model numbers.
ELPLX01, ELPLX01W, ELPLU03, ELPLU04, ELPLW05, ELPLW06,
ELPLW08, ELPLM08, ELPLM09, ELPLM10, ELPLM11, ELPLM15,
ELPLL08, ELPLS04, ELPLU02, ELPLR04, ELPLW04, ELPLM06,
ELPLM07, ELPLL07
When using the following lens, set the Lens Type in the
Configuration menu according to the lens you are using so that
distortion correction is performed correctly.
ELPLS04, ELPLU02, ELPLR04, ELPLW04, ELPLM06, ELPLM07,
ELPLL07
s Extended - Operation - Advanced - Lens Type p.146
•In a normal installation, the image may be tilted depending on your
lens. Adjust the tilt of the image using the front and rear feet.
s "Adjusting the Horizontal Tilt (for Normal Installment)"
p.42
•For information on installing ELPLX01/ELPLX01W, see the User's
Guide supplied with ELPLX01/ELPLX01W.
a
Pull the lens replacement cover straight out.
b
Release the lock lever if it is locked.
Installing the Projector
27
c
Pinch the lever, and then move it counter-clockwise.
a
When using the following lens, attach the supplied lens
connector cap to protect the port.
ELPLS04, ELPLU02, ELPLR04, ELPLW04, ELPLM06, ELPLM07,
ELPLL07
d
Insert the lens unit straight into the lens insertion section with the
white circle on the lens on top.
e
While holding the lens unit firmly, pinch the lever and turn it
clockwise to lock the lens unit.
Check that the lens cannot be detached.
Installing the Projector
28
f
Secure the lever with the lever lock to make sure it does not come
loose.
a
The lever is secured even without using the lever lock, but this
adds an additional measure of safety.
g
Attach the lens replacement cover.
a
When projecting down, we recommend securing the front cover
with commercially available screws (M3 x 8 mm).
Lens Calibration
After replacing the lens unit, calibrate the lens so that the projector can
correctly acquire the lens position and adjustment range.
After attaching a different lens unit from the previous one, a message is
displayed when the projector is turned on.
Select Yes to calibrate the lens.
Lens calibration takes up to about 100 seconds until it is complete. When it
is complete, the lens position returns to the position before calibration
(ELPLX01/ELPLX01W returns to the standard position).
Installing the Projector
29
Attention
If the message "Lens Calibration failed." is displayed, remove the lens unit and
then reinstall it. If the message continues to be displayed, stop using the
projector, remove the power plug from the electrical outlet, and contact your
local dealer or the nearest address provided in the Epson Projector Contact
List.
s Epson Projector Contact List
a
•You can perform lens calibration using one of the following
methods.
- Press the [Default] button on the remote control for three seconds
or more.
- Configuration Menu
s Extended - Operation - Lens Calibration p.146
•If no message is displayed after attaching the lens unit, perform lens
calibration from the Configuration menu.
•If you do not calibrate the lens, the following functions may not
operate correctly.
Focus, Distortion, Zoom, Lens Shift, Memory (Lens Position)
Removing
Caution
Wait for a while after turning off the projector before removing the lens unit
(Approx. 30 mins.). Touching the lens unit immediately after projecting or
turning off may cause burns.
Attention
If the lens shift has been done, move the lens position to the home position
before replacing the lens unit.
s "Adjusting the Position of the Projected Image (Lens Shift Adjustment)"
p.34
a
The projector uses a laser as the light source. As a safety measure, the
light source turns off when the lens is removed. Attach the lens, and
then press the [ ] button to turn it back on.
a
Pull the lens replacement cover straight out.
b
If the lock lever has been secured with a stopper, remove the
stopper.
Installing the Projector
30
c
While holding the lens unit firmly, hold the lock lever and turn it
counterclockwise to unlock the lens unit.
Pull the lens unit straight out as it is released.
Installation Settings
Changing the direction of the image (projection mode)
You can change the direction of the image using Projection mode from the
Configuration menu.
s Extended - Projection p.146
When Front is the standard, the image directions for each projection mode
are as follows.
Front (default) Front/Ceiling
Rear Rear/Ceiling
Installing the Projector
31
a
•You can change the setting as follows by pressing down the [A/V
Mute] button on the remote control for about five seconds.
Front W Front/Ceiling
Rear W Rear/Ceiling
•To rotate the menu display, set OSD Rotation in the Configuration
menu.
s Extended - Display - OSD Rotation p.146
Screen Settings
Set the Screen Type according to the aspect ratio of the screen being used.
The area where the image is displayed matches the shape of the screen.
a
The settings for the Screen Type at the time of purchase are as
follows:
•WUXGA/WXGA projector: 16:10
•XGA projector: 4:3
a
Press the [Menu] button while projecting.
s "Configuration Menu Operations" p.136
b
Select Display from Extended.
c
Select Screen Type from Screen.
d
Select the screen's aspect ratio.
The shape of the background test pattern changes depending on the
setting.
e
Press the [Menu] button to finish making settings.
a
•When you change the Screen Type, adjust the aspect ratio for the
projected image as well.
s "Changing the Aspect Ratio of the Projected Image" p.80
•The Message Broadcasting function for Epson Projector Management
does not support this function.
Adjusting the position of the image on the projected screen
You can adjust the position of the image if there are margins between the
edge of the image and the projected screen frame due to the Screen Type
setting.
Example: When the Screen Type is set to 4:3 for the WUXGA/WXGA
projector
Installing the Projector
32
You can move the image to the left and right.
a
Press the [Menu] button while projecting.
s "Configuration Menu Operations" p.136
b
Select Display from Extended.
c
Select Screen Position from Screen.
d
Use the [ ], [ ], [ ], and [ ] buttons to adjust the position of
the image.
You can check the current display position by using the background
test pattern.
e
Press the [Menu] button to finish making settings.
a
The Screen Position cannot be adjusted in the following situations.
•If you are using a WUXGA/WXGA projector and the Screen Type
is set to 16:10
•If you are using an XGA projector and the Screen Type is set to
4:3
Displaying the Test Pattern
A test pattern can be displayed to adjust the projection status without
connecting video equipment.
The shape of a test pattern is according to the setting of Screen Type. Set
Screen Type first.
s "Screen Settings" p.32
a
Press the [Test Pattern] button of the remote control or the [ ]
button on the control panel while projecting.
b
Press the [ ][ ] buttons on the remote control or the [ ] button
on the control panel to change the test pattern.
Using the remote control Using the control panel
Installing the Projector
33
Standard Cross-hatching
Cross-hatching
R
Cross-hatching
G
Cross-hatching
B Color Bars V Color Bars H Grayscale
Gray Bars V Gray Bars H
Checkerboard
1
Checkerboard
2
White Black
16:10 Aspect
Frame
16:9 Aspect
Frame
4:3 Aspect
Frame
a
•To set menu items that cannot be set while the test pattern is
being displayed or to fine-tune the projected image, project an
image from the connected device.
•During image adjustment, press the [Page] buttons [[] []]
on the remote control to change the test pattern.
•You can also select a test pattern from the Configuration
menu.
s Settings - Test Pattern p.143
c
Press the [Esc] button to close the test pattern.
Adjusting the Position of the Projected Image
(Lens Shift Adjustment)
The lens can be shifted to adjust the position of the projected image, for
example, when the projector cannot be installed directly in front of the
screen.
The ranges within which the image can be moved are shown below. The
position of the projected image cannot be moved to both the horizontal and
vertical maximum values.
EB-L1075U/EB-L1070U/EB-L1065U/EB-L1060U/EB-L1050U/EB-L1070W/
EB-L1060W
ACenter of lens
BProjected image when the lens position is moved to the home
position
CMaximum motion range: V x 67%
DWhen the horizontal direction is at the maximum value: V x 19%
Installing the Projector
34
EB-L1070
ACenter of lens
BProjected image when the lens position is moved to the home
position
CMaximum motion range: V x 57%
DWhen the horizontal direction is at the maximum value: V x 16%
When using ultra-short focus lens ELPLX01/ELPLX01W
EB-L1075U/EB-L1070U/EB-L1065U/EB-L1060U/EB-L1050U/EB-L1070W/
EB-L1060W
ACenter of lens
BProjected image for positional reference
CMaximum motion range: V x 17%
* When the horizontal direction is at the maximum value, the image
cannot be moved up.
Installing the Projector
35
EB-L1070
ACenter of lens
BProjected image for positional reference
CMaximum motion range: V x 7%
* When the horizontal direction is at the maximum value, the image
cannot be moved up.
a
•When adjusting the image height with the vertical lens shift, adjust
by moving the image from the bottom to the top. If it is adjusted
from the top to the bottom, the image position may move down
slightly after adjusting.
•We recommend setting the focus, zoom, and lens shift at least 20
minutes after you start the projection, After projecting videos, we
recommend waiting for more than 20 minutes to make settings for
the Focus/Zoom/Lens Shift.
•The image will be clearest when the lens position is moved to the
home position.
•If you hold down the [Lens Shift] button on the remote control or
the [Lens] button on the control panel for at least three seconds, the
lens position moves to the home position.
•If you set A/V Output to Always On, you can move the lens
position to the home position even if the projector is in standby
mode.
s Extended - A/V Settings - A/V Output p.146
•ELPLR04 does not support lens shift.
a
Press the [Lens Shift] button on the remote control or the [Lens]
button on the control panel.
Repeatedly press the [Lens] button on the control panel until the
lens shift adjustment screen is displayed.
Using the remote control Using the control panel
Installing the Projector
36
b
Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to adjust the position of the
projected image.
Using the remote control Using the control panel
The displayed screen may differ depending on your lens.
c
Press the [Esc] button to finish the adjustment.
Adjusting the Image Size
a
This is not available for ELPLX01, ELPLX01W, and ELPLR04.
a
Press the [Zoom] button on the remote control or the [Lens]
button on the control panel.
Repeatedly press the [Lens] button on the control panel until the
zoom adjustment screen is displayed.
Using the remote control Using the control panel
b
Press the [ ][ ] buttons to adjust.
Using the remote control Using the control panel
The displayed screen may differ depending on your lens.
c
Press the [Esc] button to finish the adjustment.
Installing the Projector
37
Correcting the Focus
a
Press the [Focus] button on the remote control or the [Lens]
button on the control panel.
Repeatedly press the [Lens] button on the control panel until the
focus adjustment screen is displayed.
Using the remote control Using the control panel
b
Press the [ ][ ] buttons to adjust.
Using the remote control Using the control panel
The displayed screen may differ depending on your lens.
a
When using the following lens, a message prompting you to
adjust the distortion (image warping) is displayed. After
adjusting the focus, adjust the distortion.
ELPLX01, ELPLX01W, ELPLU03, ELPLU04, ELPLW05,
ELPLW08, ELPLU02
s "Correcting Distortion (Image Warping)" p.38
c
Press the [Esc] button to finish the adjustment.
Correcting Distortion (Image Warping)
When using a short throw zoom lens and focusing at the center of the
screen, the surrounding image may warp and be out of focus. Follow the
steps below to correct the warping.
a
Press the [Focus] button on the remote control or the [Lens]
button on the control panel.
Repeatedly press the [Lens] button on the control panel until the
focus adjustment screen is displayed.
b
Press the [ ][ ] buttons to focus the image around the center of
the lens.
Installing the Projector
38
c
Press the [Focus] button on the remote control or the [Lens]
button on the control panel again.
Repeatedly press the [Lens] button on the control panel until the
distortion adjustment screen is displayed.
d
Press the [ ][ ] button to adjust the focus of the surrounding
area.
a
When using the ELPLU02, a message prompting you to manually
adjust the distortion is displayed. Turn the distortion ring
counterclockwise, and then adjust the focus. After adjusting the focus,
manually turn the distortion ring to correct the image warping.
Registering and Loading Lens Adjustment Values
You can register a lens position whose lens shift, zoom, focus, and
distortion was adjusted in memory, and load it when necessary. You can
register up to 10 values.
a
•This feature cannot be used if the following lenses are attached.
ELPLS04, ELPLU02, ELPLR04, ELPLW04, ELPLM06, ELPLM07,
ELPLL07
•If you did not calibrate your lens, a message is displayed when you
save a memory. Select Yes to calibrate the lens.
•The lens position when a memory is loaded may not completely
match the lens position when the memory was saved.
•If there is a large discrepancy between the lens position when a
memory is loaded and the lens position when the memory was
saved, calibrate the lens.
s Extended - Operation - Lens Calibration p.146
a
Press the [Memory] button while projecting.
a
You can also operate from the Configuration menu.
s Settings - Memory p.143
b
Select Lens Position, and then press the [ ] button.
Installing the Projector
39
c
Select the function you want to perform, then press the [ ]
button.
Function Explanation
Load Memory Loads the saved memory. When you select a
memory name and press the [ ] button, the lens
is automatically adjusted according to the settings
of the selected memory.
Save Memory Registers current settings in the memory. When
you select a memory name and press the [ ]
button, the settings are saved.
Erase Memory Erases the registered memory. When you select a
memory name and press the [ ] button, a
message is displayed. Select Yes, and then press the
[] button to erase the selected memory.
Rename Memory Changes the memory name. Select the memory
name you want to change, and then press the [ ]
button. Enter the memory name using the soft
keyboard.
s "Soft keyboard operations" p.152
When you have finished, move the cursor over
Finish, and then press the [ ] button.
Installing the Projector
40
Function Explanation
Reset Memory Resets the name and settings of a saved memory.
a
If the mark on the left of the memory name is turned blue, it
means the memory has already been registered. When you
select a registered memory, a message is displayed asking you to
confirm that you want to overwrite the memory. If you select
Yes, the previous settings are deleted and the current settings
are registered.
Adjusting the Height of the Projected Image (for
Normal Installment)
Extend or retract the front feet to make adjustments. You can adjust the
position of the image by tilting the projector up to 10 degrees.
AExtend the front feet.
BRetract the front feet.
a
The larger the angle of tilt, the harder it becomes to focus. Install the
projector so that it only needs to be tilted at a small angle.
Installing the Projector
41
Adjusting the Horizontal Tilt (for Normal
Installment)
Extend and retract the front and rear feet to adjust the projector's
horizontal tilt. You can adjust the tilt within a range of ±1.5˚.
AExtend the front and rear feet.
BRetract the front and rear feet.
Attention
The rear feet are detachable. You can extend the feet by approximately 12
mm before they detach.
ID Settings
When an ID is set for the projector and the remote control, you can use
the remote control to operate only the projector with a matching ID. This
is very useful when managing multiple projectors. You can set up to 30
IDs.
a
•Operation using the remote control is possible only for projectors
that are within the operating range of the remote control.
s "Remote control operating range" p.24
•IDs are ignored when the projector ID is set to Off or the remote
control ID is set to 0.
•If you use Epson Web Control, you can operate a specific projector
from a mobile device.
s "Changing Settings Using a Web Browser (Epson Web Control)"
p.215
Set the projector ID
a
Press the [Menu] button while projecting.
s "Configuration Menu Operations" p.136
b
Select Multi-Projection from Extended.
c
Select Projector ID, and then press the [ ] button.
d
Press the [ ][ ] buttons to select an ID number.
Installing the Projector
42
e
Select Set, and then press the [ ] button.
f
Press the [Menu] button to close the Configuration menu.
Checking the projector ID
During projection, press the [ ] button while holding down the [ID]
button.
Remote control
When you press the buttons, the current Projector ID is displayed on the
projection screen. It disappears in about three seconds.
Setting the remote control ID
a
Set the remote control [ID] switch to On.
b
While holding the [ID] button, press a number button to select a
number to match the ID of the projector you want to operate.
s "Checking the projector ID" p.43
Enter a two digit number (Example: 01 when the ID is 1).
Remote control
Once this setting has been made, the projector that can be operated by the
remote control is limited.
a
The remote control ID setting is saved in the remote control. Even if
the remote control batteries are removed to replace them and so on,
the stored ID setting is retained. However, if the batteries are left out
for a long time, it is reset to the default value (ID0).
Installing the Projector
43
Setting the Time
You can set the time for the projector. The set time is used for the schedule
function.
s "Scheduling Function" p.112
a
•When you turn on the projector for the first time, the message "Do
you want to set the time?" is displayed. When you select Yes, the
screen from step 4 is displayed.
•When Schedule Protection is set to On in Password Protection,
settings related to the date and time cannot be changed. You can
make changes after setting Schedule Protection to Off.
s "Managing Users (Password Protection)" p.115
a
Press the [Menu] button while projecting.
s "Configuration Menu Operations" p.136
b
Select Operation from Extended.
c
Select Date & Time, and then press the [ ] button.
d
Make settings for the date and time.
Use the soft keyboard to enter the date and time.
s "Soft keyboard operations" p.152
Date & Time
Submenu Function
Date Set today's date.
Time Set the current time.
Time Difference (UTC) Set the time difference from Coordinated
Universal Time.
Set The settings made in Date & Time are applied.
Daylight Saving Time
Submenu Function
Daylight Saving Time Set whether or not (On/Off) to activate the
daylight saving time. DST Adjustment (min)
adjusts the time difference between the standard
time and daylight saving time.
DST Start Set the date and time to start the daylight saving
time.
DST End Set the date and time to end the daylight saving
time.
Set The settings made in Daylight Saving Time are
applied.
Internet Time
Submenu Function
Internet Time Set to On to update the time automatically through
an Internet time server.
Internet Time Server Input the IP address for an Internet time server.
Set The settings made in Internet Time are applied.
a
When changing settings, make sure you select Settings, and
then press the [ ] button.
Installing the Projector
44
e
Press the [Menu] button to finish making settings. Other Settings
Settings related to basic operations
Purpose Setting Methods
To start/stop projection by turning
on/off the main power or plugging
in or unplugging the power plug of
the projector.
Set Direct Power On to On. (Default value: Off)
s Extended - Operation - Direct Power
On p.146
The projector can be powered off directly by the
breaker because it supports the direct shutdown
function.
To disable the automatic shutdown
function.
Set Sleep Mode to Off. (Default value: On)
s Extended - Operation - Sleep Mode p.146
Set A/V Mute Timer to Off.
s Extended - Operation - A/V Mute Settings -
A/V Mute Timer p.146
To disable buzzer beeps generated
when the projector is powered on/
off.
Set Beep to Off. (Default value: On)
s Extended - Operation - Advanced -
Beep p.146
To operate the projector by
communication command even
when the power of the projector is
off.
Set Standby Mode to Communication On.
(Default value: Communication Off)
s Extended - Standby Mode p.146
To operate the projector by
communication command while
executing A/V Mute.
Set A/V Mute Release to A/V Mute.
s Extended - Operation - A/V Mute Settings -
A/V Mute Release p.146
The default value is Any Button. If you operate
the projector while A/V Mute is on, A/V Mute is
released.
Turn off the power by pressing the
[t] button once.
Set Standby Confirmation to Off. (Default value:
On)
s Extended - Display - Standby
Confirmation p.146
Installing the Projector
45
Settings related to display
Purpose Setting Methods
To change the menu position. Change the settings of Menu Position.
s Extended - Display - Menu Position p.146
To change the menu direction. Change the settings of OSD Rotation.
s Extended - Display - OSD Rotation p.146
To prevent the display of menus,
messages, or warnings on the
screen.
Use User Button to set On-Screen Display to
User Button 1, User Button 2, or User Button
3.
s Settings - User Button p.143
When you press the button for which On-Screen
Display is assigned, menus or messages are not
displayed on the screen. When the same button is
pressed, they are displayed again. If On-Screen
Display is enabled, you cannot operate the
Configuration menu (except to switch the color
mode and input source).
To disable the display of the
message on the projection screen
when switching the source.
Set Messages to Off. (Default value: On)
s Extended - Display - Messages p.146
You can confirm warning by the display of the
indicator.
s "Reading the Indicators" p.175
Dialogs related to operations and behaviors, laser
warnings, termination of Message Broadcasting
for Epson Projector Management, and projector
ID are displayed.
Purpose Setting Methods
To register and save the settings of
the projected image.
Set Memory.
s "Memory Function" p.110
You can save the following settings.
•Memory: Some settings in the Configuration
menu
•Lens Position: Adjustment values of the lens
shift, zoom, focus, and distortion
•Geometry Correction: Adjustment value of the
geometry correction
To change the screen displayed on
the background.
Change from Display. You can select from blue,
black, and logo. If no logo is registered, the
EPSON logo is displayed.
Display Background: Set the screen display with
no image signal input. (Default value: Blue)
s Extended - Display - Display
Background p.146
Startup Screen: Set whether or not (On/Off) to
display the user logo when the projector is turned
on. (Default value: On)
s Extended - Display - Startup Screen p.146
Installing the Projector
46
The port name, location, and connector orientation differ depending on the source being connected.
Connecting a Computer
To project images from a computer, connect the computer using one of the following methods.
AWhen using a commercially available computer cable
Connect the computer's display output port to the projector's Computer port.
You can output audio from the Audio Out port on the projector by connecting the audio output port on the computer to the projector's Audio1 port using a commercially available
audio cable.
BWhen using a commercially available 5BNC cable
Connect the computer's display output port to the projector's BNC port.
You can output audio from the Audio Out port on the projector by connecting the audio output port on the computer to the projector's Audio2 port using a commercially available
audio cable.
CWhen using a commercially available HDMI cable
Connect the HDMI port on the computer to the projector's HDMI port.
You can send the computer's audio with the projected image.
DWhen using a commercially available DVI-D cable
Connect the DVI-D port on the computer to the projector's DVI-D port.
You can output audio from the Audio Out port on the projector by connecting the audio output port on the computer to the projector's Audio3 port using a commercially available
audio cable.
Connecting Equipment
47
a
•Change the audio output from Audio Settings.
s Extended - A/V Settings - Audio Settings p.146
•If audio is not sent using an HDMI cable, connect a commercially available audio cable to the Audio3 port to send the audio. Set HDMI Audio Output to
Audio3.
s Extended - A/V Settings - Audio Settings - HDMI Audio Output p.146
Connecting Equipment
48
Connecting Image Sources
To project video images, connect to the projector using one of the following methods.
AWhen using a commercially available component video cable (D-sub/component converter)
Connect the component output port on the image source to the projector's Computer port.
You can output audio from the Audio Out port on the projector by connecting the audio output port on the video equipment to the projector's Audio1 port using a commercially
available audio cable.
BWhen using a commercially available component video cable (RCA) and a BNC/RCA adapter
Connect the component output port on the video equipment to the projector's BNC port (R/Cr/Pr, G/Y, B/Cb/Pb).
You can output audio from the Audio Out port on the projector by connecting the audio output port on the video equipment to the projector's Audio2 port using a commercially
available audio cable.
CWhen using a commercially available HDMI cable
Connect the HDMI port on the image source to the projector's HDMI port.
You can send the image source's audio with the projected image.
Computer
Audio1
AUDIOOUT
AUDIOOUT
Y
Cb/Pb
Cr/Pr
Y
Cb/Pb
Cr/Pr
Audio2
HDMI
HDMIOUT
BNC(R/Cr/Pr,G/Y,B/Cb/Pb)
Connecting Equipment
49
Attention
•If the input source is on when you connect it to the projector, it could cause a malfunction.
•If the orientation or shape of the plug differs, do not try to force it in. The device could be damaged or could malfunction.
a
•Change the audio output from Audio Settings.
s Extended - A/V Settings - Audio Settings p.146
•If audio is not sent using an HDMI cable, connect a commercially available audio cable to the Audio3 port to send the audio. Set HDMI Audio Output to
Audio3.
s Extended - A/V Settings - Audio Settings - HDMI Audio Output p.146
•If the source you want to connect to has an unusually shaped port, use the cable supplied with the device or an optional cable to connect to the projector.
Connecting Equipment
50
Connecting External Equipment
You can output images and audio by connecting an external monitor or speaker.
AWhen outputting images to an external monitor
Connect the external monitor to the projector's Monitor Out port using the cable supplied with the external monitor.
BWhen outputting audio to an external speaker
Connect the external speaker to the projector's Audio Out port using a commercially available audio cable.
MonitorOut D-Sub
AudioOut AudioIN
a
•Set A/V Output to Always On to output image even when the projector is in standby mode.
s Extended - A/V Settings - A/V Output p.146
•Only analog RGB signals from the Computer port or BNC port can be output to an external monitor. You can set which signals to output in Monitor
Out.
s Extended - A/V Settings - Monitor Out p.146
Connecting Equipment
51
Connecting a LAN Cable
Connect a LAN port on network hubs or other equipment to the projector's LAN port with a commercially available 100BASE-TX or 10BASE-T LAN
cable.
By connecting a computer to the projector over a network, you can project images and check the status of the projector.
LAN
a
To prevent malfunctions, use a category 5 or higher shielded LAN cable.
Connecting Equipment
52
Connecting an HDBaseT Transmitter
Connect the optional HDBaseT Transmitter with a commercially available 100BASE-TX LAN cable.
s "Optional Accessories" p.233
HDBaseT
a
•Make sure you read the User's Guide supplied with the HDBaseT Transmitter carefully before use.
•For the LAN cable, use an HDBaseT Alliance-recommended STP cable (straight) of category 5e or higher. However, operation is not guaranteed for all
input/output devices and environments.
•When connecting or disconnecting the LAN cable, make sure you turn off the power for the projector and the HDBaseT Transmitter.
•When performing Ethernet communication or serial communication, or when using the wired remote control via HDBaseT port, set Control Communications
to On from the Configuration menu.
s Extended - HDBaseT - Control Communications p.146
Note that when Control Communications is set to On, the projector's LAN port, RS-232C port, and Remote port are disabled.
•When using the Extron XTP transmitter or switcher, connect to the projector's HDBaseT port. Set Extron XTP to On (Standby Mode and Control
Communications are automatically set to On).
s Extended - HDBaseT - Extron XTP p.146
•You can check the status of the signal being input to the HDBaseT port in HDBaseT Signal Level.
s Info - Projector Info - HDBaseT Signal Level p.161
Connecting Equipment
53
Installing the Wireless LAN Unit
a
Loosen the fixing screws and open the air filter cover. (You can
loosen the screws with your fingers.)
b
Use a plus-head screwdriver to loosen and remove the screw from
the stopper for the Wireless LAN unit.
c
Install the Wireless LAN unit.
d
Secure the stopper with a screw.
Connecting Equipment
54
e
Close the air filter cover and tighten the fixing screws.
Attaching the Cable Cover
By attaching the cable cover, you can hide the connected cables giving a
nice, clean finish to the projector installation. (The illustrations are of a
projector installed on a ceiling.)
Warning
Do not tie the power cord and other connection cables together. Otherwise, it
could cause a fire.
Attaching
a
Run a commercially available cable tie through the cable holder
and tie the cables together.
b
Attach the cable cover to the projector by routing the cables
through the grooves in the cable cover.
Connecting Equipment
55
c
Tighten the two screws on the cable cover. (You can tighten the
screws with your fingers.)
Connecting Equipment
56
Basic Usage
This chapter explains how to project and adjust images.
Before turning on the projector, connect your computer or video equipment
to the projector.
s "Connecting Equipment" p.47
a
Connect the projector to an electrical outlet with the power cord.
The projector's power indicator turns blue (it is in standby mode).
This indicates that the projector is receiving power, but is not yet
turned on.
b
Press the [ ] button on the control panel or remote control to
turn on the projector.
The confirmation buzzer beeps and the status indicator flashes blue
as the projector warms up. Once the projector is warmed up, the
status indicator stops flashing and turns blue.
If the image is not projected, try the following.
•Turn on the connected computer or video equipment.
•When using a laptop computer, change the screen output of the
computer.
•Insert media such as a DVD and play it back.
•Press the [Search] button on the control panel or the remote control to
detect the input source.
•Press the button for the input source that you want to project by using
the remote control.
•If the Home screen is displayed, select the input source that you want
to project.
Warning
•Do not look into the projector's lens during projection. Doing so may
damage your eyes. Be especially careful if children are present.
•During projection, do not block the light from the projector with a book and
so on. If the light from the projector is blocked, the area on which the light
shines becomes hot which could cause it to melt, burn, or start a fire. Also,
the lens may get hot due to the reflected light which could cause the
projector to malfunction. To stop projection, use the A/V Mute function or
turn off the projector.
a
•If Direct Power On is set to On in the Extended menu, the
projector automatically turns on when the power cord is connected
to it. When the power cord is plugged in, note that the projector
turns on automatically in cases such as recovery from a power
outage.
s Extended - Operation - Direct Power On p.146
•If an image signal from the source selected in Auto Power On is
input, the projector automatically turns on.
s Extended - Operation - Auto Power On p.146
Turning On the Projector
58
Home Screen
You can use the Home screen to easily select input sources or frequently
used functions. The Home screen is displayed in the following situations.
•When the [ ] button on the remote control is pressed
•When the projector is turned on while Home Screen Auto Disp. is set
to On
s Extended - Home Screen - Home Screen Auto Disp. p.146
•When there is no signal from the selected input source when the
projector is turned on
When the Home screen is displayed, use the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons on
the control panel or remote control to select an item, and then press the
[] button.
To hide the Home screen, press the [ ] button on the remote control
again.
ASelect the input source that you want to project.
BDisplays the Connection Guide. You can check which wireless connection method to
use for your device.
CIndicates that the projector is in Content Playback mode.
DDisplays the Help screen.
s "Using the Help" p.173
EDisplays the Configuration menu.
FExecutes the function assigned to Custom Function 1 or Custom Function 2 in the
Extended menu.
s Extended - Home Screen - Custom Function 1, Custom Function 2 p.146
GSelect Light Source Mode.
s "Setting the Brightness" p.77
HSelect Color Mode.
s "Selecting the Projection Quality (Selecting Color Mode)" p.76
a
The Home screen disappears after 10 minutes of inactivity.
Turning On the Projector
59
a
•To ensure a long projector service life, turn off the projector when
you are not using it. The light source's operating life varies
depending on the Configuration menu settings, environmental
conditions, and usage conditions. The brightness of the projected
image drops as projection time elapses.
•The projector can be powered off directly by the breaker because it
supports the direct shutdown function.
•When the projector is used continuously for more than 24 hours, or
when direct shutdown is used regularly, set Light Source
Calibration using the scheduling function to adjust the light source
periodically. You can also make settings from the Configuration
menu.
s "Scheduling Function" p.112
s Reset - Light Source Calibration p.162
a
Press the [t] button on the control panel or the remote control.
The shutdown confirmation screen is displayed.
b
Press the [t] button again. (To cancel, press any other button.)
After the buzzer beeps twice, the projected image disappears, and the
status indicator turns off.
c
Disconnect the power cord.
Turning Off the Projector
60
Automatically Detecting Input Signals and
Changing the Projected Image (Source Search)
Press the [Search] button to project images from the port currently
receiving an image.
Using the remote control Using the control panel
When two or more image sources are connected, repeatedly press
the [Search] button until the target image is projected.
When your video equipment is connected, start playback before beginning
this operation.
a
•You can set up the projector so that it automatically detects an
image signal from another input source and projects the image when
there is no image signal from the current input source.
s Extended - Operation - Auto Source Search p.146
•The following screen is displayed while no image signals are input.
Projecting Images
61
Switching to the Target Image by Remote Control
•Press the button of the input source that you want to project.
The input ports for the buttons are shown below.
Remote control
Input Port
DChanges to images from a computer connected via the network.
a
When using Content Playback mode, you can switch to the USB
source by pressing the User Button assigned to USB.
•Press the [ ] button.
Remote control
Select the input source to be projected, and then press the [ ] button.
Projecting Images
62
Adjusting the Volume
You can adjust the volume of the audio from the Audio Out port using one
of the following methods.
•Press the [Volume] buttons on the remote control to adjust the volume.
[b] increases the volume.
[a] decreases the volume.
Remote control
•Adjust the volume from the Configuration menu.
s Settings - Volume p.143
Caution
Do not start at high volume.
A sudden excessive volume may cause loss of hearing. Always lower the volume
before powering off, so that you can power on and then gradually increase the
volume.
Projecting Images
63
Correcting Distortion in the Projected Image
You can correct keystone distortion in projected images using one of the
following methods.
•H/V-Keystone
This allows you to correct distortion in the horizontal and vertical
directions independently.
s "H/V-Keystone" p.65
•Quick Corner
Correct the four corners independently.
s "Quick Corner" p.66
•Curved Surface
Correct distortion that occurs when projecting on a curved surface, and
adjust the amount of expansion and contraction.
s "Curved Surface" p.67
•Corner Wall
This allows you to correct distortion that occurs when projecting on a
surface with right angles, such as a square pillar or the corner of a room,
and adjust the amount of expansion and contraction.
s "Corner Wall" p.71
•Point Correction
Corrects slight distortion which occurs partially, or adjusts the image
position in an overlapping area when projecting from multiple projectors.
s "Point Correction" p.74
Adjusting the Projected Images
64
a
•By pressing the [Geometry] button on the remote control or the
[] button on the control panel, a screen for selecting the
adjustment method is displayed.
•When you want to re-adjust the projection position and so on, if
you want to release the correction status temporarily, set the
Geometry Correction to Off. Even when it is set to Off, the
correction values are saved.
s Settings - Geometry Correction p.143
•You can save the geometry correction settings using Memory in
Geometry Correction, and load them when needed.
s "Memory Function" p.110
H/V-Keystone
This allows you to correct distortion in the horizontal and vertical
directions independently.
Use the following to check the adjustment range for the image.
s "H/V-Keystone" p.261
a
Press the [Menu] button while projecting.
b
Select Geometry Correction from Settings.
c
Select H/V-Keystone, and then press the [ ] button.
"If this setting is changed, the image may be distorted." is displayed,
press the [ ] button.
d
Use the [ ][ ] buttons to select the correction method, and
then use the [ ][ ] buttons to make the corrections.
Adjusting the Projected Images
65
Correct the keystone distortion by using V-Keystone and H-
Keystone.
V-Keystone
H-Keystone
If the image aspect is incorrect, adjust the image balance by using
V-Balance and H-Balance.
V-Balance
H-Balance
a
When you correct keystone distortion, the projected image may
be reduced.
e
To complete the corrections, press the [Menu] button.
a
You cannot combine with other correction methods.
Quick Corner
This allows you to correct each of the four corners of the projected image
independently.
a
Press the [Menu] button while projecting.
b
Select Geometry Correction from Settings.
c
Select Quick Corner, and then press the [ ] button.
"If this setting is changed, the image may be distorted." is displayed,
press the [ ] button again.
d
Use the [ ], [ ], [ ], and [ ] buttons to select the corner you
want to adjust, and then press the [ ] button.
Adjusting the Projected Images
66
a
If the [Esc] button is pressed for approximately two seconds,
the confirm default reset screen is displayed.
Select Yes to reset the result of Quick Corner corrections.
e
Use the [ ], [ ], [ ], and [ ] buttons to correct the position of
the corner.
When you press the [ ] button, the screen shown in step 4 that
allows you to select the area to be corrected is displayed.
If the message "Cannot adjust any further." is displayed while
adjusting, you cannot adjust the shape any further in the direction
indicated by the gray triangle.
f
Repeat steps 4 and 5 as needed to adjust any remaining corners.
g
To complete the corrections, press the [Menu] button.
Curved Surface
This allows you to correct distortion that occurs when projecting on a
curved surface, and adjust the amount of expansion and contraction.
Face the projector directly opposing the screen with the lens position
moved to the home position.
s "Adjusting the Position of the Projected Image (Lens Shift Adjustment)"
p.34
a
•Project onto an arc surface with the same radius.
•If a large amount of adjustment is performed, the focus may not be
uniform even after making adjustments.
•If 4K Enhancement is enabled, a message is displayed. Select Yes to
disable 4K Enhancement. (EB-L1075U/EB-L1070U/EB-L1065U/EB-
L1060U/EB-L1050U only)
s Image - Image Enhancement - 4K Enhancement p.140
Use the following to check the adjustment range for the image.
s "Curved Surface" p.261
a
Press the [Menu] button while projecting.
b
Select Geometry Correction from Settings.
c
Select Curved Surface, and then press the [ ] button.
Adjusting the Projected Images
67
"If this setting is changed, the image may be distorted." is displayed,
press the [ ] button.
d
Select Curved Surface, and then press the [ ] button.
e
Select Correct Shape, and then press the [ ] button.
Adjusting the Projected Images
68
f
Use the [ ], [ ], [ ], and [ ] buttons to select the area you
want to adjust, and then press the [ ] button.
When selecting a corner, you can adjust the two sides next to the
corner.
a
If the [Esc] button is pressed for approximately two seconds,
the confirm default reset screen is displayed.
Select Yes to reset the result of Curved Surface.
g
Use the [ ], [ ], [ ], and [ ] buttons to adjust the shape.
If the triangle in the direction you are adjusting the shape turns gray,
as shown in the screenshot below, you cannot adjust the shape any
further in that direction.
h
Press the [Esc] button to return to the previous screen.
i
Repeat steps from 6 to 8 as needed to adjust any remaining
parts.
If the image expands or contracts, go to the next step and adjust the
linearity.
Adjusting the Projected Images
69
j
Press the [Esc] button to display the screen from step 5. Select
Horizontal Linearity or Vertical Linearity, and then press the [ ]
button.
Select Horizontal Linearity to adjust the horizontal expansion or
contraction, and select Vertical Linearity to adjust the vertical
expansion or contraction.
a
To compensate for expansion or contraction while maintaining
the aspect ratio, set Maintain Aspect Ratio to On. You may not
be able to perform corrections if you set this to On after
correction. In this situation, return the corrections to their
initial values, or reduce the amount of correction, and then try
again.
k
Select the standard line for the adjustments, and then press the
[] button.
Press the [ ][ ] buttons when selecting Horizontal Linearity, and
the [ ][ ] buttons when selecting Vertical Linearity, and then
press [ ].
The selected standard line is displayed in flashing orange and white.
a
Changing the standard line resets the previous settings.
l
Adjust the linearity.
Correct it so that the distance between lines is equal.
When pressing the [ ] button
When Horizontal Linearity is selected When Vertical Linearity is selected
When pressing the [ ] button
When Horizontal Linearity is selected When Vertical Linearity is selected
m
To complete the corrections, press the [Menu] button.
a
You can fine tune the corrected results. Use Quick Corner to adjust
the tilt of the image, and then use Point Correction for fine tuning.
Select Quick Corner or Point Correction on the screen from step
4.
s "Quick Corner" p.66
s "Point Correction" p.74
Adjusting the Projected Images
70
Corner Wall
This allows you to correct distortion that occurs when projecting on a
surface with right angles, such as a square pillar or the corner of a room,
and adjust the amount of expansion and contraction.
Face the projector directly opposing the screen with the lens position
moved to the home position.
s "Adjusting the Position of the Projected Image (Lens Shift Adjustment)"
p.34
a
•Project onto a surface with a right angle.
•If a large amount of adjustment is performed, the focus may not be
uniform even after making adjustments.
•If 4K Enhancement is enabled, a message is displayed. Select Yes to
disable 4K Enhancement. (EB-L1075U/EB-L1070U/EB-L1065U/EB-
L1060U/EB-L1050U only)
s Image - Image Enhancement - 4K Enhancement p.140
•This is not available for ELPLX01/ELPLX01W.
Use the following to check the adjustment range for the image.
s "Corner Wall" p.268
a
Press the [Menu] button while projecting.
b
Select Geometry Correction from Settings.
c
Select Corner Wall, and then press the [ ] button.
"If this setting is changed, the image may be distorted." is displayed,
press the [ ] button again.
d
Select Corner Wall, and then press the [ ] button.
e
Select Corner Type, and then press the [ ] button.
Adjusting the Projected Images
71
f
According to the projection area, select Horizontal Corner or
Vertical Corner, and then press the [ ] button.
When the surfaces line up horizontally:
Select Horizontal Corner.
When the surfaces line up vertically:
Select Vertical Corner.
From here on, steps are explained using Horizontal Corner as an
example.
g
Press the [Esc] button to display the screen from step 5. Select
Correct Shape, and then press the [ ] button.
h
Adjust the position of the projector and the lens shift so that the
line in the center of the screen matches the corner (the point
where the two surfaces meet).
s "Adjusting the Position of the Projected Image (Lens Shift
Adjustment)" p.34
a
Each time you press the [ ] button, you can show or hide the
image and the grid.
Adjusting the Projected Images
72
i
Use the [ ], [ ], [ ], and [ ] buttons to select the area you
want to adjust, and then press the [ ] button.
Adjustment tips
When Horizontal Corner is selected:
Adjust the upper area based on the lowest point (indicated by the U
arrow).
Adjust the lower area based on the highest point (indicated by the V
arrow).
A
B
When Vertical Corner is selected:
Adjust the left and right based on the point nearest to the vertical
line in the center of the screen.
a
If the [Esc] button is pressed for approximately two seconds,
the confirm default reset screen is displayed.
Select Yes to reset the result of Corner Wall.
j
Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to adjust the shape.
If the message "Cannot adjust any further." is displayed while
adjusting, you cannot adjust the shape any further in the direction
indicated by the gray triangle.
k
Repeat steps 9 and 10 as needed to adjust any remaining parts.
If the image expands or contracts, go to the next step and adjust the
linearity.
l
Press the [Esc] button to display the screen from step 4. Select
Linearity, and then press the [ ] button.
Adjusting the Projected Images
73
m
Press the [ ][ ] buttons to adjust the linearity.
Correct it so that the distance between lines is equal.
When pressing the [ ] button
When Horizontal Corner is selected When Vertical Corner is selected
When pressing the [ ] button
When Horizontal Corner is selected When Vertical Corner is selected
n
To complete the corrections, press the [Menu] button.
a
You can fine tune the corrected results. Use Quick Corner to adjust
the tilt of the image, and then use Point Correction for fine tuning.
Select Quick Corner or Point Correction on the screen from step
4.
s "Quick Corner" p.66
s "Point Correction" p.74
Point Correction
Divides the projected image by the grid and corrects the distortion by
moving the point of intersection from side to side and up and down.
a
•You can make corrections in 0.5 pixel increments in all directions
within the following ranges.
EB-L1075U/EB-L1070U/EB-L1065U/EB-L1060U/EB-L1050U: Vertical
and horizontal up to a maximum of 32 pixels.
EB-L1070W/EB-L1060W/EB-L1070: Vertical and horizontal up to a
maximum of 20 pixels.
•If 4K Enhancement is enabled, a message is displayed. Select Yes to
disable 4K Enhancement. (EB-L1075U/EB-L1070U/EB-L1065U/EB-
L1060U/EB-L1050U only)
s Image - Image Enhancement - 4K Enhancement p.140
a
Press the [Menu] button while projecting.
b
Select Geometry Correction from Settings.
c
Select Point Correction, and then press the [ ] button.
Adjusting the Projected Images
74
"If this setting is changed, the image may be distorted." is displayed,
press the [ ] button again.
d
Select Point Correction, and then press the [ ] button.
e
Select Point Correction, and then press the [ ] button.
Point Correction Select the point number (3x3, 5x5, 9x9, 17x17),
and then make the Point Correction setting.
Pattern Color Select the color of the grid when performing
corrections.
Reset Resets all corrections for Point Correction to their
default values.
f
Select the point number (3x3, 5x5, 9x9, or 17x17), and then press
the [ ] button.
a
If you reduce the number of points during correction,
corrections at the position without a point are reset.
Adjusting the Projected Images
75
g
Use the [ ], [ ], [ ], and [ ] buttons to move to the point you
want to correct, and then press the [ ] button.
h
Use the [ ], [ ], [ ], and [ ] buttons to correct distortion.
To continue to correct another point, press the [Esc] button to
return to the previous screen, then repeat the steps 7 and 8.
a
Each time you press the [ ] button, you can show or hide the
image and the grid.
i
To complete the corrections, press the [Menu] button.
a
You can fine tune the corrected results. Select Quick Corner on the
screen from step 4 to adjust the tilt of the image.
s "Quick Corner" p.66
Selecting the Projection Quality (Selecting Color
Mode)
You can easily obtain the optimum image quality simply by selecting the
setting that best corresponds to your surroundings when projecting. The
brightness of the image varies depending on the mode selected.
Mode Application
Dynamic This is the brightest mode. Ideal for use in a bright room.
Presentation The images are vivid and brought to life. Ideal for
making presentations or watching a TV program in a
bright room.
Natural Reproduces colors faithfully. Ideal for projecting still
pictures such as photos.
Cinema Gives images a natural tone. Ideal for watching films in a
dark room.
BT.709 Produces images that conform to the ITU-R BT.709.
DICOM SIM This produces images with clear shadows. Ideal for
projecting X-ray photographs and other medical
images. The projector is not a medical device and cannot
be used for medical diagnosis.
Multi-Projection Minimize the color tone difference between each
projected image. Ideal for projecting from multiple
projectors.
Adjusting the Projected Images
76
Each time you press the [Color Mode] button, the Color Mode name is
displayed on the screen and the Color Mode changes.
Remote control
a
You can set Color Mode from the Configuration menu.
s Image - Color Mode p.140
Setting the Brightness
Set the brightness for the light source.
a
Press the [Menu] button while projecting.
b
Select Brightness Settings from Settings.
c
Select Light Source Mode, and then press the [ ] button.
d
Select the item you want to set, and then press the [ ] button.
Normal: Select this if you do not want to decrease the brightness.
This makes the light source operation time approximately 20,000
hours.
Medium: Noise from the fan is louder than when Quiet is selected,
but it does not decrease the brightness as much. This sets the
brightness at 85%. This makes the light source operation time
approximately 20,000 hours.
Quiet: Select this if you are concerned about the noise made by the
fan. This sets the brightness at 70%. This makes the light source
operation time approximately 20,000 hours.
Extended: Select this to extend the life expectancy of the light
source. This sets the brightness at 70%. This makes the light source
operation time approximately 30,000 hours.
Custom: Select this to set the Brightness Level manually. When
Custom is selected, Constant Brightness is available.
e
When Light Source Mode is set to Custom, select Brightness
Level, and then use the [ ][ ] buttons to set the brightness.
f
To maintain a fixed brightness, select Constant Brightness, and
set it to On.
a
•When Constant Brightness is set to On, you cannot change
the settings for Light Source Mode and Brightness Level.
When you want to change these settings, set Constant
Brightness to Off.
•When Constant Brightness is set to Off, the value for
Brightness Level changes depending on the current status of
the light source.
•There may be a margin of error in the Brightness Level.
•When the projector is used continuously for more than 24
hours, or when direct shutdown is used regularly, set Light
Source Calibration using the scheduling function. If this is
not set, the Constant Brightness function does not work. You
can also make settings from the Configuration menu.
s "Scheduling Function" p.112
s Reset - Light Source Calibration p.162
Adjusting the Projected Images
77
Guide to Estimated Remains
When Constant Brightness is set to On, the Estimated Remains is
displayed. Estimated Remains indicates the amount of time for which
constant brightness can be maintained.
Display Level Estimated Remains
10,000 hours or more
8,000 to 9,999 hours
6,000 to 7,999 hours
4,000 to 5,999 hours
2,000 to 3,999 hours
0 to 1,999 hours
a
The time displayed on the screen is just a guide. 30,000 hours or more
is displayed in units of 10,000; 2,000 to 29,999 hours is displayed in
units of 1,000; and up to 1,999 hours is displayed in units of 100.
Relationship between Brightness Level and light source operation
time
The following shows the relationship between Brightness Level and the light
source operation time.
When Constant Brightness is set to Off
: Brightness Level
: Approximate light source operation time until its brightness is reduced
by half
AB
100% 20,000 hours
90% 21,000 hours
80% 24,000 hours
70% 30,000 hours
60% 37,000 hours
50% 47,000 hours
40% 61,000 hours
30% 71,000 hours
When Constant Brightness is set to On
: Brightness Level
: Approximate time for which constant brightness of the light source can
be maintained
AB Illustration
85% 6,000 hours
80% 10,000 hours
70% 19,000 hours
60% 29,000 hours
Adjusting the Projected Images
78
AB Illustration
50% 41,000 hours
40% 56,000 hours
30% 78,000 hours
a
•This is an approximate guide only and may change depending on
the projector’s usage and surroundings.
•The times above are the standard hours when using the projector
continuously without changing the Brightness Level or Constant
Brightness settings and are not guaranteed.
•This is an approximate guide only and may change depending on
the projector’s usage and surroundings. You may need to replace
internal parts sooner than the estimated light source operation time.
•When Constant Brightness is set to On, and the approximate
constant time has been exceeded, you may not be able to set a high
value for Brightness Level.
Setting the Amount of Light of the Projected
Image
By automatically setting the luminance according to the brightness of the
displayed image, it lets you enjoy deep and rich images. You can also set
the light source to turn off automatically.
a
Press the [Menu] button while projecting.
b
Select Light Source Control from Image, and then press the [ ]
button.
c
Select Light Source Control, and then press the [ ] button.
d
Select the light source operation according to the image signal,
and then press the [ ] button.
Adjusting the Projected Images
79
•Off: Select if you do not want to control the light source.
•Dynamic Contrast: Automatically adjust the amount of light when
projecting according to the brightness of the image.
•Lights-Out Control: Automatically turns off the light after the set
time has elapsed at the specified video level.
e
Press the [Esc] button to return to the previous screen.
f
If you selected Dynamic Contrast in step 4, make the following
settings in Dynamic Contrast.
•Response Speed: Select High Speed to adjust the amount of light
as soon as the scene changes.
•Black Level: Set the black level when the brightness level of the
image signal is zero. When you select 0%, the light source turns
off.
g
If you selected Lights-Out Control in step 4, make the following
settings in Lights-Out Control.
•Lights-Out Signal Level: Set the brightness level for the video
signal being controlled. After turning off automatically when
exceeding the specified image level, it turns on immediately.
•Lights-Out Timer: Set the amount of time before automatically
turning off the light source.
h
Press the [Menu] button to finish making settings.
Changing the Aspect Ratio of the Projected Image
You can change the aspect ratio of the projected image to suit the type, the
ratio of height and width, and the resolution of the input signals.
Available aspect modes vary depending on the Screen Type currently set.
a
•Set the Screen Type before changing the aspect ratio.
s "Screen Settings" p.32
•This cannot be changed when Scale Mode is set to Zoom
Display.
s Signal - Scale - Scale Mode p.142
Changing methods
Each time you press the [Aspect] button on the remote control, the aspect
mode name is displayed on the screen and the aspect ratio changes.
Remote control
Aspect Mode Explanation
Auto Projects in an appropriate aspect ratio based on
information from the signal being input.
Normal Projects while retaining the aspect ratio of the input image.
4:3 Projects at an aspect ratio of 4:3.
16:9 Projects at an aspect ratio of 16:9.
Adjusting the Projected Images
80
Aspect Mode Explanation
Full Projects at the full size of the projected screen.
H-Zoom Projects by enlarging the input image to the full width of
the projected screen while retaining the aspect ratio. Areas
that exceed the edges of the projected screen are not
projected.
V-Zoom Projects by enlarging the input image to the full height of
the projected screen while retaining the aspect ratio. Areas
that exceed the edges of the projected screen are not
projected.
Native Projects to the center of the projected screen at the
resolution of the input image. Areas that exceed the edges
of the projected screen are not projected.
a
•The available aspect ratios differ depending on the input signal from
the connected device.
•You can also set the aspect ratio from the Configuration menu.
s Signal - Aspect p.142
•If parts of the computer image are missing, set the Resolution
setting to Wide or Normal from the Configuration menu, according
to the resolution of the computer.
s Signal - Resolution p.142
Adjusting the Image
Hue, Saturation, and Brightness adjustment
You can adjust the Hue (tint), Saturation (vividness), and Brightness of
the six axes R (red), G (green), B (blue), C (cyan), M (magenta), and Y
(yellow) according to your preferences.
a
Press the [Menu] button while projecting.
b
Select Advanced from Image, and then press the [ ] button.
c
Select RGBCMY, and then press the [ ] button.
d
Use the [ ][ ] buttons to select the color you want to adjust,
and then press the [ ] button.
e
Use the [ ][ ] buttons to select the item, and then use the
[][ ] buttons to make the adjustments.
Each time you press the [ ] button, the adjustment screen changes.
f
To complete the corrections, press the [Menu] button.
Adjusting the Projected Images
81
Gamma adjustment
You can adjust differences in the halftone brightness that occurs depending
on the connected device.
a
Adjust by projecting a still picture. Gamma cannot be adjusted
correctly by using movies.
a
Press the [Menu] button while projecting.
b
Select Advanced from Image, and then press the [ ] button.
c
Select Gamma, and then press the [ ] button.
d
Use the [ ][ ] buttons to adjust the value.
When a larger value is selected, the dark areas of images become
brighter, but the color saturation for lighter areas may become
weaker.
When a smaller value is selected, you can reduce the overall
brightness of the image to make the image sharper.
If you select DICOM SIM from Color Mode on the Image menu,
select the adjustment value according to the projection size.
•If the projection size is 120 inches or less, select a small value.
•If the projection size is 120 inches or more, select a large value.
a
Medical images may not be reproduced correctly according to
your installation environment and screen specifications.
e
To make detailed adjustments, select Custom, and then press the
[] button.
f
Use the [ ][ ] buttons to select the tone that you want to
change, and then use the [ ][ ] buttons to make the
adjustments. When you have finished making changes, confirm by
using the [ ] button.
If you use the [ ][ ] buttons to select the tone that you want to
change, the image flashes and you can check the tone area of the
adjustment target.
Adjusting the Projected Images
82
g
When Do you want to continue adjusting the setting? is
displayed, select Yes or No.
To adjust another tone, select Yes, and repeat the procedure from
step 6.
Adjusting Image Resolution (Image Enhancement)
You can adjust the resolution of the image using Image Enhancement to
reproduce a clear image with an emphatic texture and material feel.
a
Press the [Menu] button while projecting.
b
Select Image Enhancement from Image, and then press the [ ]
button.
The following screen is displayed.
4K Enhancement (EB-L1075U/EB-L1070U/EB-L1065U/EB-L1060U/
EB-L1050U only)
4K Enhancement is a function that projects an image at a doubled
resolution by diagonally shifting 1 pixel in increments of 0.5 pixels.
A high-resolution image signal is projected in fine detail.
Adjusting the Projected Images
83
a
Select 4K Enhancement from Image Enhancement, and then
press the [ ] button.
b
Select one of the following, and then press the [ ] button.
Off: Disables 4K Enhancement. If a signal that exceeds the panel
resolution of this projector is input, the image is displayed according
to the panel resolution of this projector.
Full HD: If a signal with a resolution of 1080i/1080p/WUXGA or
higher is input, 4K Enhancement is enabled.
WUXGA+: If a signal with a resolution that exceeds WUXGA is
input, 4K Enhancement is enabled. To project a high-resolution
movie, you can project a high-definition image by using this setting
with Image Preset Mode.
a
•To project from multiple projectors, select Off to unify each
image.
•Off is ideal for projecting presentation materials from
computers and so on.
•If set to Full HD or WUXGA+, the status corrected using the
following function is canceled.
Edge Blending, Scale, Curved Surface, Point Correction,
Corner Wall
When 4K Enhancement is set to Off, the settings return to
their previous state.
c
Press the [Esc] button to return to the previous screen.
Image Preset Mode
Select the optimal setting according to the projected image from five presets
prepared in advance.
The following settings are saved in the presets.
Frame Interpolation, Deinterlacing, Noise Reduction, MPEG Noise
Reduction, Super-resolution, Detail Enhancement
a
•To minimize delays, set Image Preset Mode to Off.
•If you set Image Preset Mode to Off, you cannot set the other items
in Image Enhancement.
a
Select Image Preset Mode from Image Enhancement, and then
press the [ ] button.
b
Select one of the following, and then press the [ ] button.
Preset 1 to Preset 5: The settings saved in advance are applied to the
image.
Off: Select this to turn off presets.
Adjusting the Projected Images
84
a
•After selecting Preset 1 to Preset 5, you can fine tune each
setting individually. The setting after adjustment will be
overwritten.
•The setting after adjustment will be overwritten separately
when 4K Enhancement is enabled and disabled.
c
Press the [Esc] button to return to the previous screen.
Frame Interpolation
The current and previous frames are used to create intermediate frames,
interpolating to produce smooth-moving images. You can resolve clumsy-
moving images, such as frame skipping when projecting a fast moving
image.
a
You cannot set Frame Interpolation in the following situations.
•When 4K Enhancement is enabled
•When a signal with a resolution that exceeds WUXGA is input
•When Aspect is set to V-Zoom
•When Scale is set to Auto or Manual
•When Edge Blending is set to On
a
Select Frame Interpolation from Image Enhancement, and then
press the [ ] button.
b
Select the level of interpolation from Low, Normal or High.
Set to Off if noise occurs after setting them.
c
Press the [Menu] button to finish making settings.
Adjusting the Projected Images
85
Noise Reduction
You can smooth out rough images for softer image quality when inputting
progressive signals or progressive interlace signals.
a
This is disabled in the following cases.
•When 4K Enhancement is enabled
•When a signal with a resolution that exceeds WUXGA is input
a
Select Noise Reduction from Image Enhancement, and then
press the [ ] button.
b
Use the [ ][ ] buttons to adjust the value.
c
Press the [Esc] button to return to the previous screen.
MPEG Noise Reduction
You can reduce dot and block noise that occurs in outlines when projecting
MPEG movies.
a
This is disabled in the following cases.
•When 4K Enhancement is enabled
•When a signal with a resolution that exceeds WUXGA is input
a
Select MPEG Noise Reduction from Image Enhancement, and
then press the [ ] button.
b
Select a level to reduce noise from Low, Normal, or High, and
then press the [ ] button.
If Off is selected, MPEG Noise Reduction is disabled.
c
Press the [Esc] button to return to the previous screen.
Adjusting the Projected Images
86
Super-resolution
To display a crisp image, you can reduce the blurring that is created on the
edge when the resolution of the image signal is scaled up and projected.
a
Select Super-resolution from Image Enhancement, and then
press the [ ] button.
b
Use the [ ][ ] buttons to select the item, and then use the
[][ ] buttons to make the adjustments.
Fine Line Adjust: If this parameter is set to a positive value, details
such as hair or fabric patterns will be enhanced.
Soft Focus Detail: If this parameter is set to a positive value, the
outline, background, and the other main parts of the objects in the
image will be enhanced to show them clearly.
c
Press the [Esc] button to return to the previous screen.
Detail Enhancement
You can enhance the contrast in detailed areas of an image to create a more
emphatic texture and material feel.
a
Select Detail Enhancement from Image Enhancement, and then
press the [ ] button.
b
Use the [ ][ ] buttons to select the item, and then use the
[][ ] buttons to make the adjustments.
Strength: The larger the value, the more the contrast is enhanced.
Range: The larger the value, the wider the range of detail
enhancement becomes.
a
Depending on the image, a highlight may be noticeable at the
border between colors. If this bothers you, set a smaller value.
c
Press the [Esc] button to return to the previous screen.
Projecting 3D Images
By using two projectors, you can project passive 3D images. The following
are required to project and view 3D images.
•Polarizer
•Passive 3D glasses
•Mount for stacking
Adjusting the Projected Images
87
•Silver screen for passive 3D
a
This projector arranges the direction of polarizing projection for R
(red), G (green), and B (blue). It is not necessary to inverse left and
right eye G (green) image signals.
Adjusting the Projected Images
88
Useful Functions
This section describes the Multi-Projection, Split Screen, Memory, Schedule, and Security functions.
You can setup up to 9 projectors to project one large and wide image.
You can adjust the difference of brightness and color tone between each
projected image to create a seamless screen.
a
•Set 4K Enhancement to Off. (EB-L1075U/EB-L1070U/EB-L1065U/
EB-L1060U/EB-L1050U only)
•We recommend setting the focus, zoom, and lens shift at least
20 minutes after you start the projection, because images are not
stable right after turning on the projector.
•If the values for Geometry Correction are large, the image position
adjustment for overlapping images becomes difficult.
•The Test Pattern can be displayed to adjust the projection status
without connecting video equipment.
s "Displaying the Test Pattern" p.33
•If you project a dot by dot image that can be projected without
being enlarged or reduced, you can make adjustments precisely.
•When Run Periodically is set to On in Light Source Calibration,
calibration is automatically performed, and colors adjusted using
multi-projection may change. Set this to Off to maintain the
projected image as it is.
s Reset - Light Source Calibration - Run Periodically p.162
Adjustment Procedure
Advance preparation
(1) Turn on all projectors.
(2) Set an ID for all projectors and the remote controls.
s "Set the projector ID" p.42
Adjusting the projected position
(1) Adjust the position (angle) of the projector.
s "Installation Settings" p.31
(2) Adjust the arrangement of the images.
s "Tiling" p.90
Adjusting the projected images
(1) Adjust the aspect ratio of the images.
s "Screen Settings" p.32
s "Changing the Aspect Ratio of the Projected Image" p.80
(2) Adjust the lens shift.
s "Adjusting the Position of the Projected Image (Lens Shift
Adjustment)" p.34
(3) Adjust the zoom and focus.
s "Adjusting the Image Size" p.37
s "Correcting the Focus" p.38
(4) Adjust small differences in the images.
s "Point Correction" p.74
(5) Adjust the edges of the images.
s "Edge Blending" p.91
s "Black Level" p.93
(6) Adjust the brightness and tint of the images.
s "Color Matching" p.96
(7) Select the sections of the images.
s "Displaying a Scaled Image" p.97
Tiling
When using multiple projectors to create one large image, assign a
projection position to each projector.
Multi-Projection Function
90
a
Before performing tiling, adjust the projected image so that it is a
rectangle. Also, adjust the size and focus of the images.
s "Adjusting the Image Size" p.37
s "Correcting the Focus" p.38
a
Press the [Menu] button while projecting.
b
Select Multi-Projection from Extended, and then press the [ ]
button.
c
Select Tiling, and then press the [ ] button.
d
Select Layout, and then press the [ ] button.
(1) Set the number of projectors in Row and Column.
(2) Select Settings, and then press the [ ] button.
e
Repeat steps 1 to 4 for each projector to be used for tiling.
f
Select Location Setup, and then press the [ ] button.
(1) Set the positions of the projected images in Row Order and Column
Order.
Row Order: Place screens from top to bottom in the order of 1, 2, 3.
Column Order: Place screens from left to right in the order of A, B, C.
(2) Select Settings, and then press the [ ] button.
g
Repeat step 6 for each projector.
h
Input the image signal to display the image.
s "Automatically Detecting Input Signals and Changing the
Projected Image (Source Search)" p.61
When tiling is complete, adjust any positional gaps and the tint of the
projected images.
s "Adjusting the projected images" p.90
Edge Blending
You can fine tune the overlapping areas to make seamless screen.
Multi-Projection Function
91
a
Before performing edge blending to raise the precision of adjustments,
press the [Color Mode] button on the remote control, and then set
Color Mode to Multi-Projection.
a
Press the [Menu] button while projecting.
b
Select Multi-Projection from Extended.
c
Select Edge Blending, and then press the [ ] button.
The following screen is displayed.
Submenu Function
Edge Blending Set to On to activate Edge Blending. Set to Off
when not projecting from multiple projectors.
Submenu Function
Top Edge/Bottom
Edge/Left Edge/Right
Edge
Blending: Set to On to activate Edge Blending
towards your settings, and the blend range will be
shaded.
Blend Start Position: Displays blending start
position as a red line, and adjusts at the level of one
pixel.
Blend Range: Adjusts the range to be shaded.
Adjustment is possible at the level of one pixel. The
maximum range is 45% of the resolution.
Blend Curve: Select how to apply shading.
Line Guide Set to On to display a guide on the Edge Blending
setting range.
Pattern Guide Set to On to display a lattice pattern to match the
position of the Edge Blending setting range.
Guide Color Select a combination of guide colors.
d
Turn on Edge Blending.
(1) Select Edge Blending, and then press the [ ] button.
(2) Select On, and then press the [ ] button.
(3) Press the [Esc] button.
e
Set Line Guide to On.
(1) Select Line Guide, and then press the [ ] button.
(2) Select On, and then press the [ ] button.
(3) Press the [Esc] button.
a
If the guide is not clear, you can change the color of the guide
in Guide Color.
Multi-Projection Function
92
f
Set Pattern Guide to On.
(1) Select Pattern Guide, and then press the [ ] button.
(2) Select On, and then press the [ ] button.
(3) Press the [Esc] button.
g
Set Top Edge, Bottom Edge, Left Edge, or Right Edge according
to the parts of the image that are overlapped.
The following shows how to set screen (1) as an example.
In the example above, you need to adjust the Left Edge because you
can see the overlapping areas on the left side of the image (1).
(1) Select Left Edge, and then press the [ ] button.
(2) Select Blending, and then press the [ ] button.
(3) Select On, and then press the [ ] button.
(4) Press the [Esc] button.
(5) In Blend Start Position, align the blending start position with the edge (2)
of the image.
(6) Press the [Esc] button.
(7) In Blend Range, adjust the range (3) to be shaded.
The value for when the overlapped range and the guide are in the same
position is the best.
(8) In Blend Curve, adjust how to apply shading.
(9) Press the [Esc] button.
h
After the settings are complete, set Line Guide and Pattern Guide
to Off to finish.
Black Level
When a black image is displayed, only areas where the images overlap
stands out. The black level function allows you to match the brightness and
tone for areas where the images do not overlap with areas where the images
overlap, to make the difference less noticeable.
a
•You cannot adjust the Black Level when a test pattern is displayed.
•If the Geometry Correction value is large, you may not be able to
adjust correctly.
•The brightness and tone may differ in areas where the images
overlap as well as in other areas even after performing black level
adjustment.
•If you change the Top Edge/Bottom Edge/Right Edge/Left Edge
setting, the Black Level is returned to its default value.
s "Edge Blending" p.91
Multi-Projection Function
93
a
Select Black Level from Multi-Projection, and then press the [ ]
button.
b
Select Color Adjustment, and then press the [ ] button.
The areas are displayed based on the settings for Top Edge/Bottom
Edge/Right Edge/Left Edge.
c
Select the area you want to adjust, and then press the [ ]
button.
The selected area is displayed in orange.
a
When multiple screens are overlapping, adjust based on the area
with the most overlap (the brightest area). In the illustration
below, first align (2) with (1), and then adjust so that (3) aligns
with (2).
d
Adjust the black tone and brightness.
e
Repeat steps 3 and 4 as needed to adjust any remaining parts.
Multi-Projection Function
94
After this, if the tone for some areas do not match, adjust them by
Area Correction.
f
Press the [Esc] button, to return to the screen displayed in step
2.
g
Select Area Correction, and then press the [ ] button.
h
Select Start Adjustments, and then press the [ ] button.
Boundary lines that indicate areas where images overlap are
displayed.
The boundary lines are displayed based on the settings for Top
Edge/Bottom Edge/Right Edge/Left Edge.
i
Use the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to select a boundary line of the
area you want to adjust.
The selected line is displayed in orange.
j
Press the [ ] button to confirm the selection.
Multi-Projection Function
95
k
Use the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to adjust the boundary line
positions, and then press the [ ] button.
l
Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to select the point you want to
move, and then press the [ ] button.
The selected point is displayed in orange.
m
Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to move the point.
To continue to move another point, press the [Esc] button to return
to step 12, and then repeat steps 12 and 13.
To adjust another boundary line, press the [Esc] button until the
screen for selecting a boundary line from step 9 is displayed.
a
To return Black Level to its default value, press the [Esc]
button to return to the screen from step 7, select [Reset], and
then press the [ ] button.
n
To complete the adjustment, press the [Menu] button.
Color Matching
You can fine tune the color balance and brightness from black to white for
each color tone.
a
Select Color Matching from Multi-Projection, and then press the
[] button.
The following screen is displayed.
Half of the overlapped area is displayed in black so that it is easy to
check the edge of the image.
Adjustment Level: There are eight levels from white, through gray,
and up to black. You can adjust each level individually.
Red, Green, Blue: Adjusts the tone for each color.
Brightness: Adjusts the image brightness.
Multi-Projection Function
96
a
Whenever the [ ] button is pressed, the screen changes
between the projected image and the adjustment screen.
b
Select Adjustment Level, and then use the [ ][ ] buttons to set
the adjustment level.
c
Select Red, Green, or Blue, and then press the [ ][ ] buttons to
adjust the color tone.
d
Select Brightness, and then use the [ ][ ] buttons to adjust the
brightness.
e
Return to step 1 and adjust each level.
f
Press the [Esc] button to return to the previous screen.
Displaying a Scaled Image
A section of the image is cropped and displayed. This allows you to create
one large image by combining images projected from multiple projectors.
a
Project the image, and then press the [Menu] button.
b
Select Multi-Projection from Extended.
a
You can also perform the same operation from Scale in
Signal.
c
Select Scale, and then press the [ ] button.
d
Turn on Scale.
(1) Select Scale, and then press the [ ] button.
(2) Select Auto or Manual, and then press the [ ] button.
Auto: Automatically adjusts the clipped area according to the adjustment
values in Edge Blending and Tiling. You do not need to perform any steps
after step 6.
Manual: Allows you to adjust the clipped area manually.
(3) Press the [Esc] button to return to the previous screen.
Multi-Projection Function
97
a
If auto adjustment does not work for the clipped image, adjust
the aspect ratio, and then select Auto.
s "Changing the Aspect Ratio of the Projected Image" p.80
e
Set Scale Mode.
(1) Select Scale Mode, and then press the [ ] button.
(2) Select Zoom Display or Full Display, and then press the [ ] button.
Zoom Display: Adjusts according to the image currently displayed.
Enlarge
Move
Full Display: Adjusts according to the projector's panel size (the
maximum area in which an image can be displayed).
Enlarge
Move
(3) Press the [Esc] button to return to the previous screen.
f
Adjust the scale.
Select the adjustment method with the [ ][ ] buttons, then adjust
using the [ ][ ] buttons. (Minimum magnification of 0.5 to
maximum magnification of 10)
-+: Enlarges or reduces an image horizontally and vertically at the
same time.
Scale Vertically: Enlarges or reduces an image vertically.
Scale Horizontally: Enlarges or reduces an image horizontally.
g
The image is clipped and adjusted.
(1) Select Clip Adjustment, and then press the [ ] button.
If you select Clip Range, the range and coordinates of the image that the
projector will project is displayed.
(2) Use the [ ], [ ], [ ], and [ ] buttons to scroll the image.
Adjust the coordinates and size of each image while viewing the screen.
(3) Press the [Menu] button to finish making settings.
a
You can check the displayed area after clipping for the entire
image from Clip Range.
Multi-Projection Function
98
Projecting Two Images Simultaneously (Split
Screen)
You can simultaneously project images from two sources on the right and
left of the screen.
a
You cannot use the Split Screen feature in Content Playback mode.
Input Sources for Split Screen Projection
The combinations of input sources that can be projected on a split screen
are listed below.
Left Screen Right Screen
HDMI HDBa-
seT
DVI-D Com-
puter
BNC LAN
HDMI -
HDBaseT -
DVI-D -
Computer ---
BNC ---
LAN ---
a
•Signals with a horizontal resolution that exceeds 1920 are not
supported.
•If 4K Enhancement is enabled, a message is displayed. Select Yes to
disable 4K Enhancement. (EB-L1075U/EB-L1070U/EB-L1065U/EB-
L1060U/EB-L1050U only)
s Image - Image Enhancement - 4K Enhancement p.140
Projection Functions
99
Operating procedures
Projecting on a split screen
a
Press the [Split] button on the remote control while projecting.
The currently selected input source is projected on the left of the
screen.
Remote control
a
You can perform the same operations from the configuration
menu.
s Settings - Split Screen p.143
b
Press the [Menu] button.
The Split Screen Setup screen is displayed.
c
Select Source, and then press the [ ] button.
d
Select each input source for Left and Right.
a
You can perform the same operations using the following
procedure.
s "Automatically Detecting Input Signals and Changing the
Projected Image (Source Search)" p.61
s "Switching to the Target Image by Remote Control" p.62
e
Select Execute, and then press the [ ] button.
To switch the source during split screen projection, start the
procedure from step 2.
Projection Functions
100
Switching the left and right screens
Use the following procedure to switch the projected images.
a
Press the [Menu] button during split screen projection.
b
Select Swap Screens, and then press the [ ] button.
The projected images on the left and right are swapped.
Switching the left and right image sizes
a
Press the [Menu] button during split screen projection.
b
Select the Screen Size, and then press the [ ] button.
c
Select the screen size you want to display, and then press the [ ]
button.
The projected images will appear as shown below after setting the screen
size.
Equal Larger Left
Larger Right
a
•You cannot enlarge both the left screen and right screen images at
the same time.
•When one image is enlarged, the other image is reduced.
•Depending on the video signals that are input, the images on the left
and right may not appear to be the same size even if Equal is
set.
Changing the audio
a
Press the [Menu] button during split screen projection.
b
Select Audio Source, and then press the [ ] button.
Projection Functions
101
c
Select the audio you want to output, and then press the [ ]
button.
When you select Auto, audio is output for the enlarged screen. If the
screen sizes are Equal, audio is output for the screen on the left.
Ending the split screen
Press the [Esc] button to end split screen.
The following steps can also be used to end the split screen.
•Press the [Split] button on the remote control.
•Select Exit Split Screen on the Split Screen Setup screen. s p.100
Restrictions during split screen projection
Operating restrictions
The following operations cannot be performed during split screen
projection.
•Setting the configuration menu
•E-Zoom
•Changing the aspect mode
•Using the [User1], [User2], or [User3] button on the remote control
•Help can be displayed only when image signals are not input or when
an error or warning notification is displayed.
•The user's logo is not displayed.
Restriction relating to images
•For the image on the right screen, the default values for the Image
menu are applied. However, the settings for the image projected on the
left screen are applied to the image on the right screen for Color Mode,
Color Temp., Frame Interpolation, and Super-resolution.
•Deinterlacing and Noise Reduction are only enabled for the left screen.
Hiding the Image and Sound Temporarily (A/V
Mute)
You can use this when you want to focus the audience's attention on what
you are saying, or if you do not want to show details such as when you are
changing between files during presentations from a computer.
Each time you press the [A/V Mute] button, A/V Mute turns on or off.
Remote control
Projection Functions
102
a
•When A/V Mute is enabled, the light source turns off.
•If you want to fade out or fade in when turning the video on or off,
set the desired number of seconds in Fade-out and Fade-in.
s Extended - Operation - A/V Mute Settings - Fade-out, Fade-in
p.146
•When A/V mute is activated and no operations are performed for
about 2 hours, the projector turns off automatically. If you do not
want to turn off the power, set A/V Mute Timer to Off.
s Extended - Operation - A/V Mute Settings - A/V Mute Timer
p.146
•When A/V Mute Release is set to A/V Mute from the configuration
menu, the following operations can still be performed without
releasing A/V mute.
- Change the source with the change input buttons on the remote
control.
- Control the projector from a computer using communication
commands.
s Extended - Operation - A/V Mute Settings - A/V Mute Release
p.146
A/V mute is only released by pressing the [A/V Mute] button, or by
sending an A/V mute Off command.
•When projecting moving images, the images and sound continue to
be played back while A/V Mute is on. It is not possible to resume
projection from the point where A/V Mute was activated.
Freezing the Image (Freeze)
When Freeze is activated on moving images, the frozen image continues to
project on the screen, so you can project a moving image one frame at a
time like a still photo. Also, you can perform operations such as changing
between files during presentations from a computer without projecting any
images if the Freeze function is activated beforehand.
Each time you press the [Freeze] button, Freeze turns on or off.
Remote control
a
•Audio does not stop.
•When projecting moving images, the images continue to be played
back while the screen is frozen. It is not possible to resume
projection from the point where the screen was frozen.
•If the [Freeze] button is pressed while the Configuration menu or
the Help screen is displayed, the menu or the Help screen that is
displayed is closed.
•Freeze still works while E-Zoom is being used.
Projection Functions
103
Enlarging Part of the Image (E-Zoom)
This is useful when you want to expand images to see them in greater
detail, such as graphs and tables.
a
Start E-Zoom.
Press the [z] button to display the Cross ( ).
Remote control
b
Move the Cross ( ) to the area of the image that you want to
enlarge.
Remote control
c
Enlarge.
Remote control
[z] button: Expands the area each time
it is pressed. You can expand quickly by
holding the button down.
[x] button: Reduces images that have
been enlarged.
[Esc] button: Cancels E-Zoom.
a
•During enlarged projection, press the [ ], [ ], [ ], or
[] buttons to scroll the image.
•E-Zoom is unavailable when Scale is on.
s Signal - Scale p.142
•If 4K Enhancement is enabled, a message is displayed. Select
Yes to disable 4K Enhancement. (EB-L1075U/EB-L1070U/EB-
L1065U/EB-L1060U/EB-L1050U only)
s Image - Image Enhancement - 4K Enhancement
p.140
Saving a User's Logo
You can save the image that is currently being projected as a User's Logo.
a
•When User's Logo Protection from Password Protection is set to
On, a message is displayed and the User's Logo cannot be changed.
Perform operations after setting User's Logo Protection to Off.
s "Managing Users (Password Protection)" p.115
•If you use the batch setup function to copy menu settings between
multiple projectors, the User's Logo is also copied. Do not set images
that you do not want to share across multiple projectors as the
User's Logo.
Projection Functions
104
a
Project the image you want to save as the User's Logo, and then
press the [Menu] button.
s "Configuration Menu Operations" p.136
b
Select User's Logo from Extended.
a
When you select User's Logo, settings such as Geometry
Correction, E-Zoom, Aspect, Scale, and Screen Type are
temporarily disabled.
c
Select Start Setting, and then press the [ ] button.
The confirmation screen is displayed.
d
Select Yes, and then press the [ ] button.
e
When the message "Save this image as the User's Logo?" is
displayed, select Yes.
The image is saved. After the image has been saved, the message
"Completed." is displayed.
a
Select Reset to delete the image you registered and return to the
default settings.
Projection Functions
105
Content Playback mode allows you to project images suitable for digital
signage in locations such as museums, showrooms, and stores. You can
project playlists of photos and videos stored in an external memory. You
can use the effects features to change the color and shape of the projected
image.
a
The Content Playback feature uses the USB-A port; this means that
you cannot use the wireless LAN feature at the same time.
Switching to Content Playback Mode
Switch to Content Playback mode to play a playlist.
a
Press the [Menu] button while projecting.
b
Select Content Playback from Settings.
c
Select On, and then press the [ ] button.
A confirmation message is displayed.
d
Restart the projector to enable Content Playback mode.
e
Press the [ ] button on the control panel or the remote control.
The Home screen is displayed.
f
Check that Content Playback mode is enabled.
Playing a Playlist
Content Playback mode allows you to project photos and videos that have
been saved as playlists.
Content Playback Feature
106
a
•You need to assign USB to a User Button in advance.
s Settings - User Button p.143
•The USB flash drive must meet the following requirements.
- Formatted as FAT 16/32
- Only one partition
- No security features enabled
- Do not use a multi-card reader or USB hub
- Total length of USB flash drive is 6 cm or less
a
Create a playlist using Epson Projector Content Manager and save
it to a USB flash device.
a
See the "Epson Projector Content Manager Operation Guide"
for details.
b
Connect the USB flash drive to the projector’s USB-A port (the
wireless LAN module installation section) while Content Playback
mode is enabled.
s "Installing the Wireless LAN Unit" p.54
c
Press the user button assigned to USB on the remote control.
The first playlist or the scheduled playlist is played.
a
•Press the numeric buttons while holding down the [Num]
button to play a playlist that has been registered to your
favorites. You can register favorites using Epson Projector
Content Manager.
•To select a playlist to play from the list, select USB Viewer
from the Settings menu, and then use the up, down, left, and
right buttons to select your file.
s Settings - Content Playback - USB Viewer p.143
Adding Effects to Images (Effect Feature)
In Content Playback mode, you can change the color and shape of the
image you are projecting.
Content Playback Feature
107
a
When using the Effect feature, you need to run Refresh Mode
periodically.
s Reset - Refresh Mode p.162
a
Press the [Menu] button while Content Playback mode is enabled,
select [Settings], and then press the [ ] button.
b
Select Overlay Effect from Content Playback, and then press the
[] button.
c
Set Overlay Effect to On, and then press the [ ] button.
d
Select Shape Filter, and then press the [ ] button.
e
Adjust the following items as necessary.
•Shape: Select the shape of the effect from Circle, Square, or
Custom.
a
You can register your favorite images to Custom using Epson
Projector Content Manager. See the "Epson Projector Content
Manager Operation Guide" for details.
•Filter Effect: Select whether to mask the inside or the outside of
the selected shape.
•Size: Set the size of the selected shape.
•Position: Set the display position of the selected shape.
f
Select Color Filter, and then press the [ ] button.
g
Adjust the following items as necessary.
•Color Filter: Select the color of the effect.
•Custom: Adjust the Red, Green, and Blue.
h
Select Lightness to set the brightness of the effect.
i
Press the [Menu] button to finish making settings.
Restrictions on Content Playback Mode
Operating restrictions
You cannot change the following operations or settings in Content Playback
mode.
Content Playback Feature
108
•Color Temp. (when Warm White or Cool White is selected as the
Color Filter)
•Blanking
•Split Screen
•Display Background
•Screen
•Auto Source Search
•Remote Password
•Edge Blending
•Log Save Destination
Also, you cannot use Epson Projector Professional Tool in Content
Playback mode.
Content Playback Feature
109
The settings for the image currently displayed and values for geometry
correction are saved as a memory, allowing you to load them when
necessary.
Saving/Loading/Erasing/Resetting the Memory
a
Press the [Memory] button while projecting.
Remote control
a
You can also operate from the Configuration menu.
s Settings - Memory p.143
b
Select a memory type, and then press the [ ] button.
Memory: Settings for the following menu items are saved in the
memory. You can register up to 10 values.
Top Menu Submenu
Image All setting items
Signal Scale
Settings Brightness Settings
Extended Edge Blending
Black Level
Color Matching
Lens Position: Registers the position of the lens adjusted using lens
shift, zoom, focus, and distortion. You can register up to 10 values.
s "Registering and Loading Lens Adjustment Values" p.39
Geometry Correction: Adjustment value of the geometry correction
is saved. You can register up to 3 values.
c
Select the function you want to perform, then press the [ ]
button.
Memory Function
110
Function Explanation
Load Memory Loads the saved memory. When you select a
memory and press the [ ] button, the settings
applied to the current image are replaced with the
settings from the memory.
Save Memory Registers current settings in the memory. When
you select a memory name and press the [ ]
button, the settings are saved.
Erase Memory Erases the registered memory. When you select a
memory name and press the [ ] button, a
message is displayed. Select Yes, and then press the
[] button to erase the selected memory.
Rename Memory Changes the memory name. Select the memory
name you want to change, and then press the [ ]
button. Enter the memory name using the soft
keyboard.
s "Soft keyboard operations" p.152
When you have finished, move the cursor over
Finish, and then press the [ ] button.
Function Explanation
Reset Memory Resets the name and settings of a saved memory.
To reset all memories saved in Memory, Lens
Position, and Geometry Correction, use Reset All
Memories.
s Reset - Reset All Memories p.162
a
If the mark on the left of the memory name is turned blue, it
means the memory has already been registered. When you
select a registered memory, a message is displayed asking you to
confirm that you want to overwrite the memory. If you select
Yes, the previous settings are deleted and the current settings
are registered.
Memory Function
111
You can schedule turning the projector power on/off and switching the
input source, as events in the schedule. Registered events are executed
automatically at the specified time on the specified dates or weekly.
You can register up to 30 events in Schedule, and one event in Extended
Schedule.
Saving an Event
Setting an Event
a
Press the [Menu] button while projecting.
s "Configuration Menu Operations" p.136
b
Select Schedule Settings from Extended.
c
Select Add New from Schedule.
d
Set the schedule.
Submenu Name Function
Event Settings Select an operation of the projector when the event
is executed. Select No Change for items that you do
not want to change when the event occurs.
You can set the following item operations.
Schedule
•Power
•Source
•Light Source Mode
•A/V Mute
•Light Source Calibration
•Refresh Mode
•Volume
Date / Time Settings Set the date, day of the week, and time to execute
the event. You can set up to four weeks later. Use
the soft keyboard to enter the date and time.
s "Soft keyboard operations" p.152
e
Select Save, and then press the [ ] button.
To register additional events, repeat steps 3 to 5.
f
Select Setup complete, and then select Yes to finish saving.
a
•Light Source Calibration does not start automatically when the
projector is used continuously for more than 24 hours, or when
direct shutdown is used regularly. Set Light Source Calibration to
enable this function after every 100 hours of usage.
•When Light Source Calibration is enabled, turn on the projector at
least 20 minutes before the event.
Scheduling Function
112
Checking an Event
This section explains how to check a Schedule event.
a
Press the [Menu] button while projecting.
b
Select Schedule Settings from Extended.
c
Press the [ ][ ] buttons to highlight the date you want to check.
The details of the events registered on the selected date are displayed.
The indicator turns on when an event is saved.
(Blue): Enabled event
(Gray): Disabled event
: Regular event
(Aqua): Single event
(Orange): Regular event
(Green): Communication monitoring On/Off
(Gray): Disabled event
Editing an Event
a
Press the [Menu] button while projecting.
s "Configuration Menu Operations" p.136
Scheduling Function
113
b
Select Schedule Settings from Extended.
c
Use the [ ][ ] buttons to highlight the date containing the event
you want to edit.
d
Highlight the event you want to edit, and then press the [Esc]
button.
e
Edit the event.
Submenu Name Function
On/Disabled Enable or disable the selected event.
Edit Edits the content of the selected event. Select Save,
and then press the [ ] button to complete the
editing.
Clear Deletes the selected event.
Add New Saves a new event. Select Save, and then press the
[] button to complete registering.
f
Select Setup complete, and then select Yes to finish editing.
a
To delete all registered events, select Schedule Reset, and then
select Yes. Select Setup complete, and then select Yes to delete
the events.
Scheduling Function
114
The projector has the following enhanced security functions.
•Password Protection
You can limit who can use the projector.
•Control Panel Lock/Remote Control Button Lock
You can prevent people changing the settings on the projector without
permission.
s "Restricting Operation" p.117
•Anti-Theft Lock
The projector is equipped with the following anti-theft security device.
s "Anti Theft/Fall Prevention" p.119
Managing Users (Password Protection)
When Password Protection is activated, people who do not know the
password cannot use the projector to project images even if the projector
power is on. Furthermore, the user's logo that is displayed when you turn
on the projector cannot be changed. This acts as an anti-theft function as
the projector cannot be used even if it is stolen. At the time of purchase,
Password Protection is not activated.
Kinds of Password Protection
The following four kinds of Password Protect settings can be made
according to how the projector is being used.
•Power On Protection
When Power On Protection is On, you need to enter a preset password
after the projector is plugged in and turned on (this also applies to Direct
Power On). If the correct password is not entered, projection does not
start.
•User's Logo Protection
Even if someone tries to change the User's Logo set by the owner of the
projector, it cannot be changed. When User's Logo Protection is set to
On, the following setting changes for the User's Logo are prohibited.
•Capturing a User's Logo
•Setting Display Background or Startup Screen from Display
s Extended - Display p.146
•Network Protection
When Network Protection is set to On, changing the settings for
Network is prohibited.
s "Network Menu" p.151
•Schedule Protection
When Schedule Protection is set to On, changing settings for the
projector's system time or schedules is prohibited.
Setting Password Protection
Use the following procedure to set Password Protect.
a
During projection, hold down the [Freeze] button for about five
seconds.
The Password Protection setting menu is displayed.
Remote control
Security Functions
115
a
If Password Protection is already activated, you must enter the
password.
If the password is entered correctly, the Password Protection
setting menu is displayed.
s "Entering the password" p.116
b
Select the type of Password Protect you want to set, and then
press the [ ] button.
c
Select On, and then press the [ ] button.
Press the [Esc] button to display the screen from step 2.
d
Set the password.
(1) Select Password, and then press the [ ] button.
(2) When the message "Change the password?" is displayed, select Yes and
then press the [ ] button. The default password is set to "0000". Change
this to your own desired password. If you select No, the screen displayed
in step 2 is displayed again.
(3) While holding down the [Num] button, enter a four digit number using
the numeric buttons. The number entered is displayed as "* * * *". When
you enter the fourth digit, the confirmation screen is displayed.
Remote control
(4) Re-enter the password.
"Password accepted." is displayed.
If you enter the password incorrectly, a message is displayed prompting
you to re-enter the password.
Entering the password
When the password entry screen is displayed, enter the password using the
remote control.
While holding down the [Num] button, enter the password by pressing the
numeric buttons.
When you enter the correct password, Password Protect is temporarily
released.
Security Functions
116
Attention
•If an incorrect password is entered three times in succession, the message
"The projector's operation will be locked." is displayed for approximately five
minutes, and then the projector switches to standby mode. If this happens,
disconnect the power plug from the electrical outlet and then reinsert it and
turn the projector's power back on. The projector displays the password entry
screen again so that you can enter the correct password.
•If you have forgotten the password, make a note of the "Request Code:
xxxxx" number that appears on the screen and contact the nearest address
provided in the Epson Projector Contact List.
s Epson Projector Contact List
•If you continue to repeat the above operation and input the wrong password
thirty times in succession, the following message is displayed and the
projector does not accept any more password entries. "The projector's
operation will be locked. Contact your nearest Epson service center."
s Epson Projector Contact List
Restricting Operation
The following three kinds of operation restriction functions are available
with the projector.
•Control Panel Lock
This is useful at events or shows when you want to deactivate all buttons
during projection or at schools when you want to limit button operation.
•Lens Lock
This function deactivates all buttons on the remote control related to the
lens operation to prevent improper lens adjustment after it is properly
adjusted.
•Remote control button lock
This function deactivates buttons except for main buttons needed for
basic remote control operation, to prevent mistakes in operations.
Control Panel Lock
Perform one of the following to lock the operation buttons on the control
panel. Even if the control panel is locked, you can still use the remote
control as usual.
•Full Lock
All of the buttons on the control panel are locked. You cannot perform
any operations from the control panel, including turning the power on or
off.
•Partial Lock
All of the buttons on the control panel, except for the [t] button, are
locked.
a
Press the [ ] button on the control panel during projection to
display the Control Panel Lock screen.
a
You can also make settings in Control Panel Lock from the
configuration menu.
s Settings - Lock Setting - Control Panel Lock p.143
b
Select either Full Lock or Partial Lock according to your purpose.
c
Select Yes when the confirmation message is displayed.
The control panel buttons are locked according to the setting you
chose.
Security Functions
117
a
You can release the control panel lock by one of the following
two methods.
•Use the remote control to set Control Panel Lock to Off
from the configuration menu.
s Settings - Lock Setting - Control Panel Lock p.143
•Press and hold down the [ ] button on the control panel
for about seven seconds, a message is displayed and the lock
is released.
Lens Lock
This function locks the following buttons on the remote control related to
the lens operation.
Set the Lens Lock to On in the Configuration menu.
s Settings - Lock Setting - Lens Lock p.143
Remote control button lock
This function locks the following buttons on the remote control.
Each time the [ ] button is pressed for approximately 5 seconds, the
remote control button lock turns on or off.
Remote control
Security Functions
118
a
Even if the remote control button lock is on, the following operations
are possible.
•Resetting default for the Remote Receiver setting
•Releasing the remote control button lock
Anti Theft/Fall Prevention
The projector is equipped with the following types of anti-theft security
devices.
•Security slot
The security slot is compatible with the Microsaver Security System
manufactured by Kensington.
See the following for more details on the Microsaver Security System.
s http://www.kensington.com/
•Security cable installation point
A commercially available theft-prevention wire lock can be passed
through the installation point to secure the projector to a desk or pillar.
See the documentation supplied with the wire lock for locking
instructions.
You can also attach a safety wire to secure the projector and the ceiling
mount to prevent it from falling.
Security Functions
119
Using the Projector on a Network
Follow the instructions in these sections to set up your projector for use on a network.
You can send images to your projector through a wired network. To do
this, connect the projector to your network, and then set up your projector
and computer for network projection.
After connecting and setting up the projector, install Epson iProjection
from the EPSON Projector Software CD-ROM (if available) or Web site.
Epson iProjection software sets up your computer for network projection. It
also allows you to hold interactive meetings by projecting user's computer
screens over a network. See the "Epson iProjection Operation Guide
(Windows/Mac)" for instructions.
Selecting Wired Network Settings
Before you can project from computers on your network, you need to select
network settings on the projector.
a
Make sure you already connected the projector to your wired network
using the LAN port.
s "Connecting a LAN Cable" p.52
a
Press the [Menu] button on the control panel or remote control.
b
Select the Network menu and press [Enter].
c
Select Network Configuration and press [Enter].
d
Select the Basic menu and press [Enter].
e
Select the basic options as necessary.
•Projector Name: Enter the projector name used to identify the
projector over a network. You can enter up to 16 single-byte
alphanumeric characters.
•PJLink Password: Lets you set a password for using the PJLink
protocol for projector control. You can enter up to 32 single-byte
alphanumeric characters.
•Remote Password: Allows you to set an authentication password
for using the Remote function in Epson Web Control when setting
or controlling the projector. You can enter up to 8 single-byte
alphanumeric characters. (The user name is EPSONREMOTE; the
default password is guest.)
•Web Control Password: Allows you to set an authentication
password for using Web Control in Epson Web Control when
setting or controlling the projector. You can enter up to 8 single-
byte alphanumeric characters. (The user name is EPSONWEB; the
default password is admin.)
Wired Network Projection
121
•Moderator Password: Allows you to set an authentication password
for using Epson iProjection when connecting to the projector as a
moderator. Enter four digits for the password. (There is no default
password.)
•Projector Keyword: Lets you turn on a security password to
prevent access to the projector by anyone not in the room with it.
You must enter a displayed keyword using Epson iProjection to
project images and send or receive data.
•Display Keyword: Lets you display a projector keyword on the
projection screen when connecting to the projector using Epson
iProjection.
•Display LAN Info. lets you set the display format for the
projector's network information.
a
Use the displayed keyboard to enter the name, passwords and
keyword. Press [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons on the remote control
to highlight characters and press [Enter] to select them.
f
Select the Wired LAN menu and press [Enter].
g
Assign the IP settings for your network as necessary.
•If your network assigns addresses automatically, select IP Settings
to set the DHCP setting to On.
•If you must set addresses manually, select IP Settings to set the
DHCP setting to Off, and then enter the projector's IP Address,
Subnet Mask, and Gateway Address as necessary.
•If you want to connect the projector to the network using IPv6,
select IPv6 Settings.
s "Wired LAN menu" p.157
a
Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons on the remote control, and
then select the number you want to enter on the soft keyboard
displayed. Press the [Enter] button to confirm.
h
To prevent the IP address from being displayed on the LAN
standby screen and Home screen, set the IP Address Display
setting to Off.
i
If you have finished making settings, select Setup complete.
Follow the on-screen instructions to save the settings and close
the menu.
Wired Network Projection
122
j
Press the [LAN] button on the remote control.
The wired network settings complete when you see the correct IP
address on the LAN standby screen.
Wired Network Projection
123
You can send images to your projector through a wireless network.
To do this, you must install the Epson 802.11b/g/n wireless LAN module,
and then set up your projector and computer for wireless projection.
s "Installing the Wireless LAN Unit" p.54
You can connect the projector to your wireless network by configuring the
connection manually using the projector's Network menus.
Set the projector's time before configuring the Network menu. If the time is
not set, the wireless LAN may not be configured correctly.
s "Setting the Time" p.44
After installing the wireless LAN module and setting up the projector,
install the network software from the EPSON Projector Software CD-ROM
(if available) or download the software, as necessary. Use the following
software and documentation to set up and control wireless projection:
•Epson iProjection (Windows/Mac) software allows you to hold
interactive meetings by projecting the computer screens of users over a
network. See the "Epson iProjection Operation Guide (Windows/Mac)"
for instructions.
•Epson iProjection (iOS/Android) app allows you to project from iOS or
Android mobile devices.
You can download Epson iProjection (iOS/Android) for free from the
App Store or Google Play. Any fees incurred when communicating with
the App Store or Google Play are the responsibility of the customer.
•Epson iProjection (Chromebook) allows you to project images from a
Chromebook.
You can download Epson iProjection (Chromebook) for free from the
Chrome Web Store. Any fees incurred when communicating with the
Chrome Web Store are the responsibility of the customer.
Selecting Wireless Network Settings Manually
Before you can project from your wireless network, you need to select
network settings for the projector.
a
Press the [Menu] button on the control panel or remote control.
b
Select the Network menu and press [Enter].
c
Set Wireless Mode to Wireless LAN On.
Wireless Network Projection
124
d
Select Network Configuration and press [Enter].
e
Select the Basic menu and press [Enter].
f
Select the basic options as necessary.
•Projector Name: Enter the projector name used to identify the
projector over a network. You can enter up to 16 single-byte
alphanumeric characters.
•PJLink Password: Lets you set a password for using the PJLink
protocol for projector control. You can enter up to 32 single-byte
alphanumeric characters.
•Remote Password: Allows you to set an authentication password
for using the Remote function in Epson Web Control when setting
or controlling the projector. You can enter up to 8 single-byte
alphanumeric characters. (The user name is EPSONREMOTE; the
default password is guest.)
•Web Control Password: Allows you to set an authentication
password for using Web Control in Epson Web Control when
setting or controlling the projector. You can enter up to 8 single-
byte alphanumeric characters. (The user name is EPSONWEB; the
default password is admin.)
•Moderator Password: Allows you to set an authentication password
for using Epson iProjection when connecting to the projector as a
moderator. Enter four digits for the password. (There is no default
password.)
•Projector Keyword: Lets you turn on a security password to
prevent access to the projector by anyone not in the room with it.
Turn on "Projector Keyword" when using thumbnail display or the
send function between the projector and connected devices.
•Display Keyword: Lets you display a projector keyword on the
projection screen when connecting to the projector using Epson
iProjection.
•Display LAN Info. lets you set the display format for the
projector's network information.
a
Use the displayed keyboard to enter the name and password.
Press [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons on the remote control to
highlight characters and press [Enter] to select them.
g
Select the Wireless LAN menu and press [Enter].
Wireless Network Projection
125
h
Select the Connection Mode setting.
•Quick lets you connect to multiple smartphones, tablets, or
computers directly using wireless communication.
•Advanced: Lets you connect to a smartphone, tablet, or computer
over a wireless LAN access point.
i
If you selected the Advanced connection mode, select Search
Access Point to select the access point you want to connect to.
a
If you need to assign the SSID manually, select SSID to enter
the SSID.
j
For the Advanced connection mode, assign the IP settings for
your network as necessary.
•If your network assigns addresses automatically, select IP Settings
to set the DHCP setting to On.
•If you must set addresses manually, select IP Settings to set the
DHCP setting to Off, and then enter the projector's IP Address,
Subnet Mask, and Gateway Address as necessary.
•If you want to connect the projector to the network using IPv6,
select IPv6 Settings.
s "Wireless LAN menu" p.154
k
To prevent the SSID or IP address from being displayed on the
LAN standby screen and Home screen, set the SSID Display
setting or the IP Address Display setting to Off.
l
If you have finished making settings, select Setup complete.
Follow the on-screen instructions to save the settings and close
the menu.
m
Press the [LAN] button on the remote control.
The wired network settings complete when you see the correct IP
address on the LAN standby screen.
When you have finished making wireless settings for your projector, you
need to select the wireless network on your computer. Then start the
network software to send images to your projector through a wireless
network.
Wireless Network Projection
126
Selecting Wireless Network Settings in Windows
Before connecting to the projector, select the correct wireless network on
your computer.
a
To access your wireless utility software, double-click the network
icon on the Windows taskbar.
b
When connecting in Advanced connection mode, select the
network name (SSID) of the network the projector is connecting
to.
c
Click Connect.
Selecting Wireless Network Settings in Mac
Before connecting to the projector, select the correct wireless network on
your computer.
a
Click the AirPort icon on the menu bar at the top of the screen.
b
When connecting in Advanced connection mode, make sure
AirPort is turned on and select the network name (SSID) of the
network the projector is connecting to.
Setting Up Wireless Network Security
You can set up security for your projector to use on a wireless network. Set
up one of the following security options to match the settings used on your
network:
•WPA2-PSK security
•WPA2-EAP security *
•WPA/WPA2-PSK security *
•WPA/WPA2-EAP security *
* Only available for the Advanced connection mode.
a
Contact your network administrator for guidance on entering the
correct information.
a
If you want to set up the WPA2-EAP or WPA/WPA2-EAP security,
make sure your digital certificate file is compatible with projector
registration and placed directly on the USB storage device.
s "Supported Client and CA Certificates" p.129
b
Press the [Menu] button on the control panel or remote control.
c
Select the Network menu and press [Enter].
d
Select Network Configuration and press [Enter].
Wireless Network Projection
127
e
Select the Wireless LAN menu and press [Enter].
f
Select the Security setting and press [Enter].
g
Select the security settings to match your network settings.
•WPA2-PSK, WPA/WPA2-PSK:
Select Setup complete. Follow the on-screen instructions to save
the settings and close the menu.
•WPA2-EAP, WPA/WPA2-EAP:
Select EAP Method and press [Enter].
h
Select the protocol for authentication as the EAP Type setting.
i
To import your certificate, select the certificate type and
press [Enter].
•Client Certificate for the PEAP-TLS or EAP-TLS type
•CA certificate for the PEAP, PEAP-TLS, EAP-TLS, or EAP-FAST
type
a
You can also register the digital certificates from your Web
browser. However, be sure to register just once or the certificate
may not install correctly.
s "Setting a certificate using a Web browser" p.133
j
Select Register and press [Enter].
k
Connect a USB storage device to the projector's USB-A port (the
wireless LAN module installation section).
If the wireless LAN module is already installed in the projector,
remove it.
s "Installing the Wireless LAN Unit" p.54
l
Press [Enter] to display the certificate list.
m
Select the certificate to import using the displayed list.
A message is displayed prompting you to enter the password for the
certificate.
Wireless Network Projection
128
n
Enter a password and press [Enter].
The certificate is imported and a completion message appears.
o
Select your EAP settings as necessary.
•User Name: Enter the user name. You can enter up to 64 single-
byte alphanumeric characters. When entering more than 32
characters, use your Web browser to enter the text. When
importing a client certificate, the name the certificate was issued to
is automatically set.
•Password: Enter the password used for authentication in PEAP,
EAP-FAST, and LEAP. You can enter up to 64 single-byte
alphanumeric characters. When entering more than 32 characters,
use your Web browser to enter the text.
•Verify Server Cert. lets you select whether or not to verify the
server certificate when a CA certificate has been set.
•RADIUS Serv.Name lets you enter the server name to be verified.
p
If you have finished making settings, select Setup complete.
Follow the on-screen instructions to save the settings and close
the menu.
Supported Client and CA Certificates
You can register these types of digital certificates.
Client Certificate (PEAP-TLS/EAP-TLS)
Item Explanation
Format PKCS#12
Extension PFX, P12
Encryption RSA
Hashes MD5/SHA-1/SHA-256/SHA-384/SHA-512
Key length 512/1024/2048/4096 bit
Password * You need to setup a password. Up to 32 single-byte
alphanumeric characters
CA Certificate (PEAP/PEAP-TLS/EAP-TLS/EAP-FAST)
Item Explanation
Format X509v3
Extension DER/CER/PEM
Encryption RSA
Hashes MD5/SHA-1/SHA-256/SHA-384/SHA-512
Key length 512/1024/2048/4096 bit
Encoding BASE64/Binary
* You can set a password using up to 64 alphanumeric characters. When
entering more than 32 characters, use your Web browser to enter the text.
s "Changing Settings Using a Web Browser (Epson Web Control)"
p.215
Wireless Network Projection
129
Using a QR Code to Connect a Mobile Device
After making the wireless network settings for your projector, you can
display a QR code on the screen and use it to connect a mobile device
using the Epson iProjection (iOS/Android) app.
a
•Make sure you have installed the latest version of Epson iProjection
on your device (Epson iProjection V1.3.0 or later supports this
feature).
•You can download Epson iProjection for free from the App Store or
Google Play. Any fees incurred when communicating with the App
Store or Google Play are the responsibility of the customer.
•When using Epson iProjection in Quick connection mode, we
recommend making security settings.
a
Press the [LAN] button on the remote control.
The QR code is displayed on the projected surface.
a
•If you do not see the QR code, set the Display LAN Info.
setting to Text & QR Code in the projector's Network menu.
s Network - Network Configuration - Display LAN
Info. p.153
•To hide the QR code, press the [Esc] button.
•When the QR code is hidden, press the [Enter] button to
display the code.
•You can also display the QR code by selecting the icon on the
Home screen.
b
Start Epson iProjection on your mobile device.
c
Read the projected QR code using Epson iProjection to connect it
to the projector.
a
To correctly read the QR code, make sure you face the screen
squarely and closely enough so that the projected code fits into
the guide of the mobile device's QR code reader. If you are too
far from the screen, the code may not be read.
When a connection is established, select Contents menu from ,
and then select the file you want to project.
Wireless Network Projection
130
Using a USB Key to Connect a Windows Computer
You can set up your USB flash drive as a USB key to quickly connect the
projector to a wireless LAN supported Windows computer. The USB key
allows you to automatically select a computer's wireless network settings
and project your presentation wirelessly.
a
Set up the USB key using Epson iProjection (Windows).
See the "Epson iProjection Operation Guide (Windows/Mac)" for
instructions.
b
Make sure the wireless LAN module is installed.
c
Turn on the projector.
d
Press the [LAN] button on the remote control.
The LAN standby screen is displayed. Verify that an SSID and IP
address are displayed.
e
Remove the wireless LAN module from the projector and insert
the USB key into the same port used for the wireless LAN module.
s "Installing the Wireless LAN Unit" p.54
You see a projected message that the network information update is
complete.
f
Remove the USB key.
Reinsert the wireless LAN module into the projector.
g
Connect the USB key to a USB port on your computer.
h
Follow the on-screen instructions to install the necessary
application.
a
•If the Windows Firewall message is displayed, click Yes to
disable the firewall.
•You need administrator authority to install the software.
•If it is not installed automatically, double-click
MPPLaunch.exe in the USB key.
After a few minutes, your computer image is displayed by the
projector. If it does not appear, press the [LAN] button on your
projector's remote control or restart your computer.
i
Run your presentation.
j
When you have finished projecting wirelessly, select the Safely
Remove Hardware option in the Windows taskbar, and then
remove the USB key from your computer.
a
You may need to restart your computer to reactivate your
wireless LAN connection.
Wireless Network Projection
131
You can use the HTTPS protocol to increase security between the projector
and a Web browser communicating with it. To do this, you create a server
certificate, install it on the projector, and turn on the Secure HTTP setting
in the projector menus to verify the reliability of the Web browser.
s Network - Network Configuration - Others - Secure HTTP p.159
Even if you do not install a server certificate, the projector automatically
creates a self-signed certificate and allows communication. However,
because the self-signed certificate cannot verify reliability from a Web
browser, you see a warning about the server's reliability when you access
the projector from a Web browser. This warning does not prevent
communication.
Importing a Web Server Certificate Using the
Menus
You can create your Web server certificate, and import it using the
projector menus and a USB flash drive.
a
You can also register the digital certificates from your Web browser.
However, be sure to register just once or the certificate may not install
correctly.
s p.133
a
If you want to set up the WPA2-EAP or WPA/WPA2-EAP security,
make sure your digital certificate file is compatible with projector
registration and placed directly on the USB storage device.
s "Supported Web Server Certificates" p.133
b
Press the [Menu] button on the control panel or remote control.
c
Select the Network menu and press [Enter].
d
Select Network Configuration and press [Enter].
Secure HTTP
132
e
Select the Others menu and press [Enter].
f
Select On as the Secure HTTP setting.
g
Select Web Server Cert. and press [Enter].
h
Select Register and press [Enter].
i
Connect a USB storage device to the projector's USB-A port (the
wireless LAN module installation section).
If the wireless LAN module is already installed in the projector,
remove it.
s "Installing the Wireless LAN Unit" p.54
j
Press [Enter] to display the certificate list.
k
Select the certificate to import using the displayed list.
A message is displayed prompting you to enter the password for the
certificate.
l
Enter a password and press [Enter].
The certificate is imported and a completion message appears.
Supported Web Server Certificates
You can register these types of digital certificates.
Web Server Certificate (Secure HTTP)
Item Explanation
Format PKCS#12
Extension PFX, P12
Encryption RSA
Hashes MD5/SHA-1/SHA-256/SHA-384/SHA-512
Key length 512/1024/2048/4096 bit
Common Name Network Host Name
Organization Optional
Password * You need to setup a password. Up to 32 single-byte
alphanumeric characters
* You can set a password using up to 64 alphanumeric characters. When
entering more than 32 characters, use your Web browser to enter the text.
s "Setting a certificate using a Web browser" p.133
Setting a certificate using a Web browser
You can use an electronic certificate as the projector's security settings.
Secure HTTP
133
a
You can install the electronic certificate from the projector's Network
menu. However, be sure to register just once or the certificate may not
install correctly.
s "Setting Up Wireless Network Security" p.127
a
Prepare a certificate that is supported by the projector.
b
Make sure the projector is turned on.
c
Launch the Web browser on the computer or mobile device
connected to the network.
d
Enter the IP address of the projector in the address input box of
the browser to connect to the Epson Web Control screen.
The Epson Web Control screen is displayed.
e
Select Advanced.
a
You need to login to display the Advanced screen. When the
login screen is displayed, enter your user name and password.
(The user name is EPSONWEB; the default password is
admin.)
f
Select Certificate from Network.
g
Click the Choose File button, select the certificate file.
h
Enter the password in the Password box, and then click Send.
i
When the settings are complete, click the Apply.
Secure HTTP
134
Configuration Menu
This chapter explains how to use the Configuration menu and its functions.
This section explains how to use the Configuration menu.
Although steps are explained using the remote control as an example, you
can perform the same operations from the control panel. Check the guide
under the menu for the available buttons and their operations.
a
Display the Configuration menu screen.
b
Select a top menu item.
c
Select a submenu item.
d
Change settings.
a
When "[Default]: Reset" is displayed on the guide under the
menu, pressing the [Default] button on the remote control
returns the settings being adjusted to their default values.
e
Press the [Menu] button to finish making settings.
Configuration Menu Operations
136
Configuration Menu Table
Settable items vary depending on the model being used and the image
signal and source being projected.
Top Menu Name Submenu Name Items or Setting Values
Image menu
s p.140
Color Mode Dynamic, Presentation, Natural,
Cinema, BT.709, DICOM SIM,
Multi-Projection
Brightness 0 to 100
Contrast 0 to 100
Color Saturation 0 to 100
Tint 0 to 100
Sharpness Standard, Thin Line Enhancement,
Thick Line Enhancement
White Balance Color Temp., G-M Correction,
Offset R, Offset G, Offset B, Gain R,
Gain G, Gain B
Image Enhancement 4K Enhancement, Image Preset
Mode, Frame Interpolation,
Deinterlacing, Noise Reduction,
MPEG Noise Reduction, Super-
resolution, Detail Enhancement,
Reset
Advanced Gamma, RGBCMY
Light Source Control Light Source Control, Dynamic
Contrast, Lights-Out Control
Signal menu
s p.142
Resolution Auto, Wide, Normal, and Manual
Aspect Auto, Normal, 4:3, 16:9, Full, H-
Zoom, V-Zoom, Native
Tracking -
Sync. 0 to 31
Top Menu Name Submenu Name Items or Setting Values
Position -128 to 127
Auto Setup On, Off
Overscan Auto, Off, 4%, and 8%
Blanking Top, Bottom, Left, and Right
Advanced Video Range, Input Signal, BNC
Sync Termination, EDID, DDC
Buffer
Scale Scale, Scale Mode, Scale Vertically,
Scale Horizontally, Clip
Adjustment, Clip Range
Settings menu
s p.143
Geometry Correction Off, H/V-Keystone, Quick Corner,
Curved Surface, Corner Wall,
Point Correction, Memory
Split Screen -
Volume 0 to 20
HDMI Link Device Connections, HDMI Link,
Audio Out Device, Power On Link,
Power Off Link, Link Buffer
Lock Setting Control Panel Lock, Lens Lock
Brightness Settings Light Source Mode, Brightness
Level, Constant Brightness,
Estimated Remains
Remote Receiver Front/Rear, Front, Rear, and Off
User Button User Button 1, User Button 2, and
User Button 3
Test Pattern Standard, Cross-hatching, Cross-
hatching R, Cross-hatching G,
Cross-hatching B, Color Bars V,
Color Bars H, Grayscale, Gray Bars
V, Gray Bars H, Checkerboard 1,
Checkerboard 2, White, Black,
Aspect Frame
List of Functions
137
Top Menu Name Submenu Name Items or Setting Values
Memory Memory, Lens Position, Geometry
Correction
Content Playback Content Playback, Overlay Effect,
USB Viewer
Extended menu
s p.146
Home Screen Home Screen Auto Disp., Custom
Function 1, Custom Function 2
Display Menu Position, Message Position,
Messages, Display Background,
Startup Screen, Standby
Confirmation, Air Filter Notice,
Screen, Panel Alignment, Color
Uniformity, OSD Rotation
User's Logo Start Setting, Reset
Projection Front, Front/Ceiling, Rear, and
Rear/Ceiling
Operation Direct Power On, Sleep Mode,
Sleep Mode Timer, High Altitude
Mode, Auto Source Search, Auto
Power On, Startup Source, A/V
Mute Settings, Advanced, Date &
Time, Lens Calibration
A/V Settings A/V Output, Monitor Out, and
Audio Settings
Standby Mode Communication On and
Communication Off
HDBaseT Control Communications, Extron
XTP
Multi-Projection Projector ID, Tiling, Geometry
Correction, Edge Blending, Black
Level, Scale, Color Mode,
Brightness Settings, Color
Matching, Color Uniformity, Reset
Schedule Settings -
Top Menu Name Submenu Name Items or Setting Values
Language 27 languages
Info menu
s p.161
Projector Info Total Op. Time, Operation Hours,
Source, Input Signal, Resolution,
Refresh Rate, Sync Info, Status,
Serial Number, Lens Type, Event
ID, HDBaseT Signal Level
Light Source Info Light Source Hours, Estimated
Remains
Version Main, Video2, Sub, Sub2, HDMI,
HDBaseT, HDBaseT2
Status Information Status Information, Source, Signal
Information, Network Wired,
Network Wireless, Maintenance,
Version
Temp Warning Info -
Power On/Off History -
Reset menu
s p.162
Reset All Memories -
Refresh Mode Timer, Messages, Start
Light Source Calibra‐
tion
Run Now, Run Periodically,
Schedule Settings, Last Run
Reset All Config -
Reset All (Factory De‐
fault)
Reset All (Factory Default),
Password
Network menu
Top Menu Name Submenu Name Items or Setting Values
Basic menu s p.153 Projector Name -
PJLink Password -
Remote Password -
List of Functions
138
Top Menu Name Submenu Name Items or Setting Values
Web Control Password -
Moderator Password -
Projector Keyword On, Off
Display Keyword On, Off
Display LAN Info. Text & QR Code, Text
Wireless LAN menu
s p.154
Connection Mode Quick, Advanced
Search Access Point -
SSID -
Security Open, WPA2-PSK,
WPA/WPA2-PSK,
WPA2-EAP,
WPA/WPA2-EAP
Passphrase -
EAP Method EAP Type, User name,
Password, Client
Certificate, Verify Server
Cert., CA certificate,
RADIUS Serv.Name
Channel 1ch, 6ch, and 11ch
IP Settings DHCP, IP Address,
Subnet Mask, Gateway
Address
SSID Display On, Off
IP Address Display On, Off
IPv6 Settings IPv6, Auto Configuration,
Use Temporary Address
Wired LAN menu
s p.157
IP Settings DHCP, IP Address,
Subnet Mask, Gateway
Address
IP Address Display On, Off
Top Menu Name Submenu Name Items or Setting Values
IPv6 Settings IPv6, Auto Configuration,
Use Temporary Address
Notifications menu
s p.159
Mail Notification On, Off
SMTP Server -
Port Number -
From -
Address 1 Setting,
Address 2 Setting,
Address 3 Setting
Email Address, No Signal,
System Error, Laser Error,
High Temp Error, Air
Filter Error, Laser
Warning, High Temp
Warning, Air Filter
Warning, Air Filter
Notice, Constant Bright.
End
SNMP On, Off
Trap IP Address 1, Trap IP
Address 2
-
Community Name -
PJLink Notification On, Off
Notified IP Address -
Others menu s p.159 Secure HTTP On, Off
Web Server Cert. -
Priority Gateway Wired LAN, Wireless
LAN
AMX Device Discovery On, Off
Crestron Connected On, Off
Message Broadcasting On, Off
List of Functions
139
Image Menu
Settable items vary depending on the image signal and source currently
being projected. Setting details are saved for each color mode.
s "Automatically Detecting Input Signals and Changing the Projected
Image (Source Search)" p.61
Submenu Function
Color Mode You can select the quality of the image to suit your
surroundings.
s "Selecting the Projection Quality (Selecting Color
Mode)" p.76
Brightness Adjusts the image brightness.
Contrast Adjusts the difference between light and shade in the
images.
Color Saturation Adjusts the color saturation for the images.
Tint You can adjust the image tint.
Submenu Function
Sharpness Standard: You can adjust the image sharpness.
Thin Line Enhancement: If this parameter is set to a
positive value, details such as hair or fabric patterns will be
enhanced.
Thick Line Enhancement: If this parameter is set to a
positive value, the outline, background, and the other main
parts of the objects in the image will be enhanced to show
them clearly.
White Balance You can adjust the overall tint of the image.
Color Temp.: You can adjust the overall tint of the image
within a range from 3200K to 10000K. The image is tinted
blue when a high value is selected and tinted red when a
low value is selected. When Color Mode is set to Dynamic,
the set Color Temp. may differ from the actual Color Temp.
of the light from the projector. Use this menu as a guide.
G-M Correction: The color tone is tinted red when set to a
negative value, and tinted green when set to a positive
value.
Offset R/G/B, Gain R/G/B: You can adjust the offset and
gain of each color R (red), G (green), and B (blue)
individually.
List of Functions
140
Submenu Function
Image Enhance-
ment
You can adjust the image resolution.
s "Adjusting Image Resolution (Image Enhancement)"
p.83
4K Enhancement
*
: (EB-L1075U/EB-L1070U/EB-L1065U/EB-
L1060U/EB-L1050U only) You can project at a doubled
resolution.
Image Preset Mode: You can select the optimal setting
according to the projected image from five presets prepared
in advance.
Frame Interpolation: You can play fast moving images
smoothly by producing intermediate frames between the
original frames.
Deinterlacing: (Only when the input signal is 480i, 576i, or
1080i) You can convert interlace signals into progressive
signals. (IP conversion)
Off is ideal for images with a large amount of movement,
Video for general video images, and Film/Auto for movie
films, computer graphics, and animation.
Noise Reduction: You can smooth out the roughness in
progressive images.
MPEG Noise Reduction: You can reduce dot and block
noise that occurs in outlines when projecting MPEG movies.
Super-resolution: To display a crisp image, you can reduce
the blurring that is created on the edge when the resolution
of the image signal is scaled up and projected.
Detail Enhancement: You can enhance the contrast of
details in an image.
Reset: Returns the selected preset to its defaults.
Advanced You can make adjustments by choosing the following items.
Gamma: You can adjust the coloring by selecting one of the
gamma correction values, or referring to the projected
graph.
RGBCMY: You can adjust the hue, saturation, and
brightness of each color R (red), G (green), B (blue), C
(cyan), M (magenta), Y (yellow) individually.
Submenu Function
Light Source
Control
Light Source Control: Select the light source operations
according to the image signal.
s "Setting the Amount of Light of the Projected Image"
p.79
Dynamic Contrast: (This can only be set if Light Source
Control is set to Dynamic Contrast) Automatically adjusts
the amount of light when projecting according to the
brightness of the image.
Lights-Out Control: (This can only be set if Light Source
Control is set to Lights-Out Control) Automatically turns
off the light after the set time has elapsed at the specified
video level.
Reset You can reset all adjustment values for the Image menu to
their default settings. See the following to return all menu
items to their default settings.
s "Reset Menu" p.162
* This cannot be set when Aspect is set to Native.
List of Functions
141
Signal Menu
Settable items vary depending on the image signal and source currently
being projected. Setting details are saved for each image signal.
Submenu Function
Resolution (Only available when an analog RGB computer signal is being
input.)
Set to Auto to automatically identify the resolution of the input
signal. If images are not projected correctly when set to Auto, for
example if some of the image is missing, set to Wide for wide
screens, or set to Normal for 4:3 or 5:4 screens depending on the
connected computer.
Manual allows you to specify the resolution. This is ideal when
connected computer is fixed.
Aspect You can set the Aspect Ratio for projected images.
s "Changing the Aspect Ratio of the Projected Image" p.80
Tracking (Only available when an analog RGB computer signal is being
input.)
You can adjust computer images when vertical stripes appear in
the images.
Submenu Function
Sync. (Only available when an analog RGB computer signal is being
input.)
You can adjust computer images when flickering, fuzziness, or
interference appear in the images.
Position You can adjust the display position up, down, left, and right when
a part of the image is missing so that the whole image is projected.
Auto Setup (Only available when an analog RGB computer signal is being
input.)
Set to On to automatically adjust Tracking, Sync., and Position to
the optimum state when the input signal changes.
Overscan Changes the output image ratio (the range of the projected
image). You can set the cropping range to 4% or 8%. When set to
Auto, this is automatically adjusted according to the input signal.
Blanking You can hide images in the set area. Use the [ ][ ] buttons to
adjust the area. You can adjust by using a combination of Top,
Bottom, Left, and Right. You can hide up to half of the projected
image in each direction (except for one pixel).
List of Functions
142
Submenu Function
Advanced You can set by choosing the following items.
Video Range: Select the video range for the input signal from the
HDMI port, DVI-D port, or HDBaseT port. If the brightness
range is 16 to 235, select Limited (16-235), if it is 0 to 255, select
Full (0-255).
Input Signal: Select an input signal from the Computer port or
BNC port. If set to Auto, the input signal is set automatically
according to the connected equipment. If colors do not appear
correctly when set to Auto, select the appropriate signal
according to the connected equipment.
BNC Sync Termination: Set the end process for signals from the
BNC In port. This should usually be set to Off. Set to On when
analog (75Ω) termination such as for switchers is necessary.
EDID: (Displayed when the current source is HDMI, HDBaseT,
or DVI-D) Make settings related to EDID. Even in setups with
multiple displays with different resolutions, you can switch the
EDID of the current source and unify the EDID across the
displays by setting the same EDID as the standard display.
•Preset EDID: Select the optimal setting from the presets
prepared in advance. Change the preset sub menu settings for
Resolution, Refresh Rate, and Color Depth if necessary.
Select Settings, and then press the [ ] button.
•Resolution: Select from the resolutions displayed.
•Refresh Rate: Select from the refresh rates displayed.
•Color Depth: Select the maximum color depth limit supported
by the projector. When you select 12bit, the projected images
support signals up to 12 bits.
•Reset: You can reset all adjustment values for EDID to their
default values.
DDC Buffer: (Displayed when the current source is HDMI or
DVI-D) Setting this to On can sometimes improve images that
are not displayed correctly from devices connected using an
HDMI or DVI extension cable.
Scale When using multiple projectors to project one image, adjust the
range of the image displayed by each projector.
s "Displaying a Scaled Image" p.97
Submenu Function
Reset You can reset all adjustment values on the Signal menu to their
default settings, except for Input Signal and EDID.
See the following to return all menu items to their default
settings.
s "Reset Menu" p.162
Settings Menu
List of Functions
143
Submenu Function
Geometry Cor-
rection
You can correct distortion.
s "Correcting Distortion in the Projected Image" p.64
•Off:
Temporarily cancels the geometry correction.
•H/V-Keystone:
Adjust V-Keystone, V-Balance, H-Keystone, and H-
Balance to correct vertical and horizontal keystone
distortion.
•Quick Corner:
Select and correct the four corners of the projected image.
•Curved Surface:
Corrects distortion that occurs when projecting on a
curved surface.
•Corner Wall:
Corrects distortion that occurs when projecting on a
surface with right angles.
•Point Correction:
Divides the projected image into a grid and corrects the
distortion by moving the selected point of intersection
from side to side and up and down.
•Memory:
You can save the adjustment value of the geometry
correction and load it when needed.
s "Memory Function" p.110
Split Screen You can split the screen into two screens.
s "Projecting Two Images Simultaneously (Split Screen)"
p.99
Volume You can adjust the volume. Setting values are saved for each
source.
Submenu Function
HDMI Link Sets HDMI Link.
Device Connections:
Displays a list of the devices connected to the HDMI port.
HDMI Link
Enables or disables HDMI Link.
Audio Out Device:
When the projector is connected to an AV amplifier, select
whether to output audio from the external speakers
connected to the projector or to output audio from the AV
amplifier’s speakers.
Power On Link:
Set the operation to perform when turning on the projector
or a connected device.
•Bidirectional: Turns on the connected device when the
projector is turned on, or turns on the projector when the
connected device is turned on.
•Connected Device_PJ: Turns on the projector when the
connected device is turned on.
•PJ_Connected Device: Turns on the connected device
when the projector is turned on.
Power Off Link:
Set whether or not to turn off the connected device when
the projector is turned off.
Link Buffer:
If HDMI Link is not working properly, changing this setting
may improve linking operations.
Lock Setting Control Panel Lock: You can use this to restrict operation
of the projector's control panel.
s "Control Panel Lock" p.117
Lens Lock: When set to On, [Lens Shift], [Zoom],
and [Focus] button operations on the remote control are
disabled.
s "Lens Lock" p.118
List of Functions
144
Submenu Function
Brightness Set-
tings
Light Source Mode: Set the brightness for the light source.
•Normal: Select this if you do not want to decrease the
brightness. This makes the light source operation time
approximately 20,000 hours.
•Medium: Noise from the fan is louder than when Quiet is
selected, but it does not decrease the brightness as much.
This sets the brightness at 85%. This makes the light
source operation time approximately 20,000 hours.
•Quiet: Select this if you are concerned about the noise
made by the fan. This sets the brightness at 70%. This
makes the light source operation time approximately
20,000 hours.
•Extended: Select this to extend the life expectancy of the
light source. This sets the brightness at 70%. This makes
the light source operation time approximately 30,000
hours.
•Custom: Select this to set the brightness level within a
range of 30 to 100%.
Brightness Level: (Only available when Light Source Mode
is set to Custom) Sets the brightness for the light source.
Constant Brightness: (Only available when Light Source
Mode is set to Custom) When set to On, the brightness of
the light source set in Brightness Level is maintained as it
is. When Constant Brightness is set to On, you cannot
change the settings for Light Source Mode and Brightness
Level.
s "Setting the Brightness" p.77
Estimated Remains: When Constant Brightness is set to
On, this indicates the amount of time for which constant
brightness can be maintained.
s "Guide to Estimated Remains" p.78
Submenu Function
Remote Receiv-
er
You can limit the reception of the operation signal from the
remote control.
When set to Off, you cannot perform any operations from
the remote control. If you want to make operations from
the remote control, hold down the [Menu] button on the
remote control for at least 15 seconds to reset the setting to
its default value.
User Button Select the items in the Configuration menu that you want to
assign to the [User1], [User2], and [User3] buttons on the
remote control. The following items can be assigned.
Light Source Mode, Multi-Projection, Resolution, On-
Screen Display, Display the QR Code, Image
Enhancement, Frame Interpolation, Link Menu, Content
Playback, USB
(USB is only enabled when Content Playback is set to
On.)
Test Pattern You can display a test pattern to adjust the projection
without connecting other equipment when you set up the
projector.
s "Displaying the Test Pattern" p.33
Memory Perform operations and make settings for the memory
function.
s "Memory Function" p.110
Content Play-
back
Content Playback: When this is set to On, you can play
playlists created in Epson Projector Content Manager.
Overlay Effect
*
: Adds color and shape decorations to the
image. (This is only enabled when Content Playback is set
to On.)
USB Viewer: Plays playlists stored on a USB flash device.
(This is only enabled when Content Playback is set to
On.)
List of Functions
145
Submenu Function
Reset You can reset all adjustment values on the Settings menu to
their default settings, except for Audio Out Device, Power
On Link, Power Off Link, Link Buffer, User Button,
Memory, Content Playback.
See the following to return all menu items to their default
settings.
s "Reset Menu" p.162
* This cannot be set when Edge Blending is set to On
Extended Menu
Submenu Function
Home Screen Home Screen Auto Disp.: When set to On, the Home
screen is displayed when the projector turns on. The Home
screen is not displayed when the selected source has an
image signal when the projector turns on.
Custom Function 1, Custom Function 2: Select functions
to be assigned to the Home screen from the following five
functions. Network Settings, Info, Image Enhancement,
Frame Interpolation, Split Screen
List of Functions
146
Submenu Function
Display You can make settings related to the projector's display.
Menu Position: Select the position to display the menu on
the projected screen.
Message Position: Select the position to display the message
on the projected screen.
Messages: When set to Off, the following items will not be
displayed.
Item names when the Source, Color Mode, or Aspect is
changed, messages when no signal is being input, and
warnings such as High Temp Warning.
Display Background
*
: You can set the screen background
to Black, Blue, or Logo when no image signal is available.
Startup Screen
*
: Set to On to display the User's Logo when
you start projecting.
Standby Confirmation: If it is set to Off, you can turn off
the power simply by pressing the [t] button once.
Air Filter Notice: You can set whether or not (On/Off) to
enable Air Filter Notice. When this is set to On and a clog
in the air filter is detected, the message is displayed on the
screen.
Screen: (This is unavailable when projecting images from a
computer over a network.) Set the aspect ratio and position
of the projected screen according to the screen being used.
s "Screen Settings" p.32
Panel Alignment: Corrects color misalignments (red and
blue) in the screen.
s "Panel Alignment" p.210
Color Uniformity: Adjusts the color tone balance for the
whole screen.
s "Color Uniformity" p.212
OSD Rotation: Rotates the menu direction by 90˚ degrees.
User's Logo
*
You can change the user's logo that is displayed as a
background during Display Background, A/V Mute, and so
on.
s "Saving a User's Logo" p.104
Submenu Function
Projection Select from one of the following projection methods
depending on how the projector is installed.
Front, Front/Ceiling, Rear, Rear/Ceiling
You can change the setting as follows by pressing down
the [A/V Mute] button for about five seconds.
Front W Front/Ceiling
Rear W Rear/Ceiling
List of Functions
147
Submenu Function
Operation Direct Power On: Set to On to turn on the projector
simply by plugging it in.
When the power cord is plugged in, note that the projector
turns on automatically in cases such as a power outage
being restored.
Sleep Mode: When set to On, this automatically stops
projection when no image signal is being input and no
operations are carried out.
Sleep Mode Timer: When Sleep Mode is set to On, you
can set the time before the projector automatically turns off
within a range of 1 to 30 minutes.
High Altitude Mode: Set this to On if you are using the
projector above an altitude of 1,500 meters.
Auto Source Search: Set to On to automatically detect an
image signal from another source and project the image
when there is no image signal from the current source.
Auto Power On: If it is set to Computer or BNC, the
projector is turned on when the signals are received from
the Computer port or BNC port, even when the projector is
in standby status.
Startup Source: Select the source you want to project when
the projector is turned on in Content Playback mode.
A/V Mute Settings: Perform settings related to A/V mute.
•Fade-in: Specify the number of seconds for fade-in when
displaying an image.
•Fade-out: Specify the number of seconds for fade-out
when hiding an image.
•A/V Mute Timer: When it is set to On, if no operations
are performed for about 2 hours after A/V mute is
activated, the projector turns off automatically.
•A/V Mute Release: When it is set to A/V Mute, you can
release A/V mute only by pressing the [A/V Mute] button
(or by sending an A/V mute Off command).
When set to Any Button, A/V mute is released when any
operation is performed on the projector.
Submenu Function
s "Hiding the Image and Sound Temporarily (A/V
Mute)" p.102
Advanced: The following items can be set.
•Beep: When this is set to On, the confirmation buzzer
beeps to notify you that the power turns on or off, or
cooling down is finished.
•Indicators: When set to Off, the projector's indicators are
turned off, except for abnormality or warning.
•Log Save Destination: Set where you want to save the
operation logs for the projector. Select USB and Internal
Memory to save the logs to the USB flash drive connected
to the projector’s USB-A port. Logs are saved as text files
(.log) on the USB flash drive.
The following logs are saved.
- Error information
- Laser information
- Temperature logs
- Operation logs
•Batch Setup Range: Select All to copy all of the menu
settings using the batch setting function. Select Limited if
you do not want to copy the following settings.
- EDID from the Signal menu
- Network menu
•Lens Type: When using the following lens, select the
model number of the lens.
ELPLS04, ELPLU02, ELPLR04, ELPLW04, ELPLM06,
ELPLM07, ELPLL07
Date & Time: Make system time settings for the projector.
s "Setting the Time" p.44
Lens Calibration: Acquires the information of the lens
installed on the projector.
List of Functions
148
Submenu Function
A/V Settings A/V Output: Set this to Always On if you want to output
audio and images to an external device even when the
projector is in standby status.
Monitor Out: Select the image source output to an external
monitor when the projector is in standby status. When set
to Auto, analog RGB signals from the Computer port or the
BNC port are output depending on which source was
selected when the projector was turned off.
Audio Settings: Performs the following audio related
settings.
•Audio Output: Select the audio to be output when
projecting images from the Computer port, BNC port, or
DVI-D port. When set to Auto, audio is output from the
audio input port corresponding to each image input port.
s "Connecting Equipment" p.47
•HDMI Audio Output: Select the audio source when
projecting images from the HDMI port. If you select
HDMI, audio for the image is output as it is. If you select
Audio3, audio is output from the Audio3 port.
Standby Mode If you set Communication On, you can perform the
following operations even if the projector is in standby
mode.
•Monitor and control the projector over a network.
•Output audio and images to an external device. (Only
when A/V Output is set to Always On.)
•Communication from the HDBaseT port is enabled. (Only
when Control Communications is set to On.)
a
When monitoring or controlling the pro‐
jector using wireless LAN, set Connection
Mode to Advanced.
s Network - Wireless LAN - Connection
Mode p.154
Submenu Function
HDBaseT Control Communications: (This cannot be set when
Extron XTP is set to On.) When set to On, Ethernet
communication, serial communication, and the wired
remote control through the HDBaseT Transmitter connected
to the HDBaseT port are all enabled.
Extron XTP: Set to On when you connect the Extron XTP
transmitter or switcher to the HDBaseT port. See the
following Extron Web site for more details on the XTP
system.
http://www.extron.com/
a
•When Control Communications or Ex‐
tron XTP is set to On, Standby Mode is
automatically set to Communication On.
•When Control Communications or Ex‐
tron XTP is On, the projector's LAN
port, RS-232 port, and Remote port are
disabled.
•When Extron XTP is set to On, the fan
may rotate in standby mode but this is
not abnormal.
List of Functions
149
Submenu Function
Multi-Projection Make settings when projecting from multiple projectors.
s "Multi-Projection Function" p.90
Projector ID: Set the ID from 01 to 30. Off indicates that
no ID is set.
s "ID Settings" p.42
Tiling: Set the number of split screens and positions of each
projected image.
s "Tiling" p.90
Geometry Correction: Corrects distortion in the projected
image.
s "Correcting Distortion in the Projected Image" p.64
Edge Blending: Corrects a border between multiple images
to create a seamless screen.
s "Edge Blending" p.91
Black Level: Adjusts the differences in brightness and tone
for areas where images overlap and areas where the images
do not overlap.
s "Black Level" p.93
Scale: When using multiple projectors to project one image,
adjust the range of the image displayed by each projector.
s "Displaying a Scaled Image" p.97
Color Mode: Select the appropriate color mode according to
the type of image and the surroundings. Select the same
color mode for all projectors.
Brightness Settings: Set the brightness for the light source.
s "Setting the Brightness" p.77
Color Matching: Corrects the differences in the tint and
brightness between images.
s "Color Matching" p.96
Color Uniformity: Adjusts the color tone balance for the
whole screen.
s "Color Uniformity" p.212
Reset: You can reset all adjustment values for the Multi-
Projection menu to their default settings.
Submenu Function
Schedule Set-
tings
You can set the projector's schedule so that it performs a
specific operation at a pre-scheduled time.
s "Scheduling Function" p.112
Language You can set the language for messages and menus.
Reset You can reset all adjustment values for the Extended menu
to their default settings. However, the following items are
not reset.
Screen Type, Screen Position, Panel Alignment, Color
Uniformity, Projection, High Altitude Mode, Auto Source
Search, A/V Mute Release, Lens Type, Date & Time, Lens
Calibration, A/V Output, Monitor Out, Standby Mode,
Control Communications, Extron XTP, Projector ID,
Tiling, Edge Blending, Black Level, Scale, Color Mode,
Brightness Settings, Color Matching, Language
See the following to return all menu items to their default
settings.
s "Reset Menu" p.162
*When User's Logo Protection is set to On in Password Protection, you
cannot change settings related to user's logo. You can make changes after
setting User's Logo Protection to Off.
s "Managing Users (Password Protection)" p.115
List of Functions
150
Network Menu
When Network Protection is set to On in Password Protection, a message
is displayed and the network settings cannot be changed. Set Network
Protection to Off and then configure the network.
s "Setting Password Protection" p.115
Submenu Function
Wireless Mode Set this to Wireless LAN On when connecting the projector and
a computer via a wireless LAN. If you do not want to connect via
wireless LAN, turn it Off to prevent unauthorized access by
others.
Submenu Function
Net. Info. - Wire-
less LAN
Displays the following network setting status information.
•Connection Mode
•Wireless LAN system
•Antenna Level
•Projector Name
•SSID
•DHCP
•IP Address
•Subnet Mask
•Gateway Address
•MAC Address
•Region Code
When IPv6 is selected, the following information is displayed.
•IPv6 Address (Manual):
IPv6 Address, Prefix Length, Gateway Address
•IPv6 Address (Auto):
Temporary Address, Link-local Address, Stateless Address,
Stateful Address
Net. Info. - Wired
LAN
Displays the following network setting status information.
•Projector Name
•DHCP
•IP Address
•Subnet Mask
•Gateway Address
•MAC Address
•IPv6 Address (Manual):
IPv6 Address, Prefix Length, Gateway Address
•IPv6 Address (Auto):
Temporary Address, Link-local Address, Stateless Address,
Stateful Address
Display the QR
Code
When connecting iOS or Android devices using Epson
iProjection, read the QR code displayed.
List of Functions
151
Submenu Function
Network Config-
uration
The following menus are available for setting Network items.
Basic, Wireless LAN, Wired LAN, Notifications, Others, Reset
Notes on operating the Network menu
Selecting from the top menu and sub menus, and changing selected items is
the same as making operations from the Configuration menu.
When done, make sure you go to the Complete menu, and select Yes, No,
or Cancel. When you select Yes or No, you are returned to the
Configuration menu.
Yes: Saves the settings and exits the Network menu.
No: Does not save the settings and exits the Network menu.
Cancel: Continues displaying the Network menu.
Soft keyboard operations
The Network menu contains items that require input of alphanumerics
during setup. In this case, the following software keyboard is displayed. Use
[][ ][ ][ ] buttons to move the cursor to the desired key, and then
press the [ ] button to enter the selected character. Enter figures by
holding down the [Num] button on the remote control, and pressing the
numeric buttons. After inputting, press Finish on the keyboard to confirm
your input. Press Cancel on the keyboard to cancel your input.
•Each time the CAPS key is selected and the [ ] button is pressed, it
sets and changes between upper case and lower case letters.
•Each time the SYM1/2 key is selected and the [ ] button is pressed, it
sets and changes the symbol keys for the section enclosed by the frame.
The following types of character can be entered.
Numbers 0123456789
Letters ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ
abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz
Symbols ! " # $ % & ' ( ) * + , - . / : ; < = > ? @ [ \ ] ^ _ ` { | } ~
List of Functions
152
Basic menu
Submenu Function
Projector Name Enter the projector name used to identify the projector over a
network.
When editing, you can enter up to 16 single-byte alphanumeric
characters. (" * + , / : ; < = > ? [ \ ] ` | and spaces cannot be used.)
PJLink Password Set a password to use when you access the projector using
compatible PJLink software.
You can enter up to 32 single-byte alphanumeric characters.
(Spaces and symbols cannot be used.)
s "About PJLink" p.227
Remote Pass-
word
Set a password to use Remote in Epson Web Control. You can
enter up to 8 single-byte alphanumeric characters. (* : and spaces
cannot be used.) The default user name is "EPSONREMOTE"
and the default password is "guest".
s "Changing Settings Using a Web Browser (Epson Web
Control)" p.215
Submenu Function
Web Control
Password
Set a password for authentication to use when making settings
and controlling the projector using Web Control in Epson Web
Control. You can enter up to eight single-byte alphanumeric
characters (* : and spaces cannot be used). The default user name
is "EPSONWEB" and the default password is "admin".
s "Changing Settings Using a Web Browser (Epson Web
Control)" p.215
Moderator Pass-
word
Enter the four digit authentication password for using Epson
iProjection when connecting to the projector as a moderator.
(There is no default password.)
Projector Key-
word
Set this to On to enable a security password to prevent other users
from accidentally projecting images. When projecting images
from a computer or mobile device, you need to enter the keyword
displayed on the projection screen in Epson iProjection.
Display Keyword When this is set to On and when connecting to the projector
using Epson iProjection, the projector keyword is displayed on
the projection screen. This is only enabled when Projector
Keyword is set to On.
Display LAN Info. Set the display format for the projector's network information. If
you display the QR code, you can connect to a network just by
reading the QR code in Epson iProjection. Text & QR Code is set
by default.
List of Functions
153
Wireless LAN menu
To connect the projector to a computer using a wireless LAN, install the
Wireless LAN unit (ELPAP10).
s "Installing the Wireless LAN Unit" p.54
Submenu Function
Connection
Mode
Set the connection mode to use when connecting the
projector and a computer via a wireless LAN.
Quick: Lets you directly connect to a smartphone, tablet, or
computer via a wireless LAN.
Advanced: Lets you connect to a smartphone, tablet, or
computer over a wireless LAN access point. The connection
is established in infrastructure mode.
Search Access
Point
When Connection Mode is set to Advanced, you can search
for surrounding access points, and set the SSID to be
connected from those access points. Depending on the
access point settings, they may not be displayed in the list.
s "Search Access Point screen" p.156
Submenu Function
SSID Enter an SSID. When an SSID is provided for the wireless
LAN system in which the projector participates, enter the
SSID.
You can enter up to 32 single-byte alphanumeric characters.
Security Select the security type according to the wireless LAN
settings.
Open: Security is not set.
WPA2-PSK: Communication is performed using WPA2
security. Uses AES method for encryption. When
establishing a connection from a computer to the projector,
enter the value set in the passphrase.
WPA/WPA2-PSK*: Connects in WPA personal mode.
Encryption method is selected automatically according to
the access point settings. Set a passphrase which is the same
for the access point.
WPA2-EAP*: Communication is performed using WPA2
security. Uses AES method for encryption.
WPA/WPA2-EAP*: Connects in WPA enterprise mode.
Encryption method is selected automatically according to
the access point settings.
Passphrase Enter a passphrase used to connect to the network when
Security is set to WPA2-PSK or WPA/WPA2-PSK.
You can enter at least 8 and up to 63 single-byte
alphanumeric characters.
You can enter up to 32 characters on the Configuration
menu. When entering more than 32 characters, use your
Web browser to enter the text.
s "Changing Settings Using a Web Browser (Epson Web
Control)" p.215
When Connection Mode is set to Quick, the initial
passphrase is set.
List of Functions
154
Submenu Function
EAP Method Set protocols for WPA2-EAP and WPA/WPA2-EAP
authentication.
EAP Type: Select the certification protocol.
•PEAP: Authentication protocol widely used in Windows
Server.
•PEAP-TLS: Authentication protocol used in Windows
Server. Select when using a client certificate.
•EAP-TLS: Authentication protocol widely used to use a
client certificate.
•EAP-FAST, LEAP: Select this when these authentication
protocols are used.
User name: Enter a user name to be used for
authentication. You can enter up to 64 single-byte
alphanumeric characters.
You can enter up to 32 characters on the Configuration
menu. When entering more than 32 characters, use your
Web browser to enter the text.
s "Changing Settings Using a Web Browser (Epson Web
Control)" p.215
If you also need to enter a domain name, add the domain
name before the user name separated by a backslash
(domain name\user name).
Password: Enter the password used for authentication in
PEAP, EAP-FAST, and LEAP. You can enter up to 64
single-byte alphanumeric characters. You can enter up to 32
characters on the Configuration menu. When entering more
than 32 characters, use your Web browser to enter the
text.
s "Changing Settings Using a Web Browser (Epson Web
Control)" p.215
When the password is entered and Finish is selected, the
value is set and displayed as an asterisk (*).
Client Certificate: Imports client certificates for use in
PEAP-TLS and EAP-TLS.
Submenu Function
Verify Server Cert.: Set to On to perform verification for
the certificate of the certification server. To verify a server
certificate, you need to set CA certificate.
CA certificate: Imports CA certificates for use in PEAP,
PEAP-TLS, EAP-TLS, and EAP-FAST.
RADIUS Serv.Name: Specify the name of the certification
server. You can enter up to 32 single-byte alphanumeric
characters.
Channel You can select the channels used to connect in Quick mode.
If interference from other signals occurs, use a different
channel.
IP Settings
*
Perform network settings.
DHCP: Set to On to configure the network using DHCP. If
this is set to On, you cannot set any more addresses.
IP Address: Enter the IP address assigned to the projector.
You can enter a number from 0 to 255 in each field of the
address. However, the following IP addresses cannot be
used.
0.0.0.0, 127.x.x.x, 224.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255 (where x is a
number from 0 to 255)
Subnet Mask: Enter the projector's subnet mask. You can
enter a number from 0 to 255 in each field of the address.
However, the following subnet masks cannot be used.
0.0.0.0, 255.255.255.255
Gateway Address: Enter the IP address for the gateway for
the projector. You can enter a number from 0 to 255 in
each field of the address. However, the following Gateway
Address cannot be used.
0.0.0.0, 127.x.x.x, 224.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255 (where x is a
number from 0 to 255)
SSID Display To prevent the SSID from being displayed on the LAN
Standby screen, set this to Off.
IP Address Dis-
play
To prevent the IP address from being displayed on the LAN
Standby screen, set this to Off.
List of Functions
155
Submenu Function
IPv6 Settings Perform settings to use the IPv6 protocols.
a
•The following functions support IPv6
protocols.
- Epson Web Control
- PJLink
•When setting the IPv6 address manually,
make settings in Advanced from Epson
Web Control.
s "Changing Settings Using a Web
Browser (Epson Web Control)" p.215
IPv6: Set this to On when using IPv6 protocols. Make sure
one link local address is set when using IPv6. This is
composed of the interface ID created from fe80:: and the
projector's MAC address.
Auto Configuration: Set this to On to automatically acquire
an IPv6 address from RA (Router Advertisement). The
address is composed as shown below.
• Stateless Address (0 to 6): Created automatically by
combining the prefix acquired from the RA (Router
Advertisement) and the interface ID created from the
projector's MAC address.
• Stateful Address (0 to 1): Created automatically from the
DHCP server using DHCPv6.
Use Temporary Address: Set this to On to temporarily
validate the IPv6 address (0 to 1) when Auto Configuration
is On.
* This can only be selected when Connection Mode is set to Advanced.
Type of security
When the optional wireless LAN unit is attached and being used in
Advanced connection mode, it is strongly recommended that you set
security.
WPA is an encryption standard that improves the security for wireless
networks. The projector supports TKIP and AES encryption methods.
WPA also includes user authentication functions. WPA authentication
provides two methods: using an authentication server, or authenticating
between a computer and an access point without using a server. This
projector supports the latter method, without a server.
a
For setting details, follow the instructions from your network
administrator.
Search Access Point screen
Detected access points are displayed in a list.
Submenu Function
Refresh Searches for the access point again.
Indicates an already set access point.
List of Functions
156
Submenu Function
Indicates the access points where security is set.
If you select an access point where security has not been set, the
Wireless LAN menu is displayed.
If you select an access point where security has been set, the
Security menu is displayed. Select a type of security according to
the security settings for the access point.
Wired LAN menu
Submenu Function
IP Settings You can make settings related to the following addresses.
DHCP: Set to On to configure the network using DHCP. If this is
set to On, you cannot set any more addresses.
IP Address: Enter the IP address assigned to the projector. You
can enter a number from 0 to 255 in each field of the address.
However, the following IP addresses cannot be used.
0.0.0.0, 127.x.x.x, 224.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255 (where x is a
number from 0 to 255)
Subnet Mask: Enter the projector's subnet mask. You can enter a
number from 0 to 255 in each field of the address. However, the
following subnet masks cannot be used.
0.0.0.0, 255.255.255.255
Gateway Address: Enter the IP address for the gateway for the
projector. You can enter a number from 0 to 255 in each field of
the address. However, the following Gateway Address cannot be
used.
0.0.0.0, 127.x.x.x, 224.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255 (where x is a
number from 0 to 255)
List of Functions
157
Submenu Function
IP Address Dis-
play
To prevent the IP address from being displayed on the LAN
Standby screen, set this to Off.
IPv6 Settings Perform settings to use the IPv6 protocols.
a
•The following functions support IPv6 proto‐
cols.
- Epson Web Control
- PJLink
•When setting the IPv6 address manually,
make settings in Advanced from Epson Web
Control.
s "Changing Settings Using a Web Browser
(Epson Web Control)" p.215
IPv6: Set this to On when using IPv6 protocols. Make sure one
link local address is set when using IPv6. This is composed of the
interface ID created from fe80:: and the projector's MAC address.
Auto Configuration: Set this to On to automatically acquire an
IPv6 address from RA (Router Advertisement). The address is
composed as shown below.
• Stateless Address (0 to 6): Created automatically by combining
the prefix acquired from the RA (Router Advertisement) and
the interface ID created from the projector's MAC address.
• Stateful Address (0 to 1): Created automatically from the
DHCP server using DHCPv6.
Use Temporary Address: Set this to On to temporarily validate
the IPv6 address (0 to 1) when Auto Configuration is On.
Notifications menu
When this is set, you receive an email notification if a problem or warning
occurs in the projector.
s "Reading error notification mail" p.225
Submenu Function
Mail Notification Set to On to send an email to the preset addresses when a problem
or warning occurs with a projector.
SMTP Server You can input the IP Address for the SMTP server for the
projector.
You can enter a number from 0 to 255 in each field of the address.
However, the following IP addresses cannot be used.
127.x.x.x, 224.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255 (where x is a number from
0 to 255)
Port Number You can input the port number for the SMTP server. The default
value is 25. You can input numbers between 1 to 65535.
From Enter the email address of the sender. You can enter up to 64
single-byte alphanumeric characters. You can enter up to 32
characters on the Configuration menu. When entering more
than 32 characters, use your Web browser to enter the text.
( " ( ) , : ; < > [ \ ] and spaces cannot be used.)
s "Changing Settings Using a Web Browser (Epson Web
Control)" p.215
List of Functions
158
Submenu Function
Address 1 Set-
ting/ Address 2
Setting/ Address
3 Setting
Set the destination email addresses for the notification email, and
the notification content. You can register up to three
destinations. You can enter up to 64 single-byte alphanumeric
characters. You can enter up to 32 characters on the
Configuration menu. When entering more than 32 characters,
use your Web browser to enter the text. ( " ( ) , : ; < > [ \ ] and spaces
cannot be used.)
s "Changing Settings Using a Web Browser (Epson Web
Control)" p.215
SNMP Set to On to monitor the projector using SNMP. To monitor the
projector, you need to install the SNMP manager program on
your computer. SNMP should be managed by a network
administrator. The default value is Off.
Trap IP Address
1/ Trap IP Ad-
dress 2
You can register up to two IP addresses for the SNMP trap
notification destination.
You can enter a number from 0 to 255 in each field of the address.
However, the following IP addresses cannot be used.
127.x.x.x, 224.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255 (where x is a number from
0 to 255)
Community
Name
Set the community name of SNMP. You can enter up to 32 single-
byte alphanumeric characters. (Spaces and symbols cannot be
used.)
PJLink Notifica-
tion
Set this to On to use the PJLink notification function.
Notified IP Ad-
dress
Enter the IP address of the computer to which you want to send
notifications of the projector's operating status using the PJLink
notification function.
You can enter a number from 0 to 255 in each field of the address.
However, the following IP addresses cannot be used.
127.x.x.x, 224.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255 (where x is a number from
0 to 255)
Others menu
Submenu Function
Secure HTTP To strengthen security, communication between the projector
and computer in Epson Web Control is encrypted. When setting
security with Epson Web Control, we recommend setting this to
On.
Web Server Cert. Imports the Web server certificate used in Secure HTTP.
Priority Gateway For the priority gateway, select either Wired or Wireless.
AMX Device Dis-
covery
When you want to allow the projector to be detected by AMX
Device Discovery, set this to On. Set this to Off if you are not
connected to an environment controlled by a controller from
AMX or AMX Device Discovery.
Crestron Con-
nected
Set this to On only when monitoring or controlling the projector
over the network using Crestron Connected
®
. Otherwise, set
this to Off.
s "About Crestron Connected
®
" p.228
Changes in projector settings take effect upon restarting.
When this is set to On, you cannot use the Message Broadcasting
feature in Epson Projector Management.
List of Functions
159
Submenu Function
Message Broad-
casting
Set this to On to receive information sent by the Message
Broadcasting feature in the Epson Projector Management
software.
Download software and User's Guides from the following Web
site.
http://www.epson.com
Reset menu
Resets all of the network settings.
Submenu Function
Reset network
settings.
To reset all of the Network settings, select Yes.
List of Functions
160
Info Menu (Display Only)
Lets you check the status of the image signals being projected and the status
of the projector. Items that can be displayed vary depending on the source
currently being projected.
Submenu Function
Projector Info Operation
Hours
*
Displays the operation time after turning on
the projector.
Source You can display the source name for the
connected equipment currently being
projected.
Input Signal You can display the content of Input
Signal set in the Signal menu according to
the source.
Resolution You can display the resolution.
Refresh Rate You can display the Refresh Rate.
Submenu Function
Sync Info You can display the image signal
information.
This information may be needed if service
is required.
Status This is information about errors that have
occurred on the projector.
This information may be needed if service
is required.
Serial Number Displays the projector's serial number.
Lens Type Displays the model number of your lens.
Event ID When problems occur when the projector
and computer are connected through the
network, information on the problem is
displayed using an Event ID. See the
following page for information on
interpreting the Event ID.
s "About Event ID" p.201
HDBaseT Sig-
nal Level
Displays the level for the image signal being
input from the HDBaseT port. When this is
displayed in yellow, the strength of the
signal level is reduced. We recommend the
following signal levels.
•1080p: 16dB or more
•4K: 18dB or more
Light Source
Info
Light Source
Hours
Displays the operating time for the light
source according to the light source mode.
Estimated Re-
mains
When Constant Brightness is set to On,
this displays the amount of time for which
the brightness of the light source can be
maintained.
List of Functions
161
Submenu Function
Version Main
Video2
Sub
Sub2
HDMI
HDBaseT
HDBaseT2
Displays the projector's firmware version
information.
Status Information Displays the projector's status.
s "Reading the Status Display" p.182
Temp Warning Info Displays a high temperature warning. When
you select Detail when a Warning or Error
is displayed, you can check detailed logs for
before and after the error was detected.
Power On/Off History Displays the power on/off logs.
* The cumulative use time is displayed as "0H" for the first 10 hours. 10 hours and
above is displayed as "10H", "11H", and so on.
Reset Menu
Submenu Function
Reset All Memo-
ries
Resets all names and settings saved in Memory, Lens Position,
and Geometry Correction.
s "Memory Function" p.110
Refresh Mode Make settings related to the Refresh Mode.
•Timer: Select when to run Refresh Mode.
•Messages: Select whether or not to display messages during
refresh operations.
•Start: Removes any afterimages (screen burn-in) that remain
in the projected image. The projector turns off once the set
time has elapsed. When you press any button on the control
panel or remote control, a message is displayed asking if you
want to continue using Refresh Mode.
List of Functions
162
Submenu Function
Light Source Cal-
ibration
Make settings related to Light Source Calibration. When
performing Light Source Calibration, the difference between the
white balance and the brightness level for the light source is
corrected. We recommend running this function periodically.
•Run Now: Starts Light Source Calibration.
This cannot be started in the following cases.
- Within 20 minutes of turning on the projector.
- If the surrounding temperature gets too high, and the
brightness has been automatically dimmed.
•Run Periodically: When this is set to On, Light Source
Calibration is performed every 100 hours of use. When Off is
selected to maintain the projected image that has been adjusted
using Multi-Projection, perform corrections using Run Now
or set the scheduling function to perform Light Source
Calibration periodically.
•Schedule Settings: Displays the schedule settings screen. Set
Light Source Calibration to run periodically.
•Last Run: Displays the last date and time Light Source
Calibration was performed.
Reset All Config You can reset all items in the Configuration menu to their default
settings.
The following items are not reset to their defaults: Input Signal,
EDID, Memory, Content Playback, User's Logo, all items for
Network menus, Language, Date & Time, Panel Alignment,
Color Uniformity, Lens Calibration, Color Matching, Light
Source Info, and Operation Hours.
Reset All (Factory
Default)
Resets all of the projector's settings. However, Date & Time,
Operation Hours, Light Source Info, Password Protection
items and their passwords are not reset. You need to enter a
password to perform a reset. The default password is set to
"0000". Change this to your own desired password.
List of Functions
163
Once the Configuration menu content has been set for one projector, you
can use it to perform batch setup for multiple projectors (batch setup
function). The batch setup function is only for projectors with the same
model number.
Use one of the following methods.
•Setup using a USB flash drive.
•Setup by connecting the computer and projector with a USB cable.
•Set through Epson Projector Management.
This manual explains the USB flash drive and the USB cable methods.
a
•The content for Light Source Info and Status Information from the
Info menu is not reflected by the batch setup function.
•Perform batch setup before adjusting the projected image.
Adjustment values for the projected image, such as Geometry
Correction are reflected by the batch setup function. If batch setup is
performed after adjusting the projected image, the adjustments you
made may change.
•By using the batch setup function, the registered User's Logo is set
for the other projectors. Do not register confidential information and
so on as the User's Logo.
•If you do not want to copy the following settings, set Batch Setup
Range to Limited.
- EDID from the Signal menu
- Network menu (except for the Notifications menu and the Others
menu)
s Extended - Operation - Advanced - Batch Setup
Range p.146
•Items for which Password Protection is set are not copied.
Caution
Performing batch setup is the customers responsibility. If batch setup fails due
to a power failure, communication error, and so on, the customer is responsible
for any repair costs incurred.
Batch Setup
164
Setup Using a USB Flash Drive
This section explains how to perform batch setup using a USB flash drive.
a
•Use a FAT format USB flash drive.
•The batch setup function cannot be used by USB flash drives that
incorporate security functions. Use a USB flash drive that does not
incorporate security functions.
•The batch setup function cannot be used by USB card readers or
USB hard disks.
Saving settings to the USB flash drive
a
Disconnect the power cord from the projector, and check that all
of the projector's indicators have turned off.
b
Connect a USB flash drive to the projector's USB-A port (the
wireless LAN module installation section).
s "Installing the Wireless LAN Unit" p.54
a
•Connect the USB flash drive directly to the projector. If the
USB flash drive is connected to the projector through a USB
hub, the settings may not be saved correctly.
•Connect an empty USB flash drive. If the USB flash drive
contains data other than the batch setup file, the settings may
not be saved correctly.
•If you have saved a batch setup file from another projector to
the USB flash drive, delete the file or change the file name.
The batch setup function cannot overwrite a batch setup file.
•The file name for the batch setup file is PJCONFDATA.bin. If
you need to change the file name, add text after
PJCONFDATA. If you change the file name in any other way,
the projector may not be able to recognize the file correctly.
•You can only use single-byte characters for the file name.
c
While holding down the [Esc] button on the remote control or the
control panel, connect the power cord to the projector.
Batch Setup
165
When the projector's indicators turn on as follows, release the [Esc]
button.
Power supply Status Laser Temp
Blue - On Blue - On Orange - On Orange - On
When all of the indicators start flashing, the batch setup file is being
written.
Caution
•Do not disconnect the power cord from the projector while the file is
being written. If the power cord is disconnected, the projector may not
start correctly.
•Do not disconnect the USB flash drive from the projector while the
file is being written. If the USB flash drive is disconnected, the
projector may not start correctly.
When writing completes normally, the projector enters standby
status.
Power
Blue - On
When the projector is in standby status, remove the USB flash
drive.
Batch Setup
166
Reflecting saved settings to other projectors
a
Disconnect the power cord from the projector, and check that all
of the projector's indicators have turned off.
b
Connect the USB flash drive on which the settings are saved to the
projector's USB-A port (the wireless LAN module installation
section).
a
•When the USB flash drive contains 1 to 3 types of batch
setup files, the file is reflected to the projector with the same
model number. If there are multiple files for a projector with
the same model number, the settings may not be reflected
correctly.
•When there are four or more types of batch setup files on the
USB flash drive, the settings may not be reflected correctly.
•Do not store any data except for the batch setup file on the
USB flash drive. If the USB flash drive contains data other
than the batch setup file, the settings may not be reflected
correctly.
c
While holding down the [Menu] on the remote control or the
control panel, connect the power cord to the projector.
When the projector's indicators turn on as follows, release
the [Menu] button.
Power supply Status Laser Temp
Blue - On Blue - On Orange - On Orange - On
The indicators remain on for about 75 seconds.
When all of the indicators start flashing, the settings are being
written.
Batch Setup
167
Caution
•Do not disconnect the power cord from the projector while the
settings are being written. If the power cord is disconnected, the
projector may not start correctly.
•Do not disconnect the USB flash drive from the projector while the
settings are being written. If the USB flash drive is disconnected, the
projector may not start correctly.
d
When writing completes normally, the projector enters standby
status.
Power
Blue - On
When the projector is in standby status, remove the USB flash
drive.
Setup by Connecting the Computer and Projector
with a USB Cable
a
The following operating systems support the batch setup function.
•Windows Vista or later
•Mac OS X 10.7.x or later
Saving settings to a computer
a
Disconnect the power cord from the projector, and check that all
of the projector's indicators have turned off.
b
Connect the computer's USB port to the projector's Service port
with a USB cable.
c
While holding down the [Esc] button on the remote control or the
control panel, connect the power cord to the projector.
Batch Setup
168
When the projector's indicators turn on as follows, release the [Esc]
button.
Power supply Status Laser Temp
Blue - On Blue - On Orange - On Orange - On
The projector is recognized as a removable disk by the computer.
d
Open the removable disk, and save the batch setup file
(PJCONFDATA.bin) to the computer.
a
If you need to change the name of the batch setup file, add text
after PJCONFDATA. If you change the file name, the projector
may not be able to recognize the file correctly.
e
Perform "Remove USB device" on your computer, and then
disconnect the USB cable.
a
When using Mac, perform "Remove EPSON_PJ".
The projector enters standby status.
Reflecting saved settings to other projectors
a
Disconnect the power cord from the projector, and check that all
of the projector's indicators have turned off.
b
Connect the computer's USB port to the projector's Service port
with a USB cable.
Batch Setup
169
c
While holding down the [Menu] on the remote control or the
control panel, connect the power cord to the projector.
When the projector's indicators turn on as follows, release
the [Menu] button.
Power supply Status Laser Temp
Blue - On Blue - On Orange - On Orange - On
The projector is recognized as a removable disk by the computer.
d
Copy the batch setup file (PJCONFDATA.bin) that you saved to
your computer to the top level folder of the removable disk.
a
Do not copy any files or folders other than the batch setup file
to the removable disk.
e
Perform "Remove USB device" on your computer, and then
disconnect the USB cable.
a
When using Mac, perform "Remove EPSON_PJ".
When all of the indicators start flashing, the settings are being
written.
Caution
Do not disconnect the power cord from the projector while the settings
are being written. If the power cord is disconnected, the projector may
not start correctly.
When writing completes normally, the projector enters standby
status.
Batch Setup
170
When Setup Fails
The Indicators notify you if an error occurs. Check the status of the
indicators.
Status of the Indicators Remedy
Laser: Orange - flashing fast
Temp: Orange - flashing fast
The batch setup file may be corrupt, or the USB
flash drive may not be connected correctly.
Disconnect the USB flash drive, unplug and then
plug in the projector's power cord, and then try
again.
Power: Blue - flashing fast
Status: Blue - flashing fast
Laser: Orange - flashing fast
Temp: Orange - flashing fast
Writing the settings may have failed and an error
may have occurred in the projector's firmware.
Stop using the projector, remove the power plug
from the electrical outlet, and contact your local
dealer or the nearest address provided in the Epson
Projector Contact List.
s Epson Projector Contact List
Batch Setup
171
Troubleshooting
This chapter explains how to identify problems and what to do if a problem is found.
If a problem occurs with the projector, you can display the Help screen to
assist you. You can also set the projector to an appropriate state by
answering the questions.
a
Press the [ ] button.
The Home screen is displayed.
Remote control
b
Select Help, and then press the [ ] button.
The Help screen is displayed.
c
Select a menu item.
Remote control
d
Confirm the selection.
Remote control
Questions and solutions are displayed as shown on the screen below.
Press the [Menu] button to exit Help.
Using the Help
173
This projector has the following five indicators to indicate the projector's status.
APower indicator
Indicates the projector's status.
BStatus indicator
Indicates the projector's status.
CLaser indicator
Indicates the light source status.
DTemp indicator
Indicates the internal temperature status. This is normally turned off.
EFilter indicator
Indicates the air filter status. This is normally turned off.
The following indicator status are used during regular operation.
"Status varies" indicates that the indicators turn on, off, or flash depending on the status of the projector.
Indicator Projector's Sta-
tus
Explanation
Power
supply
Status Laser Temp Filter
Blue - On Off Off Off Off
Standby condition Power is being supplied to the projector. In this status, you can start projecting by pressing the [ ] button
on the remote control or control panel.
(Sometimes, when the power cord is unplugged, the power indicator remains lit for a short period, but this
is not a fault.)
Network monitor‐
ing status
The projector is being monitored and controlled over a network (when Standby Mode is set to
Communication On).
If the power cord is disconnected and then reconnected in this status, the power indicator flashes blue.
Blue - On Blue -
Flashing
Status
varies
Off Off
Warm-up status This is the status immediately after turning on the projector. Warm-up takes approximately 30 seconds
after the light source turns on.
The [t] button is disabled during warm-up.
Reading the Indicators
175
Indicator Projector's Sta-
tus
Explanation
Power
supply
Status Laser Temp Filter
Blue - On Blue - On Status
varies
Off Off
Projecting The projector is projecting.
Blue - On Blue -
Flashing
Off Off Off
Cool down status This is the status immediately after turning off the power. In this status, all buttons are disabled.
Blue -
Flashing
Off Off Off Off
Preparing Network
monitoring
Preparing to monitor and control this projector over a network.
During network monitoring preparation, all button operations are disabled.
Blue - On Blue - On Blue -
Flashing
Off Off
A/V Mute activa‐
ted
A/V Mute is active.
Status
varies
Blue -
Flashing
Orange -
Flashing
Status
varies
Status
varies
Refresh Mode acti‐
vated
Refresh Mode is active.
s Reset - Refresh Mode p.162
Reading the Indicators
176
When an error has occurred in the projector, the error status is indicated by the indicator's color and combination of flashing or lit.
Refer to the following table to see what the indicators mean and how to remedy problems that they indicate.
Indicator Cause Remedy or Status
Power
supply
Status Laser Temp Filter
Off Blue -
Flashing
Orange -
Flashing
Off Off
Internal Error Stop using the projector, remove the power plug from the electrical outlet, and contact your local dealer or
the nearest address provided in the Epson Projector Contact List.
s Epson Projector Contact List
Off Blue -
Flashing
Off Orange -
Flashing
Off
Fan Error
Sensor Error
Stop using the projector, remove the power plug from the electrical outlet, and contact your local dealer or
the nearest address provided in the Epson Projector Contact List.
s Epson Projector Contact List
Off Blue -
Flashing
Off Orange -
On
Off
High Temp Error
(Overheating)
The light source turns off automatically and projection stops. Wait for about five minutes. After about five
minutes, the projector switches to standby mode, so check the following three points.
•Check that the air filter, air exhaust vent, and air intake vent are clear, and that the projector is not
positioned against a wall.
•Check if the temperature around the air intake is too high.
•If the air filter are clogged, remove the power cord from the electrical outlet, and then clean or replace
them.
s "Cleaning the Air Filter and Air Intake Vent" p.204
s "Replacing the Air Filter" p.208
If the error continues after checking the points above, stop using the projector, remove the power plug
from the electrical outlet, and contact your local dealer or the nearest address provided in the Epson
Projector Contact List.
s Epson Projector Contact List
When using at an altitude of 1500 m or more, set High Altitude Mode to On.
s Extended - Operation - High Altitude Mode p.146
Reading the Indicators
177
Indicator Cause Remedy or Status
Power
supply
Status Laser Temp Filter
Off Blue -
Flashing
Orange -
On
Off Off
Laser Error
Retardation Plate
Error
Stop using the projector, remove the power plug from the electrical outlet, and contact your local dealer or
the nearest address provided in the Epson Projector Contact List.
s Epson Projector Contact List
Off Blue -
Flashing
Off Off Orange -
On
Filter Airflow Error Check the following two points.
•Check that the air filter and air exhaust vents are clear, and that the projector is not positioned against a
wall.
•If the air filter is clogged, turn off the power, remove the power cord from the electrical outlet, and then
clean or replace them.
s "Cleaning the Air Filter and Air Intake Vent" p.204
s "Replacing the Air Filter" p.208
After checking, connect the power cord to the electrical outlet.
If the error continues after checking the points above, stop using the projector, remove the power plug
from the electrical outlet, and contact your local dealer or the nearest address provided in the Epson
Projector Contact List.
s Epson Projector Contact List
Off Blue -
Flashing
Orange -
On
Orange -
On
Off
Lens Shift Error Stop using the projector, remove the power plug from the electrical outlet, and contact your local dealer or
the nearest address provided in the Epson Projector Contact List.
s Epson Projector Contact List
Off Blue -
Flashing
Orange -
On
Orange -
On
Off
Lens Error
No Lens
Install the lens unit. If the lens unit is already installed, remove it and then reinstall it. If the error continues
after checking the points above, stop using the projector, remove the power plug from the electrical outlet,
and contact your local dealer or the nearest address provided in the Epson Projector Contact List.
s Epson Projector Contact List
Reading the Indicators
178
Indicator Cause Remedy or Status
Power
supply
Status Laser Temp Filter
Blue -
Flashing
Status
varies
Status
varies
Orange -
Flashing
Status
varies
High Temp Warn‐
ing
This is not an error. However, if the temperature rises too high again, projection stops automatically.
Check the following three points.
•Check that the air filter, air exhaust vent, and air intake vent are clear, and that the projector is not
positioned against a wall.
•Check if the temperature around the air intake is too high.
•If the air filter is clogged, turn off the power, remove the power cord from the electrical outlet, and then
clean or replace them.
s "Cleaning the Air Filter and Air Intake Vent" p.204
s "Replacing the Air Filter" p.208
Blue -
Flashing
Status
varies
Orange -
Flashing
Status
varies
Status
varies
Laser Warning Stop using the projector, remove the power plug from the electrical outlet, and contact your local dealer or
the nearest address provided in the Epson Projector Contact List.
s Epson Projector Contact List
Blue -
Flashing
Status
varies
Orange -
Flashing
Status
varies
Status
varies
Lens Warning An unsupported lens is attached. Use a supported lens.
s "Optional Accessories and Consumables" p.233
Reading the Indicators
179
Indicator Cause Remedy or Status
Power
supply
Status Laser Temp Filter
Blue -
Flashing
Status
varies
Status
varies
Status
varies
Orange -
On
Low Air Flow This is not an error. However, projection stops automatically if the airflow falls any further.
The message "The air filter is clogged. Clean or replace the air filter." is displayed. Check the following two
points.
•Check that the air filter and air exhaust vents are clear, and that the projector is not positioned against a
wall.
•If the air filter is clogged, turn off the power, remove the power cord from the electrical outlet, and then
clean or replace them.
s "Cleaning the Air Filter and Air Intake Vent" p.204
s "Replacing the Air Filter" p.208
If the error continues after checking the points above, stop using the projector, remove the power plug
from the electrical outlet, and contact your local dealer or the nearest address provided in the Epson
Projector Contact List.
s Epson Projector Contact List
Status
varies
Status
varies
Status
varies
Status
varies
Orange -
Flashing
Air Filter Notice "Time to clean the air filter. Clean or replace the air filter." is displayed.
Turn off the projector's power, unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet, and then clean the air
filter.
s "Cleaning the Air Filter and Air Intake Vent" p.204
The indicators or messages regarding air filter notice are displayed only when Air Filter Notice is set to On
in the Configuration menu.
s Extended - Display - Air Filter Notice p.146
Status
varies
Status
varies
Orange -
Flashing
Status
varies
Status
varies
Constant Bright‐
ness End
Ends the Constant Brightness mode in Brightness Settings.
s "Setting the Brightness" p.77
Reading the Indicators
180
a
•See the following if the projector is not operating properly, even though the indicators are all showing normal.
s "Problem Solving" p.190
•If the indicators are in a state not shown in this table, stop using the projector, remove the power plug from the electrical outlet, and contact your local dealer or
the nearest address provided in the Epson Projector Contact List.
s Epson Projector Contact List
Reading the Indicators
181
You can display the operating status of the projector on the projected
image. You can check the detailed status of the projector by using button
operations.
a
Press the [ ] button while projecting.
Remote control Control panel
b
Select Status Information, and then press the [ ] button.
a
You can also operate from the Configuration menu.
s Info - Status Information p.161
c
Use the [ ][ ] buttons or the [ ][ ] buttons to select a
category.
Each display category contains the following information.
Status Information : Operating status of the projector
Source : Input signal information
Signal Information : Input digital signal information
Network Wired : Wired LAN settings
Network Wireless : Wireless LAN settings
Maintenance : Operating time for the projector and light source
Version : Projector's firmware version
Reading the Status Display
182
Explanations of the Display Content
Category Item Status Display Explanation
Status Information System Displays the projector's status. See the following for more information on how to remedy the errors and warnings.
s "Reading the Indicators" p.175
OK The projector is in normal status.
Warm-Up The projector is warming up.
Standby The projector is in standby status.
Cool Down The projector is in cool down status.
Temp Error A high temp error has occurred.
Fan Error A fan error has occurred.
Sensor Error A sensor error has occurred.
Power Error A power error (Ballast) has occurred.
Internal Error An internal error has occurred.
Airflow Error A filter airflow error has occurred.
Temp Warning A high temp warning has occurred.
Internal Warning A warning about the internal system has occurred.
Airflow Decline A low air flow error has occurred.
Power Warning A power warning (Ballast) has occurred.
Clean Filter An air filter notice has occurred.
Lens Error A lens error has occurred.
Laser Error A laser error has occurred.
Laser Warning A laser warning has occurred.
Temp Error FE A laser error has occurred because the laser temperature is too high.
Temp Warning FE A laser warning has occurred because the laser temperature is too high.
Reading the Status Display
183
Category Item Status Display Explanation
Status Information Source HDMI Displays the source name for the connected equipment currently being projected.
HDBaseT
DVI-D
Computer
BNC
USB
LAN
On-Screen Display On Displays the settings for the On-Screen Display. When set to Off, the menus or messages are
not displayed on the projected images.
Off
A/V Mute On Displays the operating status of A/V mute.
Off
Intake Air Temp − Displays the air intake temperature.
Internal Temp Lv − Displays the projector's internal temperature.
Laser Status On Displays the operating status of the light source.
Off
Source Source HDMI Displays the source name for the connected equipment currently being projected.
HDBaseT
DVI-D
Computer
BNC
USB
LAN
Resolution − Displays the resolution of the current input signal.
No Signal: No signals are being input.
Not Supported: The projector does not support the current input signal.
Reading the Status Display
184
Category Item Status Display Explanation
Source Color Space RGB Displays the color space of the current input signal.
YCbCr
YPbPr
H-Frequency − Displays the horizontal frequency of the current input signal.
V-Frequency − Displays the vertical frequency of the current input signal.
Sync Polarity H:Posi / V:Posi Displays the Sync polarity.
H:Posi / V:Nega
H:Nega / V:Posi
H:Nega / V:Nega
Sync Mode Composite Sync Displays the sync type.
Separate Sync
Sync On Green
Detected Mode − Displays the discriminant resolution of the current input signal.
Transport Interlace Displays the scanning method.
Progressive
Video Range Auto(Limited) Displays the video level of the projector.
Auto(Full)
Limited(16-235)
Full(0-255)
a
Items displayed for source vary depending on the model being used and the image signal and source being projected.
Reading the Status Display
185
Category Item Status Display Explanation
Signal Information 5V Detect Detected Displays the detection results of 5V signals.
Not Detect
TMDS Clock − Displays the TMDS frequency of the current input signal.
H-Frequency − Displays the horizontal frequency of the current input signal.
V-Frequency − Displays the vertical frequency of the current input signal.
DetChg 5CFHMP123 − Displays the factors of signal changes.
Stable Time − Displays the operating time since the input source is determined.
HDCP Status Non-HDCP Displays the HDCP status.
Passed
Failed
HDCP Ri −
HDCP AKSV −
HDCP An −
HDCP Ver − Displays the HDCP version.
AVI VIC − Displays the VIC information (AVI) of the current input signal.
AVI Checksum OK Displays the checksum result for AVI.
NG
AVI Sampling Str RGB4:4:4 Displays color sampling for AVI.
YCbCr4:4:4
YCbCr4:2:2
YCbCr4:2:0
Signal Mode HDMI Displays the signal mode.
DVI
EDID Mode − Displays the EDID mode.
HDBaseT Level − You can display the image signal information from the HDBaseT port.
Reading the Status Display
186
a
Items displayed for Signal Information vary depending on the model being used and the image signal and source being projected.
Reading the Status Display
187
Category Item Status Display Explanation
Network Wired Projector Name − Displays the projector name used to identify the projector when connected to a network.
Connection Mode HDBaseT Displays the connection path for LAN.
LAN
DHCP On Displays the DHCP settings.
Off
IP Display On Displays the IP address display settings.
Off
IP Address − Displays the IP address.
MAC Address − Displays the MAC address.
Network Wireless Projector Name − Displays the projector name used to identify the projector when connected to a network.
Connection Mode Quick Displays the connection mode to use when connecting the projector and a computer over a
wireless LAN.
Advanced
SSID Display On Displays the SSID display settings.
Off
IP Display On Displays the IP address display settings.
Off
SSID − Displays the SSID.
IP Address − Displays the IP address.
DHCP On Displays the DHCP settings.
Off
MAC Address − Displays the MAC address.
Security No Displays the security settings.
WPA2-PSK
WPA/WPA2-PSK
Antenna Level LEVEL 0-5 Displays the reception status for Wi-Fi.
Reading the Status Display
188
Category Item Status Display Explanation
Maintenance Operation Time − Displays the total operation time of the projector.
Laser Op.Time − Displays the laser operating time for each setting in Light Source Mode.
Version Serial No. − Displays the projector's serial number.
Main − Displays the projector's firmware version information.
Video2 −
Sub −
Sub2 −
HDMI −
HDBaseT −
HDBaseT2 −
Reading the Status Display
189
If any of the following problems occur and the indicators do not offer a
solution, refer to the pages given for each problem.
Problems Relating to Images
•No images appear
Projection does not start, the projection area is completely black,
or the projection area is completely blue.
sp.191
•Moving images are not displayed
Videos played back on a computer are black or no image is
projected, or the video is not played back on the computer.
sp.191
•Projection stops automatically sp.192
•The message "Not supported" is displayed sp.192
•“No Signal” is displayed sp.192
•Images are fuzzy, out of focus, or distorted sp.193
•Interference or distortion appear in images sp.193
•The image is truncated (large) or small, the aspect ratio is not
suitable, or the image has been reversed
Only part of the image is displayed, the height and width ratios
of the image are not correct, or the image may appear reversed
from top to bottom or left to right.
sp.194
•Image colors are not right
The whole image appears purplish or greenish, images are black
& white, or colors appear dull.
sp.195
•Images appear dark sp.195
Problems when Projection Starts
•The projector does not turn on sp.196
Problems with Content Playback Mode
•Cannot play the playlist sp.197
Other Problems
•There are afterimages (screen burn-in) in the projected image sp.197
•No sound can be heard or the sound is faint sp.198
•The remote control does not work sp.198
•Nothing appears on the external monitor sp.199
•I want to change the language for messages and menus sp.199
•Email is not received even if a problem occurs in the projector sp.200
•“The battery that saves your clock settings is running low.” is
displayed
sp.200
Problem Solving
190
Problems Relating to Images
No images appear
Check Remedy
Did you press the [ ] button on the remote control or control
panel?
Press the [ ] button to turn on the power.
Are the indicators switched off? The power cord is not connected correctly or power is not being supplied.
Connect the projector's power cord correctly.
Check that your electrical outlet or power source is functioning correctly.
Is A/V Mute active? Press the [A/V Mute] button to release A/V Mute.
s "Hiding the Image and Sound Temporarily (A/V Mute)" p.102
Are the Configuration menu settings correct? Reset all of the settings.
s Reset - Reset All Config p.162
Is the image to be projected completely black?
(Only when projecting computer images)
Some input images, such as screen savers, may be completely black.
Is Windows Media Center displayed in full screen?
(Only during network connection)
When Windows Media Center is displayed at full screen, you cannot project using a network connection. Reduce the
screen size.
Is an application using the Windows DirectX function displayed?
(Only during network connection)
Applications using the Windows DirectX function may not display images correctly.
Moving images are not displayed
Check Remedy
Is the computer's image signal being output to the LCD and the
monitor?
(Only when projecting images from a laptop computer or a
computer with a built-in LCD screen)
Change the image signal from the computer to external output only. Check your computer's documentation, or contact
the computer's manufacturer.
Are the contents of the moving image you are trying to project
copyright protected?
The projector may not be able to project copyright protected moving images that are being played back on a computer.
For more details, see the user's guide supplied with the player.
Problem Solving
191
Projection stops automatically
Check Remedy
Is Sleep Mode set to On?Press the [ ] button to turn on the power. If you do not want to use Sleep Mode, change the setting to Off.
s Extended - Operation - Sleep Mode p.146
"Not supported" is displayed
Check Remedy
Do the image signal resolution and the refresh rate correspond to the
mode?
(Only when projecting computer images)
Refer to the computer's documentation for how to change the image signal resolution and the refresh rate output from
the computer.
s "Supported Monitor Displays" p.274
"No Signal" is displayed
Check Remedy
Are the cables connected correctly? Check that all the cables required for projection are securely connected.
Check that no cables are disconnected and that there are no poor contacts in the cables.
Is the correct port selected? Change the image by pressing the [Search] button.
s "Automatically Detecting Input Signals and Changing the Projected Image (Source Search)" p.61
Is the power for the computer or video source turned on? Turn the power on for the equipment.
Are the image signals being output to the projector?
(Only when projecting images from a laptop computer or a
computer with a built-in LCD screen)
If the image signals are only being output to the computer's LCD monitor or to the accessory monitor, you need to
change the output to an external destination as well as the computer's own monitor. For some computer models, when
the image signals are output externally, they no longer appear on the LCD monitor or accessory monitor.
If the connection is made while the power of the projector or computer is already turned on, the Fn key (Function key)
that changes the computer's image signal to external output may not work. Turn the power for the computer and the
projector off and then back on again.
s Computer's documentation
Problem Solving
192
Images are fuzzy, out of focus, or distorted
Check Remedy
Is the focus adjusted correctly? Make sure that at least 20 minutes has passed after the projection starts, and press the [Focus] button on the remote
control to adjust the focus.
s "Correcting the Focus" p.38
Is the projector at the correct distance? Is it projecting outside of the recommended projection distance range?
Setup within the recommended range.
s "Screen Size and Projection Distance" p.234
Has condensation formed on the lens? If the projector is suddenly taken from a cold environment to a warm environment, or if sudden ambient temperature
changes occur, condensation may form on the surface of the lens, and this may cause the images to appear fuzzy. Set the
projector up in the room about one hour before it is used. If condensation forms on the lens, turn the projector off and
wait for the condensation to disappear.
Interference or distortion appear in images
Check Remedy
Are the cables connected correctly? Check that all the cables required for projection are securely connected.
s "Connecting Equipment" p.47
Is an extension cable being used? If an extension cable is used, electrical interference may affect the signals.
Is the correct resolution selected?
(Only when projecting computer images)
Set the computer so that the signals being output are compatible with the projector.
s "Supported Monitor Displays" p.274
s Computer's documentation
Is the Sync./Tracking adjusted correctly?
(Only when projecting computer images)
Press the [Auto] button on the Remote Control or the [ ] button on the Control panel to perform automatic
adjustment. If the images are not adjusted correctly even after performing automatic adjustment, you can also make
adjustments from the Configuration menu.
s Signal - Tracking, Sync. p.142
Is the Resolution set to anything other than Auto?
(Only when projecting on a split screen)
The image may be collapsed if the Resolution on the Configuration menu and the resolution of the projected image are
not the same.
If the image is collapsed, set the Resolution to Auto.
s Signal - Resolution p.142
Problem Solving
193
The image is truncated (large) or small, the aspect is not suitable, or the image has been reversed
Check Remedy
Have the Screen been set correctly? Make the appropriate Screen for the screen being used.
s "Screen Settings" p.32
Is the aspect adjusted correctly? Press the [Aspect] button to select an aspect suitable for the input source.
s "Changing the Aspect Ratio of the Projected Image" p.80
Is a wide panel computer image being projected?
(Only when projecting computer images)
Change the setting according to the signal for the connected equipment.
s Signal - Resolution p.142
Is the image still being enlarged by E-Zoom? Press the [Esc] button on the remote control to cancel E-Zoom.
s "Enlarging Part of the Image (E-Zoom)" p.104
Is Scale turned on? Set Scale to Off on the configuration menu.
s Signal - Scale - Scale p.142
Is the display range restricted by Blanking? Appropriately set Blanking in the configuration menu.
s Signal - Blanking p.142
Is the image position adjusted correctly? (Only when projecting analog RGB signals input from the Computer port)
Press the [Auto] button on the remote control or the [ ] button on the control panel to adjust the position.
You can also adjust the position from the Configuration menu.
s Signal - Position p.142
Is the computer set for dual display?
(Only when projecting computer images)
If dual display is activated in the Display Properties of the computer's Control Panel, only about half of the image on the
computer screen is projected. To display the entire image on the computer screen, turn off the dual display setting.
s Computer video driver documentation
Is the correct resolution selected?
(Only when projecting computer images)
Set the computer so that the signals being output are compatible with the projector.
s "Supported Monitor Displays" p.274
s Computer's documentation
Is the image direction correct? Make the correct settings in Projection from the Configuration menu.
s "Installation Settings" p.31
Problem Solving
194
Image colors are not right
Check Remedy
Do the input signal settings match the signals from the connected
device?
Change the setting according to the signal for the connected equipment.
s Signal - Advanced - Input Signal p.142
Is the image brightness adjusted correctly? Adjust the Brightness setting from the Configuration menu.
s Image - Brightness p.140
Are the cables connected correctly? Check that all the cables required for projection are securely connected.
Check that no cables are disconnected and that there are no poor contacts in the cables.
s "Connecting Equipment" p.47
Is the Contrast adjusted correctly? Adjust the Contrast setting from the Configuration menu.
s Image - Contrast p.140
Is the color adjustment set correctly? Adjust the Gamma or RGBCMY setting from the Configuration menu.
s Image - Advanced p.140
s "Adjusting the Image" p.81
Are the color saturation and tint adjusted correctly? Adjust the Color Saturation and Tint settings from the Configuration menu.
s Image - Color Saturation, Tint p.140
Are you projecting from multiple projectors at the same time? Make sure that Light Source Calibration from the Reset menu is set correctly for all of the projectors. If Light Source
Calibration is only executed for some of the projectors, there may be differences in the White Balance or the Brightness
Level between projectors.
If there are still differences in the color, set Light Source Calibration to Off.
Images appear dark
Check Remedy
Is the image brightness set correctly? Check the Brightness and Brightness Settings values from the Configuration menu.
s Image - Brightness p.140
s Settings - Brightness Settings p.143
Is the Contrast adjusted correctly? Adjust the Contrast setting from the Configuration menu.
s Image - Contrast p.140
Problem Solving
195
Check Remedy
Is only one projector being used? Check if the following item is set to dark.
s Extended - Multi-Projection- Brightness Settings p.146
Problems when Projection Starts
The projector does not turn on
Check Remedy
Did you press the [ ] button on the remote control or control
panel?
Press the [ ] button to turn on the power.
Are the indicators switched off? The power cord is not connected correctly or power is not being supplied.
Disconnect and then reconnect the power cord.
Check that your electrical outlet or power source is functioning correctly.
Do the indicators turn on and off when the power cord is touched? There is probably a poor contact in the power cable, or the power cable may be defective. Reinsert the power cable. If this
does not solve the problem, stop using the projector, disconnect the power cable from the electrical outlet, and contact
your local dealer or the nearest address provided in the Epson Projector Contact List.
s Epson Projector Contact List
Is the Control Panel Lock set to Full Lock?Press the [ ] button on the remote control. If you do not want to use Control Panel Lock, change the setting to
Off.
s "Control Panel Lock" p.117
Is the correct setting for the remote receiver selected? Check the Remote Receiver from the Configuration menu.
s Settings - Remote Receiver p.143
Was the power cord plugged back in or was the breaker turned on
immediately after direct power off?
If the operation described in the column on the left is performed when Direct Power On is set to On, the power may not
turn back on. Press the [ ] button to turn on the power.
Is the [ID] switch on the remote control set to On? When the switch is set to On, you can use the remote control to operate only a projector with a matching ID. Set the [ID]
switch to Off.
s "Setting the remote control ID" p.43
Problem Solving
196
Problems with Content Playback Mode
Cannot play the playlist
Check Remedy
Is Content Playback set to On?Set Content Playback to On, and then restart the projector. You can only play playlists on USB flash drives in Content
Playback mode.
s Settings - Content Playback - Content Playback p.143
Are there any playlists on the USB flash drive? Make sure the USB flash drive contains a playlist. See the "Epson Projector Content Manager Operation Guide" for
details on creating playlists.
Is the USB flash drive connected to the projector? Make sure the USB flash drive is connected directly to the projector. Do not use a multicard reader or a USB hub.
Is the USB flash drive partitioned? If the USB flash drive is partitioned, you may not be able to play back playlists. Delete all of the partitions before saving the
playlists on the USB flash drive.
Are you playing the same playlist on projectors with different
resolutions?
Do not share a playlist between projectors that are different in resolution. Color and shape effects added by using
Overlay Effect may not be reproduced correctly.
s Settings - Content Playback - Overlay Effect p.143
Other Problems
There are afterimages (screen burn-in) in the projected image
Check Remedy
Are you using Refresh Mode? You can remove afterimages (screen burn-in) from the projected image by using Refresh Mode. Select Start
from Refresh Mode in the Reset menu.
s Reset - Refresh Mode p.162
Problem Solving
197
No sound can be heard or the sound is faint
Check Remedy
Check that the audio/video cable is securely attached to both the
projector and audio source.
Disconnect the cable from the Audio port, and then reconnect the cable.
Is the projector volume set to the minimum? Adjust the volume so that sound can be heard.
s Settings - Volume p.143
s "Adjusting the Volume" p.63
Is the volume for the computer or from the image source set to the
minimum?
Adjust the volume so that sound can be heard.
Is A/V Mute active? Press the [A/V Mute] button to release A/V Mute.
s "Hiding the Image and Sound Temporarily (A/V Mute)" p.102
Is the audio cable's specification "No resistance"? When using a commercially available audio cable, make sure it is labeled "No resistance".
Is it connected with an HDMI cable? If no audio is output when connecting via an HDMI cable, set the connected equipment to PCM output.
Is the correct audio input selected? Check the Audio Settings from the configuration menu.
s Extended - A/V Settings - Audio Settings p.146
The remote control does not work
Check Remedy
Is the remote control light-emitting area pointing towards the
remote receiver on the projector during operation?
Point the remote control towards the remote receiver.
s "Remote control operating range" p.24
Is the remote control too far from the projector? Check the operating range.
s "Remote control operating range" p.24
Is direct sunlight or strong light from fluorescent lamps shining onto
the remote receiver?
Set the projector up in a location where strong light does not shine onto the remote receiver.
Is the correct setting for the Remote Receiver selected? Check the Remote Receiver from the Configuration menu.
s Settings - Remote Receiver p.143
Are the batteries dead or have the batteries been inserted correctly? Make sure the batteries are inserted correctly or replace the batteries with new ones if necessary.
s "Replacing the remote control batteries" p.23
Problem Solving
198
Check Remedy
Are the remote control ID and the projector ID matched? Make sure the ID for the projector you want to operate and the ID for the remote control match. To operate all projectors
by remote control regardless of the ID setting, set the [ID] switch on the remote control to Off.
s "ID Settings" p.42
Is the optional remote control cable connected to the projector's
Remote port?
When the remote control cable is connected, the projector's remote receiver is disabled. When not using the remote
control cable set, disconnect it from the Remote port.
Is Control Communications or Extron XTP set to On? The Remote port is disabled. When using the optional remote control cable set, set Control Communications or Extron
XTP to Off.
s Extended - HDBaseT p.146
Is the remote control button lock set? When the remote control button lock is set, buttons except for those needed for basic remote control operations are
deactivated. Hold down the [ ] button to cancel the remote control button lock.
s "Remote control button lock" p.118
Nothing appears on the external monitor
Check Remedy
Are images input from a port other than the Computer port or
BNC port?
Only RGB signals from the Computer port or the BNC port can be displayed on an external monitor.
Are you projecting a split screen? Only RGB signals projected on the left screen from the Computer port or the BNC port can be displayed on an
external monitor.
s "Projecting Two Images Simultaneously (Split Screen)" p.99
Is the projector in standby status? Check that Standby Mode, A/V Output, and Monitor Out from the Configuration menu are set correctly.
s Extended - Standby Mode, A/V Settings p.146
I want to change the language for messages and menus
Check Remedy
Change the Language setting. Adjust the Language setting from the Configuration menu.
s Extended - Language p.146
Problem Solving
199
Email is not received even if a problem occurs in the projector
Check Remedy
Is Standby Mode set to Communication On? To use the Mail Notification function when the projector is in standby, set Communication On in Standby Mode from
the Configuration menu.
s Extended - Standby Mode p.146
Is power being supplied to the projector? Check that your electrical outlet or power source is functioning correctly.
Is the Mail Notification function set correctly in the Configuration
menu?
An error notification email is sent according to the Notifications settings in the Configuration menu. Check if it is set
correctly.
s "Notifications menu" p.158
"The battery that saves your clock settings is running low." is displayed
Check Remedy
The internal power supply that saves your clock settings is
running low.
Contact your local dealer or the nearest address provided in the Epson Projector Contact List.
s Epson Projector Contact List
Problem Solving
200
Check the numbers and then apply the following countermeasures. If you cannot resolve the problem, contact your network administrator, or contact your local
dealer or the nearest address provided in the Epson Projector Contact List.
s Epson Projector Contact List
Event ID Cause Remedy
0432
0435
Failed to start the network software. Restart the projector.
0434
0481
0482
0485
Network communication is unstable. Check the network communication status, and reconnect after waiting for a while.
0433 Cannot play transferred images. Restart the network software.
0484 Communication was disconnected from the computer.
0483
04FE
The network software ended unexpectedly. Check the status of network communications. Restart the projector.
0479
04FF
A system error occurred in the projector. Restart the projector.
0891 Cannot find an access point with the same SSID. Set the computer, the access point, and the projector to the same SSID.
0892 The WPA/WPA2 authentication type does not match. Check that the wireless LAN security settings are correct.
s Network - Wireless LAN p.154
0893 The TKIP/AES encryption types do not match.
0894 Communication was disconnected because the projector connected
to an unauthorized access point.
Contact your network administrator for more information.
0898 Failed to acquire DHCP. Check that the DHCP server is operating correctly. If you are not using DHCP, turn off the DHCP
setting.
s Network - Wireless LAN p.154, Wired LAN p.157
0899 Other communication errors If restarting the projector or network software does not solve the problem, contact your local dealer
or the nearest address provided in the Epson Projector Contact List.
s Epson Projector Contact List
089A The EAP authentication type is not the same. Check that the wireless LAN security settings are correct. Also, check if the certificate is installed
correctly.
s Network - Wireless LAN p.154
089B EAP server authentication failed.
089C EAP client authentication failed.
About Event ID
201
Event ID Cause Remedy
089D Key exchange failed.
0920 The internal power supply that saves your clock settings is running
low.
Contact your local dealer or the nearest address provided in the Epson Projector Contact List.
s Epson Projector Contact List
About Event ID
202
Maintenance
This chapter provides information on maintenance procedures to ensure the best level of performance from the projector for a long time to come.
You should clean the projector if it becomes dirty or if the quality of
projected images starts to deteriorate.
Caution
When cleaning, unplug the power cable from the electric outlet. Otherwise, it
could cause an electric shock.
Cleaning the Projector
Clean the projector's surface by wiping it gently with a soft cloth.
If the projector is particularly dirty, moisten the cloth with water and firmly
wring it out before wiping, and then finish with a dry cloth.
Attention
Do not use volatile substances such as wax, benzene, or thinner, or kitchen
detergent to clean the projector's surface. The quality of the case may change
or become discolored.
Cleaning the Lens
Use a commercially available cloth for cleaning glasses to gently wipe the
lens.
Warning
Do not use sprays that contain flammable gas to remove dust and lint from the
lens. The projector may catch fire due to the high internal temperature.
Use a vacuum cleaner or a hand-held air blower to remove any dust and lint
attached to the lens.
Attention
Do not rub the lens with harsh materials or subject the lens to shocks, as it
can easily become damaged.
Cleaning the Air Filter and Air Intake Vent
When the following message is displayed and the filter indicator flashes
orange, clean the air filter and the air intake vent.
"Time to clean the air filter. Clean or replace the air filter."
"The projector is overheating. Make sure nothing is blocking the air vent,
and clean or replace the air filter."
"The air filter is clogged. Clean or replace the air filter."
Warning
Do not use sprays that contain flammable gas to remove dust and lint from the
filter.
The projector may catch fire due to the high internal temperature. Use a
vacuum cleaner or a hand-held air blower to remove any dust and lint attached
to the air filter and so on.
Attention
•If dust collects on the air filter, it can cause the internal temperature of the
projector to rise, and this can lead to problems with operation and shorten
the optical engine's service life. Clean the air filter immediately when the
message is displayed.
•Do not rinse the air filter in water. Do not use detergents or solvents.
•When using a brush for cleaning, use one with long soft bristles, and brush it
lightly. If it is brushed too strongly, dust will be ground into the air filter and
cannot be removed.
Cleaning the Parts
204
Cleaning the air filter
The air filter can be replaced even when the projector is suspended from a
ceiling.
a
After you turn off the projector's power and the confirmation
buzzer beeps, disconnect the power cord.
b
Loosen the fixing screws and open the air filter cover.
c
Remove the air filter.
Grip the tab of the air filter, and pull it straight out.
d
With the front (the side with tabs) of the air filter facing down, tap
the air filter four or five times to shake off the dust.
Turn it over and tap the other side in the same way.
Attention
If the air filter is hit too hard, it may become unusable due to
deformities and cracks.
Cleaning the Parts
205
e
Remove any dust remaining on the air filter by using a vacuum
cleaner from the front side.
f
Replace the air filter.
g
Close the air filter cover and tighten the fixing screws.
a
•If a message is frequently displayed, even after cleaning, it is time to
replace the air filter. Replace it with a new air filter.
s "Replacing the Air Filter" p.208
•It is recommended that you clean the air filter every 20,000 hours.
Clean it more often than this if using the projector in a particularly
dusty environment.
•The indicators or messages regarding Air Filter Notice are displayed
only when Air Filter Notice is set to On from the Configuration
menu.
s Extended - Display - Air Filter Notice p.146
Cleaning the air intake vent
a
After you turn off the projector's power and the confirmation
buzzer beeps, disconnect the power cord.
b
Use a vacuum cleaner or a soft brush to carefully remove the
dust.
Cleaning the Parts
206
Cleaning the Parts
207
This section explains how to replace the air filter.
Replacing the Air Filter
Air filter replacement period
If the message is displayed frequently even though the air filter has been
cleaned, replace the air filter.
Replacing the air filter
The air filter can be replaced even when the projector is suspended from a
ceiling.
a
After you turn off the projector's power and the confirmation
buzzer beeps, disconnect the power cord.
b
Loosen the fixing screws and open the air filter cover.
c
Remove the air filter.
Grip the tab of the air filter, and pull it straight out.
d
Install the new air filter.
Replacing Consumables
208
e
Close the air filter cover and tighten the fixing screws.
a
Dispose of used air filters properly in accordance with your local
regulations.
Material of the frame part: Polypropylene
Material of the filter part: Polypropylene
Replacing Consumables
209
Panel Alignment
Adjusts the pixel color shift for the LCD panel. You can adjust the pixels
horizontally and vertically by 0.125 pixels within a range of ±3 pixels.
a
•Image quality may decline after performing LCD alignment.
•Images for pixels that extend beyond the edge of the projected
screen are not displayed.
a
Press the [Menu] button while projecting.
b
Select Display from Extended.
c
Select Panel Alignment, and then press the [ ] button.
d
Enable Panel Alignment.
(1) Select Panel Alignment, and then press the [ ] button.
(2) Select On, and then press the [ ] button.
(3) Press the [Esc] button to return to the previous screen.
e
Select the color you want to adjust.
(1) Select Select Color, and then press the [ ] button.
(2) Select R (red) or B (blue), and then press the [ ] button.
(3) Press the [Esc] button to return to the previous screen.
f
Select the grid color displayed when making adjustments from
Pattern Color.
(1) Select Pattern Color, and then press the [ ] button.
Image Maintenance
210
(2) Select a combination of R (red), G (green), and B (blue) for the grid color.
R/G/B: Displays a combination all three colors; red, green and blue. The
actual color of the grid is white.
R/G: This is available when R is selected from Select Color. Displays a
combination of two colors; red and green. The actual color of the grid is
yellow.
G/B: This is available when B is selected from Select Color. Displays a
combination of two colors; green and blue. The actual color of the grid is
cyan.
(3) Press the [Esc] button to return to the previous screen.
g
Select Start Adjustments, and then press the [ ] button.
First, select Shift the whole panel to adjust the entire LCD panel.
When the start confirmation message is displayed, press the [ ]
button to start adjustment.
a
The image may become distorted while adjusting. The image is
restored once adjustments are complete.
h
Use the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to make adjustments, and then
press the [ ] button.
i
To perform more detailed adjustments, select Adjust the four
corners, and then press the [ ] button to confirm.
j
Use the [ ], [ ], [ ], and [ ] buttons to make adjustments, and
then press the [ ] button to move to the next adjustment point.
k
When you have adjusted all four corners, select Exit, and then
press the [ ] button.
If you feel you still need to make adjustments after correcting all
four points, select Select intersection and adjust and then continue
making adjustments.
Image Maintenance
211
Color Uniformity
Adjusts the color tone for the whole screen.
a
The color tone may not be uniform even after performing color
uniformity.
a
Press the [Menu] button while projecting.
b
Select Display from Extended.
c
Select Color Uniformity, and then press the [ ] button.
The following screen is displayed.
Color Uniformity: Turns color uniformity on or off.
Adjustment Level: There are eight levels from white, through gray,
and up to black. You can adjust each level individually.
Start Adjustments: Starts adjusting color uniformity.
Reset: Resets all adjustments and settings for Color Uniformity to
their default values.
a
The image may become distorted while adjusting Color
Uniformity. The image is restored once adjustments are
complete.
d
Select Color Uniformity, and then press the [ ] button.
e
Set to On, and then press the [Esc] button.
f
Select Adjustment Level, and then press the [ ] button.
g
Use the [ ][ ] buttons to set the adjustment level.
h
Press the [Esc] button to return to the previous screen.
i
Select Start Adjustments, and then press the [ ] button.
j
Select the area you want to adjust, and then press the [ ]
button.
Adjust the outer areas first, and then adjust the whole screen.
Image Maintenance
212
k
Use the [ ][ ] buttons to select the color you want to adjust,
and then use the [ ][ ] buttons to adjust.
Press the [ ] button to weaken the color tone. Press the [ ] button
to strengthen the color tone.
l
Return to step 6 and adjust each level.
m
To complete the adjustment, press the [Menu] button.
Image Maintenance
213
Appendix
Epson Projector Management
Epson Projector Management lets you carry out operations such as checking
the status of multiple Epson projectors that are connected to a network at a
computer monitor, and controlling the projectors from the computer.
Download the Epson Projector Management software from the following
website.
http://www.epson.com
Changing Settings Using a Web Browser (Epson
Web Control)
By using a Web browser of a computer or mobile device connected to the
projector on a network, you can set functions and control the projector.
This function allows you to perform setup and control operations remotely.
You can use the following Web browsers.
•Internet Explorer 11.0 or later (except for Metro) (Windows)
•Microsoft Edge (Windows)
•Safari (Mac)
•Chrome (Android)
a
If you set Standby Mode to Communication On, you can use the
Web browser to make settings and perform control even if the
projector is in standby mode (when the power is off).
s Extended - Standby Mode p.146
Displaying the Epson Web Control Screen
Use the following procedure to display the Epson Web Control screen.
Make sure your device and projector are ready for the network connection.
a
If your Web browser is set up to connect via a proxy server, the Epson
Web Control screen cannot be displayed. To display Web Control, you
need to make settings so that a proxy server is not used for a
connection.
Monitoring and Controlling
215
a
Connect your device to the same network as the connected
projector.
The connection method varies depending on the device. See the
manual supplied with your device for details. When using a mobile
device, check the Wi-Fi settings.
b
Start the Web browser on your device.
c
Connect by entering the address of the connected projector in the
URL field of the Web browser.
The Home screen is displayed.
ABasic Control
s "Basic Control Screen" p.216
BLens Control
s "Lens Control Screen" p.218
CStatus Information
s "Status Information Screen" p.220
DAdvanced
You are moved to the Advanced screen.
ECrestron Connected
s "About Crestron Connected
®
" p.228
FTest Pattern
s "Test Pattern Operation Screen" p.219
GOSD Control Pad
s "OSD Control Pad Screen" p.217
a
•When performing the functions from the Home screen, you
may be prompted to enter the user name and password.
When the login screen is displayed, enter your user name and
password. (The user name is EPSONWEB; the default
password is admin.)
•You cannot change the user name. You can change the
password in the Network menu from the Configuration menu.
s Network - Basic - Web Control Password p.153
•You must enter the user name for Web Control Password
even when the password is disabled.
•You can only set the following items from the Advanced
screen.
Monitor Password (up to 16 single-byte alphanumeric
characters)
s Network - Basic - Monitor Password p.153
IPv6 Settings (Manual)
s Network - IPv6 Settings p.154, p.157
Add HTTP port (for the port number used for Web control,
use anything except for 80 (default), 843, 3620, 3621, 3625,
3629, 4352, 4649, 5357, 10000, 10001, 41794)
s Network - Others p.159
Basic Control Screen
You can perform basic projector operations.
When the login screen is displayed, enter your user name and password.
(The user name is EPSONREMOTE; the default password is guest.)
Monitoring and Controlling
216
AMoves to the Home screen.
BTurns the projector on.
CSwitches to the target image.
DTurns the video and audio on or off.
EAutomatically detects the input signal.
FTurns the projector off.
OSD Control Pad Screen
You can operate the Configuration menu of the projector.
AMoves to the Home screen.
BDisplays and closes the Configuration menu.
CYou can operate the Configuration menu using your finger or mouse.
Flick to select an item, and tap to confirm the selection.
DEnabled when Default: Reset is displayed on the Configuration menu guide. The
settings being adjusted are returned to their default values.
EReturns to the previous menu level in the Configuration menu.
FDisplays information on using the OSD Control Pad.
Monitoring and Controlling
217
a
Items in the Configuration menu that cannot be set in Epson Web
Control are listed below.
•Image menu - Advanced - Gamma - Custom
•Signal menu - Advanced - BNC Sync Termination, EDID, DDC
Buffer
•Settings menu - HDMI Link, User Button, Content Playback
•Extended menu - Display - Message Position
•Extended menu - User's Logo
•Extended menu - Operation - Advanced - Lens Type
•Extended menu - Operation - Lens Calibration
•Extended menu - Language
•Network menu - Search Access Point, Crestron Connected
The settings for items on each menu are the same as the projector's
Configuration menu.
s "Configuration Menu" p.135
Lens Control Screen
You can operate the lens of the projector.
Focus/Distortion Operation Screen
AMoves to the Home screen.
BMove the slider to adjust the focus.
CPress the buttons to adjust the focus.
DMove the slider to adjust image warping.
*
EPress the buttons to adjust image warping.
*
FDisplays the Focus / Distortion operation screen.
GDisplays the Zoom operation screen.
HDisplays the Lens Shift operation screen.
IDisplays the Test Pattern operation screen.
JDisplays the Memory operation screen.
*This is not available for ELPLU02.
Zoom Operation Screen
This is not available for ELPLX01, ELPLX01W, and ELPLR04.
Monitoring and Controlling
218
AMove the slider to adjust the zoom.
BPress the buttons to adjust the zoom.
Lens Shift Operation Screen
ADisplays the position of the image as a blue square. When you move the image
position, a red square is displayed at the destination.
BDisplays the vertical image position. You can directly specify the position by
tapping it and entering a number.
CMoves the image position up, down, left, or right.
DMoves the lens position to the home position if you press the OK button in the
confirmation screen.
EDisplays the horizontal image position. You can directly specify the position by
tapping it and entering a number.
Test Pattern Operation Screen
ADisplays a test pattern.
BCloses the test pattern.
Memory Operation Screen
See the following for memory function details.
s "Memory Function" p.110
Monitoring and Controlling
219
ALoads a memory.
BSaves a memory.
CDisplays a list of memories.
DErases a memory.
EChanges a memory name.
Status Information Screen
You can check the projector's status. See the following for display details.
s "Reading the Status Display" p.182
AMoves to the Home screen.
BDisplays the item name.
CDisplays the status of each item.
DSelects a category from the following.
Status Information, Source, Signal Information, Network Wired, Network
Wireless, Maintenance, Version, Air Temp Info
Changing Settings Using a Web Browser (Content
Playback Mode)
In Content Playback mode, you can use a Web browser to set and control
network projectors, and edit playlists.
a
You can also control projectors using a Web browser from Epson
iProjection (iOS/Android).
Monitoring and Controlling
220
Attention
Do not remove the USB flash drive from the projector or unplug the power
cord in the following situations. Otherwise, data on the USB flash drive may
be corrupted.
•While viewing the Playlist screen
•While viewing the USB flash drive screen
a
Make sure that the projector is in Content Playback mode.
b
Connect your device to the same network as the connected
projector.
c
Start the Web browser on your device. Enter the IP address of the
projector in the address input box of the browser to connect to
the Epson Web Control screen. When entering an IPv6 address,
enclose the address in square brackets [].
The Epson Web Control screen is displayed.
AYou can use this to operate the projector remotely.
BEdit the playlist you want to play in Content Playback mode.
CDisplays the Timetable screen.
DOperate the Configuration menus using your finger or mouse.
EDisplays a test pattern.
FDisplays the projector's status.
GMake advanced settings for the projector.
HDisplays the Crestron Connected operation screen. This is only enabled when
using Crestron Connected.
IOperate the lens of the projector.
JSave the data for your playlists to a USB flash drive.
d
Select the item you want to use.
Monitoring and Controlling
221
a
You may need to login to set options on the Epson Web
Control screen. When the login screen is displayed, enter your
user name and password.
(The user name is EPSONWEB; the default password is
admin.)
•You can change the password in Web Control Password
from the Network.
s Network - Network Configuration - Basic - Web
Control Password p.153
•You can only set the following items from Advanced.
- Monitor Password (up to 16 single-byte alphanumeric
characters)
- IPv6 Settings (Manual)
- Add HTTP port (for the port number used for Web control,
use anything except for 0 (default), 843, 3620, 3621, 3625,
3629, 4352, 4649, 5357, 10000, 10001, 41794)
Remote
AMoves to the Epson Web Control home screen.
BTurns the projector on or off.
CSelects the input source.
DTurns the video and audio on or off temporarily.
ESelects your favorite playlist.
FTurns Overlay Effect on or off.
GAdjusts the volume for the speakers.
Monitoring and Controlling
222
Playlists
AMoves to the Epson Web Control home screen.
BControls playback of the playlist.
CEdits the playlist.
DCreates a new playlist.
USB Memory Device
AMoves to the Epson Web Control home screen.
BSaves photos and videos you want to add to your playlists to the USB flash drive.
CDeletes photos and videos from the USB flash drive.
Monitoring and Controlling
223
Time Table
AMoves to the Epson Web Control home screen.
BTurns the timetable on or off.
a
The timetable feature in Epson Projector Content Manager allows you
to specify when the playlist will be played.
See the "Epson Projector Content Manager Operation Guide" for
details.
OSD Control Pad
AMoves to the Epson Web Control home screen.
BDisplays the Configuration menu.
COperate the menus using your finger or mouse.
DEnabled when Default: Reset is displayed on the menu guide. The settings being
adjusted are returned to their default values.
EReturns to the previous menu.
FDisplays the help topics.
a
See the following for items in the Configuration menu that cannot be
set in Epson Web Control.
s "OSD Control Pad Screen" p.217
Monitoring and Controlling
224
Using the Mail Notification Function to Report
Problems
When you set Mail Notification, notification messages are sent to the preset
email addresses when a problem or warning occurs with a projector. This
will enable the operator to be notified of problems with projectors even at
locations away from the projectors.
s Network - Notifications - Mail Notification p.158
a
•Up to a maximum of three notification destinations (addresses) can
be registered, and notification messages can be sent to all three
destinations at once.
•If a projector develops a critical problem and suddenly stops
working, it may not be able to send a message notifying an operator
of the problem.
•If you set Standby Mode to Communication On, you can control
the projector even if it is in standby mode (when the power is
off).
s Extended - Standby Mode p.146
Reading error notification mail
When the Mail Notification function is set to On and a problem or warning
occurs in the projector, the following email will be sent.
Sender: The email address set in From
Subject: EPSON Projector
Line 1: The projector name where the problem has occurred
Line 2: The IP address set for the projector where the problem has
occurred.
Line 3 and on: Details of the problem
The details of the problem are listed line by line. The main message
contents are listed below.
•Clean Air Filter
•Constant brightness expired (Constant Bright. End)
•Internal error
•Fan related error
•Sensor error
•Laser error (Laser Error/Laser Does Not Turn On)
•Laser warning
•Retardation Plate Error
•Internal temperature error
•High-speed cooling in progress
•Low Air Flow
•Low Air Flow Error
•No-signal
No Signal is input to the projector. Check the connection status or check
that the power for the signal source is turned on.
•Lens shift error
•No lens
See the following to deal with problems or warnings.
s "Reading the Indicators" p.175
Monitoring and Controlling
225
Management Using SNMP
By setting SNMP to On in the Configuration menu, notification messages
are sent to the specified computer when a problem or warning occurs. This
allows you to check for problems with projectors even at locations away
from the projectors.
s Network - Notifications - SNMP p.158
a
•SNMP should be managed by a network administrator or someone
who is familiar with the network.
•To use the SNMP function to monitor the projector, you need to
install the SNMP manager program on your computer.
•The SNMP Agent for this projector complies with version 1
(SNMPv1).
•The managing function using SNMP cannot be used over wireless
LAN in Quick connection mode.
•Up to two destination IP addresses can be saved.
ESC/VP21 Commands
You can control the projector from an external device using ESC/VP21.
Command list
When the power ON command is transmitted to the projector, the power
turns on and it enters warm-up mode. When the projector's power has
turned on, a colon ":" (3Ah) is returned.
When a command is input, the projector executes the command and
returns a ":", and then accepts the next command.
If the command being processed terminates abnormally, an error message is
output and a ":" is returned.
The main contents are listed below.
Item Command
Power ON/OFF On PWR ON
Off PWR OFF
Signal selection Computer Auto SOURCE 1F
RGB SOURCE 11
Component SOURCE 14
BNC Auto SOURCE BF
RGB SOURCE B1
Component SOURCE B4
HDMI SOURCE 30
USB SOURCE 52
LAN SOURCE 53
DVI-D SOURCE A0
HDBaseT SOURCE 80
A/V Mute On/Off On MUTE ON
Off MUTE OFF
Add a Carriage Return (CR) code (0Dh) to the end of each command and
transmit.
For more details, contact your local dealer or the nearest address provided
in the Epson Projector Contact List.
s Epson Projector Contact List
Cable layouts
Serial connection
•Connector shape: D-Sub 9-pin (male)
Monitoring and Controlling
226
•Projector input port name: RS-232C
<At the projector> <At the computer>
<At the projector> (PC serial cable) <At the computer>
Signal Name Function
GND Signal wire ground
TD Transmit data
RD Receive data
Communications protocol
•Default baud rate setting: 9600 bps
•Data length: 8 bit
•Parity: None
•Stop-bit: 1 bit
•Flow control: None
About PJLink
PJLink was established by the JBMIA (Japan Business Machine and
Information System Industries Association) as a standard protocol for
controlling network-compatible projector's as part of their efforts to
standardize projector control protocols.
The projector complies with the PJLink Class2 standard established by the
JBMIA.
The port number used by the PJLink search function is 4352 (UDP).
You need to make network settings before you can use PJLink. See the
following for more information on network settings.
s "Network Menu" p.151
It complies with all commands except for the following commands defined
by PJLink Class2, and agreement was confirmed by the PJLink standard
adaptability verification.
URL: http://pjlink.jbmia.or.jp/english/
•Non-compatible commands
Function PJLink Command
Mute settings Image muting set AVMT 11
Audio muting set AVMT 21
•Input ports and corresponding input source number
Input Port Name Input Source Number
Computer 11
BNC 13
DVI-D 31
HDMI 32
Monitoring and Controlling
227
Input Port Name Input Source Number
USB 41
LAN 52
HDBaseT 56
•Manufacturer name displayed for "Manufacture name information query"
EPSON
•Model name displayed for "Product name information query"
EPSON L1075U/L1070U
EPSON L1065U/L1060U
EPSON L1050U
EPSON L1070W
EPSON L1060W
EPSON L1070
About Crestron Connected
®
Crestron Connected
®
is an integrated control system provided by
Crestron
®
. It can be used to monitor and control multiple devices
connected on a network.
The projector supports the control protocol, and can therefore be used in a
system built with Crestron Connected
®
.
Visit the Crestron
®
Web site for details on Crestron Connected
®
. (Only
English-language displays are supported.)
https://www.crestron.com/products/line/crestron-connected
The following provides an overview of Crestron Connected
®
.
•Remote operation using a Web browser
You can operate a projector from your computer just like using a remote
control.
•Monitoring and control with application software
You can use Crestron RoomView
®
Express/Crestron Fusion
®
provided
by Crestron
®
to monitor devices in the system, to communicate with the
help desk, and to send emergency messages.
This manual describes how to perform operations on your computer using
a Web browser.
a
•You can only enter single-byte alphanumeric characters and symbols.
•The Message Broadcasting feature for Epson Projector Management
is unavailable while using Crestron Connected
®
.
•If you set Standby Mode to Communication On, you can control
the projector even if it is in standby mode (when the power is
off).
s Extended - Standby Mode p.146
Operating a projector from your computer
Displaying the operation window
Check the following before carrying out any operations.
•Make sure the computer and projector are connected to the network.
•Set Crestron Connected to On from the Network menu.
s Network - Others - Crestron Connected p.159
a
Start the Web browser on the computer.
Monitoring and Controlling
228
b
Enter the IP address of the projector in the address field of the
Web browser, and press the Enter key on the keyboard.
The Epson Web Control home screen is displayed.
c
Press Crestron Connected.
The operation window is displayed.
Using the operation window
AYou can perform the following operations when you click the buttons.
Button Function
Power Turns the projector power on or off.
Vol-/Vol+ Adjusts the volume.
Button Function
A/V Mute Turns the video and audio on or off.
s "Hiding the Image and Sound Temporarily (A/V
Mute)" p.102
BSwitch to the image from the selected input source. To display input sources that
are not shown in Source List, click (a) or (b) to scroll up or down. The current
video signal input source is displayed in blue.
You can change the source name if necessary.
CYou can perform the following operations when you click the buttons. To display
buttons that are not shown in Source List, click (c) or (d) to scroll left or right.
Button Function
Freeze Images are paused or unpaused.
s "Freezing the Image (Freeze)" p.103
Contrast Adjusts the difference between light and shade in the
images.
Brightness Adjusts the image brightness.
Color Adjusts the color saturation for the images.
Sharpness Adjusts the image sharpness.
Zoom Click the [z] button to enlarge the image without
changing the projection size. Click the [x] button to
reduce the image that was enlarged with the [z] button.
Click the [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] buttons to change the
position of an enlarged image.
s "Enlarging Part of the Image (E-Zoom)" p.104
DThe [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] buttons perform the same operations as the [ ] [ ]
[] [ ] buttons on the remote control. You can perform the following
operations when you click the other buttons.
Monitoring and Controlling
229
Button Function
OK Performs the same operation as the [ ] button on the
remote control.
s "Remote Control" p.20
Menu Displays and closes the Configuration menu.
Auto If clicked while projecting analog RGB signals from the
Computer port, you can automatically optimize
Tracking, Sync., and Position.
Search Changes to the next input source that is sending an
image.
s "Automatically Detecting Input Signals and
Changing the Projected Image (Source Search)" p.61
Esc Performs the same operation as the [Esc] button on the
remote control.
s "Remote Control" p.20
EYou can perform the following operations when you click the tabs.
Tab Function
Help Displays the Help Desk window. Used to send messages
to, and receive messages from, the administrator using
Crestron Connected
®
.
Info Displays information on the projector that is currently
connected.
Tools Changes settings in the projector that is currently
connected. See the next section.
Using the tools window
The following window is displayed when you click the Tools tab on the
operation window. You can use this window to change settings in the
projector that is currently connected.
ACrestron Control
Make settings for Crestron
®
central controllers.
BProjector
The following items can be set.
Item Function
Projector Name Enter a name to differentiate the projector that is
currently connected from other projectors on the
network. (The name can contain up to 15 single-byte
alphanumeric characters.)
Location Enter an installation location name for the projector
that is currently connected on the network. (The name
can contain up to 32 single-byte alphanumeric
characters and symbols.)
Assigned To Enter a user name for the projector. (The name can
contain up to 32 single-byte alphanumeric characters
and symbols.)
Monitoring and Controlling
230
Item Function
DHCP Select the Enabled check box to use DHCP. You cannot
enter an IP address if DHCP is enabled.
IP Address Enter the IP address to assign to the currently connected
projector.
Subnet Mask Enter a subnet mask for the currently connected
projector.
Default Gateway Enter the gateway address for the currently connected
projector.
Send Click this button to confirm the changes made to the
Projector.
CAdmin Password
Select the Enabled check box to require a password to open the Tools window.
The following items can be set.
Item Function
New Password Enter the new password when changing the password to
open the Tools window. (The name can contain up to 26
single-byte alphanumeric characters.)
Confirm Enter the same password as you entered in New
Password. If the passwords are not the same, an error is
displayed.
Send Click this button to confirm the changes made to the
Admin Password.
DUser Password
Select the Enabled check box to require a password to open the operation window
on the computer.
The following items can be set.
Item Function
New Password Enter the new password when changing the password to
open the operation window. (The name can contain up
to 26 single-byte alphanumeric characters.)
Confirm Enter the same password as you entered in New
Password. If the passwords are not the same, an error is
displayed.
Send Click this button to confirm the changes made to the
User Password.
Monitoring and Controlling
231
About Web API
You can use Web API to operate the projector when Content Playback mode is enabled.
You can enable Web API from a Web browser.
a
You can apply API authentication (Digest authentication) to Web API communications.
The user name for API authentication is EPSONWEB; the password is the Web Control Password.
a
Open the Epson Web Control home screen in your Web browser.
b
Press Developer's Menu.
c
Set Enable API to On.
s "Changing Settings Using a Web Browser (Epson Web Control)" p.215
The following Web API commands are supported by the projector.
URL Supported methods Explanation
http://<ip address>/api/v01/contentmgr/remote/power/on GET/POST/PUT Turns on the projector.
It takes a while for the Web API to respond.
http://<ip address>/api/v01/contentmgr/remote/power/off GET/POST/PUT Turns off the projector.
http://<ip address>/api/v01/contentmgr/playlist/play/:id GET/POST/PUT Plays the playlist with the specified ID.
Enter the playlist ID in :id. You can check the playlist ID from
the Developer's Menu on the home screen.
http://<ip address>/api/v01/contentmgr/playlist/stop GET/POST/PUT Stops the playlist.
Enter the projector’s IP address in <ip address>.
For example, the following URL commands the projector with the IP address 192.168.0.2 to play the playlist with the ID 3.
http://192.168.0.2/api/v01/contentmgr/playlist/play/3
If secure HTTP is enabled, change the http in the URL to https.
Monitoring and Controlling
232
The following optional accessories and consumables are available. Please
purchase these products as and when needed. The following list of optional
accessories and consumables is current as of: June 2019. Details of
accessories are subject to change without notice and availability may vary
depending on the country of purchase.
Optional Accessories
Lens unit
ELPLX01, ELPLX01W, ELPLU03, ELPLU04, ELPLW05, ELPLW06,
ELPLW08, ELPLM08, ELPLM10, ELPLM11, ELPLM15, ELPLL08
See the following for more information on the projection distance for each
lens.
s "Screen Size and Projection Distance" p.234
Computer cable ELPKC02
(1.8 m - for mini D-Sub15-pin/mini D-Sub 15pin)
Computer cable ELPKC09
(3 m - for mini D-Sub15-pin/mini D-Sub 15pin)
Computer cable ELPKC10
(20 m - for mini D-Sub15-pin/mini D-Sub 15pin)
Remote control cable set ELPKC28
(10 m 2 piece set)
Use this to guarantee operation from the remote control from a distance.
HDBaseT Transmitter ELPHD01
This transmitter performs long distance transmissions for HDMI signals and
control signals for one LAN cable. Based on the HDBaseT standard. (HDCP 2.2
is not supported.)
Wireless LAN unit ELPAP10
Use when connecting the projector to a computer wirelessly and projecting.
(Frequency band: 2.4 GHz)
Polarizer ELPPL01
Use this when stacking two projectors and projecting 3D images.
Passive 3D Glasses (standard five piece set) ELPGS02A
Passive 3D Glasses (five piece set for children) ELPGS02B
Passive polarized 3D glasses. Use these when viewing 3D images with two
projectors.
Document Camera ELPDC13, ELPDC21
Use when projecting images such as books, OHP documents, or slides.
Pipe 450 (450 mm)
*
ELPFP13
Pipe 700 (700 mm)
*
ELPFP14
Use when installing the projector on a high ceiling.
Ceiling mount
*
ELPMB22
Low ceiling mount
*
ELPMB47
High ceiling mount
*
ELPMB48
Use when installing the projector on a ceiling. Do not use for any other
purpose.
* Special techniques are required to suspend the projector from a ceiling. Contact
your local dealer or the nearest address provided in the Epson Projector Contact
List.
s Epson Projector Contact List
Consumables
Air filters ELPAF46
Use as a replacement for used air filters.
Optional Accessories and Consumables
233
Projection Distances for EB-L1075U/EB-L1070U/EB-
L1065U/EB-L1060U/EB-L1050U/EB-L1070W/EB-
L1060W
AProjection distance
Bis the distance from the center of the lens to the base of the screen. This
changes depending on the setting for vertical lens shift.
CCenter of lens
a
If the screen is larger than 300 inches, fine text and images may not be
displayed clearly.
ELPLM08
This section shows the projection distances for models equipped with
standard lenses.
Unit: cm
4:3 Screen Size
AB
Minimum (Wide) to
Maximum (Tele)
Vertical lens shift
Bottom to Top
45" 100x75 156 to 253 -81 to +12
50" 102x76 174 to 281 -90 to +13
60" 122x91 210 to 338 -108 to +16
80" 163x122 281 to 453 -143 to +22
100" 203x152 353 to 567 -179 to +27
120" 244x183 424 to 681 -215 to +32
150" 305x229 532 to 853 -269 to +40
200" 406x305 711 to 1139 -359 to +54
250" 508x381 890 to 1424 -448 to +67
300" 610x457 1069 to 1710 -538 to +81
500" 1016x762 1785 to 2853 -896 to +134
800" 1626x1219 2858 to 4568 -1434 to +215
1000" 2032x1524 3574 to 5711 -1793 to +269
Unit: cm
16:9 Screen Size
AB
Minimum (Wide) to
Maximum (Tele)
Vertical lens shift
Bottom to Top
49" 108x61 154 to 250 -76 to +15
50" 111x62 157 to 255 -78 to +16
60" 133x75 190 to 307 -94 to +19
Screen Size and Projection Distance
234
16:9 Screen Size
AB
Minimum (Wide) to
Maximum (Tele)
Vertical lens shift
Bottom to Top
80" 177x100 255 to 411 -125 to +25
100" 221x125 320 to 514 -156 to +31
120" 266x149 385 to 618 -187 to +38
150" 332x187 482 to 774 -234 to +47
200" 443x249 645 to 1033 -312 to +63
250" 553x311 807 to 1293 -390 to +78
300" 664x374 970 to 1552 -468 to +94
500" 1107x623 1620 to 2590 -779 to +157
800" 1771x996 2595 to 4147 -1247 to +251
1000" 2214x1245 3244 to 5185 -1559 to +313
Unit: cm
16:10 Screen Size
AB
Minimum (Wide) to
Maximum (Tele)
Vertical lens shift
Bottom to Top
50" 108x67 153 to 248 -79 to +12
60" 130x81 185 to 298 -95 to +14
80" 172x108 248 to 399 -127 to +19
100" 215x135 311 to 500 -158 to +24
120" 258x162 374 to 601 -190 to +29
150" 323x202 469 to 753 -238 to +36
200" 431x269 627 to 1005 -317 to +48
250" 538x337 785 to 1258 -396 to +59
300" 646x404 943 to 1510 -475 to +71
500" 1077x673 1576 to 2520 -792 to +119
16:10 Screen Size
AB
Minimum (Wide) to
Maximum (Tele)
Vertical lens shift
Bottom to Top
800" 1723x1077 2524 to 4035 -1267 to +190
1000" 2154x1346 3157 to 5044 -1584 to +238
ELPLX01/ELPLX01W
Zoom is not supported.
Unit: cm
4:3 Screen Size A
B
Vertical lens shift
Bottom to Top
89" 181x136 74 0 to +24
100" 203x152 84 0 to +27
120" 244x183 102 0 to +32
150" 305x229 129 0 to +40
200" 406x305 173 0 to +54
250" 508x381 218 0 to +67
300" 610x457 262 0 to +81
350" 711x533 307 0 to +94
500" 1016x762 440 0 to +134
800" 1626x1219 708 0 to +205
Unit: cm
16:9 Screen Size A
B
Vertical lens shift
Bottom to Top
98" 217x122 74 +7 to +31
Screen Size and Projection Distance
235
16:9 Screen Size A
B
Vertical lens shift
Bottom to Top
100" 221x125 76 +7 to +31
120" 266x149 92 +8 to +38
150" 332x187 116 +10 to +47
200" 443x249 157 +14 to +63
250" 553x311 197 +17 to +78
300" 664x374 238 +21 to +94
350" 775x436 278 +24 to +110
500" 1107x623 399 +35 to +157
800" 1771x996 642 +55 to +251
Unit: cm
16:10 Screen Size A
B
Vertical lens shift
Bottom to Top
100" 215x135 74 0 to +24
120" 258x162 89 0 to +29
150" 323x202 113 0 to +36
200" 431x269 152 0 to +48
250" 538x337 192 0 to +59
300" 646x404 231 0 to +71
350" 754x471 270 0 to +83
400" 862x538 310 0 to +95
500" 1077x673 388 0 to +119
800" 1723x1077 625 0 to +190
1000" 2154x1346 782 0 to +238
ELPLU03
Unit: cm
4:3 Screen Size
AB
Minimum (Wide) to
Maximum (Tele)
Vertical lens shift
Bottom to Top
71" 144x108 112 to 135 -127 to +19
80" 163x122 126 to 152 -143 to +22
100" 203x152 159 to 191 -179 to +27
120" 244x183 191 to 230 -215 to +32
150" 305x229 240 to 289 -269 to +40
200" 406x305 321 to 386 -359 to +54
250" 508x381 403 to 483 -448 to +67
300" 610x457 484 to 581 -538 to +81
500" 1016x762 809 to 971 -896 to +134
800" 1626x1219 1297 to 1555 -1434 to +215
Unit: cm
16:9 Screen Size
AB
Minimum (Wide) to
Maximum (Tele)
Vertical lens shift
Bottom to Top
78" 173x97 111 to 134 -122 to +24
80" 177x100 114 to 138 -125 to +25
100" 221x125 144 to 173 -156 to +31
120" 266x149 173 to 209 -187 to +38
150" 332x187 218 to 262 -234 to +47
200" 443x249 291 to 350 -312 to +63
250" 553x311 365 to 439 -390 to +78
300" 664x374 439 to 527 -468 to +94
Screen Size and Projection Distance
236
16:9 Screen Size
AB
Minimum (Wide) to
Maximum (Tele)
Vertical lens shift
Bottom to Top
500" 1107x623 734 to 881 -779 to +157
800" 1771x996 1177 to 1412 -1247 to +251
Unit: cm
16:10 Screen Size
AB
Minimum (Wide) to
Maximum (Tele)
Vertical lens shift
Bottom to Top
80" 172x108 111 to 134 -127 to +19
100" 215x135 140 to 168 -158 to +24
120" 258x162 169 to 203 -190 to +29
150" 323x202 212 to 255 -238 to +36
200" 431x269 283 to 341 -317 to +48
250" 538x337 355 to 427 -396 to +59
300" 646x404 427 to 513 -475 to +71
500" 1077x673 714 to 857 -792 to +119
800" 1723x1077 1145 to 1373 -1267 to +190
1000" 2154x1346 1432 to 1717 -1584 to +238
ELPLU04/ELPLU02
Unit: cm
4:3 Screen Size
AB
Minimum (Wide) to
Maximum (Tele)
Vertical lens shift
Bottom to Top
45" 100x75 93 to 113 -81 to +12
50" 102x76 104 to 126 -90 to +13
4:3 Screen Size
AB
Minimum (Wide) to
Maximum (Tele)
Vertical lens shift
Bottom to Top
60" 122x91 126 to 153 -108 to +16
80" 163x122 170 to 205 -143 to +22
100" 203x152 214 to 258 -179 to +27
120" 244x183 258 to 311 -215 to +32
150" 305x229 324 to 390 -269 to +40
200" 406x305 434 to 522 -359 to +54
250" 508x381 543 to 654 -448 to +67
300" 610x457 653 to 786 -538 to +81
500" 1016x762 1092 to 1313 -896 to +134
800" 1626x1219 1751 to 2105 -1434 to +215
Unit: cm
16:9 Screen Size
AB
Minimum (Wide) to
Maximum (Tele)
Vertical lens shift
Bottom to Top
49" 108x61 92 to 112 -76 to +15
50" 111x62 94 to 114 -78 to +16
60" 133x75 114 to 138 -94 to +19
80" 177x100 154 to 186 -125 to +25
100" 221x125 194 to 234 -156 to +31
120" 266x149 234 to 282 -187 to +38
150" 332x187 293 to 354 -234 to +47
200" 443x249 393 to 473 -312 to +63
250" 553x311 493 to 593 -390 to +78
300" 664x374 592 to 713 -468 to +94
Screen Size and Projection Distance
237
16:9 Screen Size
AB
Minimum (Wide) to
Maximum (Tele)
Vertical lens shift
Bottom to Top
500" 1107x623 991 to 1192 -779 to +157
800" 1771x996 1589 to 1910 -1247 to +251
Unit: cm
16:10 Screen Size
AB
Minimum (Wide) to
Maximum (Tele)
Vertical lens shift
Bottom to Top
50" 108x67 91 to 111 -79 to +12
60" 130x81 111 to 134 -95 to +14
80" 172x108 149 to 181 -127 to +19
100" 215x135 188 to 227 -158 to +24
120" 258x162 227 to 274 -190 to +29
150" 323x202 285 to 344 -238 to +36
200" 431x269 382 to 460 -317 to +48
250" 538x337 479 to 577 -396 to +59
300" 646x404 576 to 693 -475 to +71
500" 1077x673 964 to 1159 -792 to +119
800" 1723x1077 1546 to 1858 -1267 to +190
1000" 2154x1346 1934 to 2324 -1584 to +238
ELPLW05
Unit: cm
4:3 Screen Size
AB
Minimum (Wide) to
Maximum (Tele)
Vertical lens shift
Bottom to Top
45" 100x75 111 to 158 -81 to +12
50" 102x76 124 to 176 -90 to +13
60" 122x91 150 to 212 -108 to +16
80" 163x122 203 to 285 -143 to +22
100" 203x152 255 to 357 -179 to +27
120" 244x183 308 to 430 -215 to +32
150" 305x229 387 to 539 -269 to +40
200" 406x305 519 to 720 -359 to +54
250" 508x381 650 to 902 -448 to +67
300" 610x457 782 to 1083 -538 to +81
500" 1016x762 1308 to 1809 -896 to +134
800" 1626x1219 2097 to 2898 -1434 to +215
Unit: cm
16:9 Screen Size
AB
Minimum (Wide) to
Maximum (Tele)
Vertical lens shift
Bottom to Top
49" 108x61 109 to 156 -76 to +15
50" 111x62 112 to 159 -78 to +16
60" 133x75 136 to 192 -94 to +19
80" 177x100 183 to 258 -125 to +25
100" 221x125 231 to 324 -156 to +31
120" 266x149 279 to 390 -187 to +38
Screen Size and Projection Distance
238
16:9 Screen Size
AB
Minimum (Wide) to
Maximum (Tele)
Vertical lens shift
Bottom to Top
150" 332x187 351 to 489 -234 to +47
200" 443x249 470 to 653 -312 to +63
250" 553x311 590 to 818 -390 to +78
300" 664x374 709 to 983 -468 to +94
500" 1107x623 1187 to 1642 -779 to +157
800" 1771x996 1903 to 2631 -1247 to +251
Unit: cm
16:10 Screen Size
AB
Minimum (Wide) to
Maximum (Tele)
Vertical lens shift
Bottom to Top
50" 108x67 109 to 155 -79 to +12
60" 130x81 132 to 187 -95 to +14
80" 172x108 178 to 251 -127 to +19
100" 215x135 225 to 315 -158 to +24
120" 258x162 271 to 379 -190 to +29
150" 323x202 341 to 475 -238 to +36
200" 431x269 457 to 636 -317 to +48
250" 538x337 573 to 796 -396 to +59
300" 646x404 690 to 956 -475 to +71
500" 1077x673 1154 to 1597 -792 to +119
800" 1723x1077 1852 to 2559 -1267 to +190
1000" 2154x1346 2317 to 3201 -1584 to +238
ELPLW06/ELPLW04
Unit: cm
4:3 Screen Size
AB
Minimum (Wide) to
Maximum (Tele)
Vertical lens shift
Bottom to Top
45" 97x61 175 to 240 -81 to +12
50" 102x76 195 to 267 -90 to +13
60" 122x91 236 to 322 -108 to +16
80" 163x122 317 to 432 -143 to +22
100" 203x152 398 to 543 -179 to +27
120" 244x183 479 to 653 -215 to +32
150" 305x229 600 to 818 -269 to +40
200" 406x305 803 to 1094 -359 to +54
250" 508x381 1005 to 1369 -448 to +67
300" 610x457 1207 to 1645 -538 to +81
500" 1016x762 2017 to 2747 -896 to +134
800" 1626x1219 3232 to 4400 -1434 to +215
Unit: cm
16:9 Screen Size
AB
Minimum (Wide) to
Maximum (Tele)
Vertical lens shift
Bottom to Top
49" 108x61 173 to 237 -76 to +15
50" 111x62 176 to 242 -78 to +16
60" 133x75 213 to 292 -94 to +19
80" 177x100 287 to 392 -125 to +25
100" 221x125 360 to 492 -156 to +31
120" 266x149 434 to 592 -187 to +38
Screen Size and Projection Distance
239
16:9 Screen Size
AB
Minimum (Wide) to
Maximum (Tele)
Vertical lens shift
Bottom to Top
150" 332x187 544 to 742 -234 to +47
200" 443x249 728 to 992 -312 to +63
250" 553x311 912 to 1242 -390 to +78
300" 664x374 1096 to 1492 -468 to +94
500" 1107x623 1831 to 2493 -779 to +157
800" 1771x996 2934 to 3994 -1247 to +251
Unit: cm
16:10 Screen Size
AB
Minimum (Wide) to
Maximum (Tele)
Vertical lens shift
Bottom to Top
50" 108x67 172 to 235 -79 to +12
60" 130x81 207 to 284 -95 to +14
80" 172x108 279 to 381 -127 to +19
100" 215x135 350 to 478 -158 to +24
120" 258x162 422 to 576 -190 to +29
150" 323x202 529 to 722 -238 to +36
200" 431x269 708 to 965 -317 to +48
250" 538x337 887 to 1208 -396 to +59
300" 646x404 1066 to 1452 -475 to +71
500" 1077x673 1781 to 2425 -792 to +119
800" 1723x1077 2854 to 3885 -1267 to +190
1000" 2154x1346 3569 to 4859 -1584 to +238
ELPLW08
Unit: cm
4:3 Screen Size
AB
Minimum (Wide) to
Maximum (Tele)
Vertical lens shift
Bottom to Top
45" 100x75 127 to 179 -81 to +12
60" 122x91 171 to 240 -108 to +16
80" 163x122 229 to 322 -143 to +22
100" 203x152 288 to 404 -179 to +27
120" 244x183 346 to 486 -215 to +32
150" 305x229 434 to 609 -269 to +40
200" 406x305 580 to 813 -359 to +54
250" 508x381 726 to 1018 -448 to +67
300" 610x457 872 to 1223 -538 to +81
500" 1016x762 1457 to 2042 -896 to +134
800" 1626x1219 2334 to 3270 -1434 to +215
Unit: cm
16:9 Screen Size
AB
Minimum (Wide) to
Maximum (Tele)
Vertical lens shift
Bottom to Top
49" 108x61 125 to 177 -76 to +15
60" 133x75 154 to 218 -94 to +19
80" 177x100 208 to 292 -125 to +25
100" 221x125 261 to 366 -156 to +31
120" 266x149 314 to 441 -187 to +38
150" 332x187 393 to 552 -234 to +47
200" 443x249 526 to 738 -312 to +63
Screen Size and Projection Distance
240
16:9 Screen Size
AB
Minimum (Wide) to
Maximum (Tele)
Vertical lens shift
Bottom to Top
250" 553x311 659 to 924 -390 to +78
300" 664x374 792 to 1110 -468 to +94
500" 1107x623 1323 to 1853 -779 to +157
800" 1771x996 2119 to 2969 -1247 to +251
Unit: cm
16:10 Screen Size
AB
Minimum (Wide) to
Maximum (Tele)
Vertical lens shift
Bottom to Top
50" 108x67 124 to 175 -79 to +12
60" 130x81 150 to 212 -95 to +14
80" 172x108 202 to 284 -127 to +19
100" 215x135 253 to 356 -158 to +24
120" 258x162 305 to 429 -190 to +29
150" 323x202 383 to 537 -238 to +36
200" 431x269 512 to 718 -317 to +48
250" 538x337 641 to 899 -396 to +59
300" 646x404 770 to 1080 -475 to +71
500" 1077x673 1287 to 1803 -792 to +119
800" 1723x1077 2061 to 2888 -1267 to +190
1000" 2154x1346 2578 to 3611 -1584 to +238
ELPLM15/ELPLM09/ELPLS04
Unit: cm
4:3 Screen Size
AB
Minimum (Wide) to
Maximum (Tele)
Vertical lens shift
Bottom to Top
45" 100x75 233 to 379 -81 to +12
50" 102x76 260 to 422 -90 to +13
60" 122x91 313 to 508 -108 to +16
80" 163x122 420 to 679 -143 to +22
100" 203x152 527 to 851 -179 to +27
120" 244x183 635 to 1023 -215 to +32
150" 305x229 795 to 1281 -269 to +40
200" 406x305 1063 to 1711 -359 to +54
250" 508x381 1331 to 2140 -448 to +67
300" 610x457 1598 to 2570 -538 to +81
500" 1016x762 2669 to 4288 -896 to +134
800" 1626x1219 4276 to 6866 -1434 to +215
Unit: cm
16:9 Screen Size
AB
Minimum (Wide) to
Maximum (Tele)
Vertical lens shift
Bottom to Top
49" 108x61 230 to 374 -76 to +15
50" 111x62 235 to 382 -78 to +16
60" 133x75 284 to 460 -94 to +19
80" 177x100 381 to 616 -125 to +25
100" 221x125 478 to 772 -156 to +31
120" 266x149 575 to 928 -187 to +38
Screen Size and Projection Distance
241
16:9 Screen Size
AB
Minimum (Wide) to
Maximum (Tele)
Vertical lens shift
Bottom to Top
150" 332x187 721 to 1162 -234 to +47
200" 443x249 964 to 1552 -312 to +63
250" 553x311 1207 to 1942 -390 to +78
300" 664x374 1450 to 2332 -468 to +94
500" 1107x623 2423 to 3893 -779 to +157
800" 1771x996 3881 to 6233 -1247 to +251
Unit: cm
16:10 Screen Size
AB
Minimum (Wide) to
Maximum (Tele)
Vertical lens shift
Bottom to Top
50" 108x67 229 to 372 -79 to +12
60" 130x81 276 to 447 -95 to +14
80" 172x108 370 to 599 -127 to +19
100" 215x135 465 to 751 -158 to +24
120" 258x162 560 to 903 -190 to +29
150" 323x202 702 to 1131 -238 to +36
200" 431x269 938 to 1510 -317 to +48
250" 538x337 1175 to 1890 -396 to +59
300" 646x404 1411 to 2269 -475 to +71
500" 1077x673 2357 to 3787 -792 to +119
800" 1723x1077 3776 to 6064 -1267 to +190
1000" 2154x1346 4722 to 7582 -1584 to +238
ELPLM10/ELPLM06
Unit: cm
4:3 Screen Size
AB
Minimum (Wide) to
Maximum (Tele)
Vertical lens shift
Bottom to Top
45" 100x75 359 to 549 -81 to +12
50" 102x76 400 to 611 -90 to +13
60" 122x91 483 to 736 -108 to +16
80" 163x122 648 to 986 -143 to +22
100" 203x152 813 to 1236 -179 to +27
120" 244x183 979 to 1485 -215 to +32
150" 305x229 1227 to 1860 -269 to +40
200" 406x305 1640 to 2484 -359 to +54
250" 508x381 2053 to 3109 -448 to +67
300" 610x457 2466 to 3733 -538 to +81
500" 1016x762 4119 to 6230 -896 to +134
800" 1626x1219 6598 to 9976 -1434 to +215
Unit: cm
16:9 Screen Size
AB
Minimum (Wide) to
Maximum (Tele)
Vertical lens shift
Bottom to Top
49" 108x61 355 to 542 -76 to +15
50" 111x62 362 to 554 -78 to +16
60" 133x75 437 to 667 -94 to +19
80" 177x100 587 to 894 -125 to +25
100" 221x125 737 to 1121 -156 to +31
120" 266x149 887 to 1347 -187 to +38
Screen Size and Projection Distance
242
16:9 Screen Size
AB
Minimum (Wide) to
Maximum (Tele)
Vertical lens shift
Bottom to Top
150" 332x187 1112 to 1687 -234 to +47
200" 443x249 1488 to 2254 -312 to +63
250" 553x311 1863 to 2821 -390 to +78
300" 664x374 2238 to 3388 -468 to +94
500" 1107x623 3738 to 5655 -779 to +157
800" 1771x996 5989 to 9056 -1247 to +251
Unit: cm
16:10 Screen Size
AB
Minimum (Wide) to
Maximum (Tele)
Vertical lens shift
Bottom to Top
50" 108x67 352 to 538 -79 to +12
60" 130x81 425 to 649 -95 to +14
80" 172x108 571 to 869 -127 to +19
100" 215x135 717 to 1090 -158 to +24
120" 258x162 863 to 1311 -190 to +29
150" 323x202 1082 to 1641 -238 to +36
200" 431x269 1447 to 2193 -317 to +48
250" 538x337 1812 to 2744 -396 to +59
300" 646x404 2177 to 3296 -475 to +71
500" 1077x673 3637 to 5502 -792 to +119
800" 1723x1077 5827 to 8811 -1267 to +190
1000" 2154x1346 7287 to 11017 -1584 to +238
ELPLM11/ELPLM07
Unit: cm
4:3 Screen Size
AB
Minimum (Wide) to
Maximum (Tele)
Vertical lens shift
Bottom to Top
45" 100x75 521 to 799 -81 to +12
50" 102x76 582 to 890 -90 to +13
60" 122x91 703 to 1073 -108 to +16
80" 163x122 945 to 1438 -143 to +22
100" 203x152 1188 to 1804 -179 to +27
120" 244x183 1430 to 2169 -215 to +32
150" 305x229 1793 to 2717 -269 to +40
200" 406x305 2399 to 3631 -359 to +54
250" 508x381 3005 to 4544 -448 to +67
300" 610x457 3610 to 5458 -538 to +81
500" 1016x762 6033 to 9112 -896 to +134
800" 1626x1219 9667 to 14594 -1434 to +215
Unit: cm
16:9 Screen Size
AB
Minimum (Wide) to
Maximum (Tele)
Vertical lens shift
Bottom to Top
49" 108x61 515 to 789 -76 to +15
50" 111x62 526 to 806 -78 to +16
60" 133x75 636 to 972 -94 to +19
80" 177x100 856 to 1304 -125 to +25
100" 221x125 1076 to 1635 -156 to +31
120" 266x149 1296 to 1967 -187 to +38
Screen Size and Projection Distance
243
16:9 Screen Size
AB
Minimum (Wide) to
Maximum (Tele)
Vertical lens shift
Bottom to Top
150" 332x187 1626 to 2465 -234 to +47
200" 443x249 2176 to 3294 -312 to +63
250" 553x311 2726 to 4124 -390 to +78
300" 664x374 3276 to 4953 -468 to +94
500" 1107x623 5475 to 8271 -779 to +157
800" 1771x996 8774 to 13248 -1247 to +251
Unit: cm
16:10 Screen Size
AB
Minimum (Wide) to
Maximum (Tele)
Vertical lens shift
Bottom to Top
50" 108x67 511 to 784 -79 to +12
60" 130x81 618 to 945 -95 to +14
80" 172x108 832 to 1268 -127 to +19
100" 215x135 1046 to 1591 -158 to +24
120" 258x162 1260 to 1913 -190 to +29
150" 323x202 1581 to 2398 -238 to +36
200" 431x269 2116 to 3205 -317 to +48
250" 538x337 2651 to 4012 -396 to +59
300" 646x404 3186 to 4819 -475 to +71
500" 1077x673 5326 to 8047 -792 to +119
800" 1723x1077 8536 to 12889 -1267 to +190
1000" 2154x1346 10676 to 16117 -1584 to +238
ELPLL08/ELPLL07
Unit: cm
4:3 Screen Size
AB
Minimum (Wide) to
Maximum (Tele)
Vertical lens shift
Bottom to Top
45" 100x75 776 to 1095 -81 to +12
50" 102x76 866 to 1220 -90 to +13
60" 122x91 1046 to 1470 -108 to +16
80" 163x122 1405 to 1971 -143 to +22
100" 203x152 1764 to 2472 -179 to +27
120" 244x183 2124 to 2972 -215 to +32
150" 305x229 2662 to 3724 -269 to +40
200" 406x305 3561 to 4975 -359 to +54
250" 508x381 4459 to 6227 -448 to +67
300" 610x457 5357 to 7479 -538 to +81
500" 1016x762 8949 to 12485 -896 to +134
800" 1626x1219 14338 to 19996 -1434 to +215
Unit: cm
16:9 Screen Size
AB
Minimum (Wide) to
Maximum (Tele)
Vertical lens shift
Bottom to Top
49" 108x61 767 to 1082 -76 to +15
50" 111x62 784 to 1105 -78 to +16
60" 133x75 947 to 1332 -94 to +19
80" 177x100 1273 to 1787 -125 to +25
100" 221x125 1599 to 2241 -156 to +31
120" 266x149 1925 to 2696 -187 to +38
Screen Size and Projection Distance
244
16:9 Screen Size
AB
Minimum (Wide) to
Maximum (Tele)
Vertical lens shift
Bottom to Top
150" 332x187 2414 to 3378 -234 to +47
200" 443x249 3230 to 4514 -312 to +63
250" 553x311 4045 to 5650 -390 to +78
300" 664x374 4860 to 6787 -468 to +94
500" 1107x623 8122 to 11333 -779 to +157
800" 1771x996 13014 to 18151 -1247 to +251
Unit: cm
16:10 Screen Size
AB
Minimum (Wide) to
Maximum (Tele)
Vertical lens shift
Bottom to Top
50" 108x67 761 to 1074 -79 to +12
60" 130x81 920 to 1295 -95 to +14
80" 172x108 1237 to 1737 -127 to +19
100" 215x135 1555 to 2180 -158 to +24
120" 258x162 1872 to 2622 -190 to +29
150" 323x202 2348 to 3285 -238 to +36
200" 431x269 3141 to 4391 -317 to +48
250" 538x337 3935 to 5497 -396 to +59
300" 646x404 4728 to 6602 -475 to +71
500" 1077x673 7901 to 11025 -792 to +119
800" 1723x1077 12661 to 17659 -1267 to +190
1000" 2154x1346 15834 to 22082 -1584 to +238
ELPLR04
Zoom and lens shift are not supported.
Unit: cm
4:3 Screen Size AB
45" 91x69 102 -34
50" 102x76 114 -38
60" 122x91 138 -46
80" 163x122 186 -61
100" 203x152 234 -76
120" 244x183 282 -91
150" 305x229 354 -114
200" 406x305 473 -152
250" 508x381 593 -191
300" 610x457 713 -229
500" 1016x762 1193 -381
800" 1626x1219 1912 -610
Unit: cm
16:9 Screen Size AB
49" 108x61 101 -30
50" 111x62 103 -31
60" 133x75 124 -37
80" 177x100 168 -50
100" 221x125 212 -62
120" 266x149 255 -75
150" 332x187 320 -93
200" 443x249 429 -125
Screen Size and Projection Distance
245
16:9 Screen Size AB
250" 553x311 538 -156
300" 664x374 647 -187
500" 1107x623 1082 -311
800" 1771x996 1735 -498
Unit: cm
16:10 Screen Size AB
50" 108x67 100 -34
60" 130x81 121 -40
80" 172x108 163 -54
100" 215x135 206 -67
120" 258x162 248 -81
150" 323x202 312 -101
200" 431x269 417 -135
250" 538x337 523 -168
300" 646x404 629 -202
500" 1077x673 1053 -337
800" 1723x1077 1688 -538
1000" 2154x1346 2112 -673
Screen Size and Projection Distance
246
Projection Distances for EB-L1070
AProjection distance
Bis the distance from the center of the lens to the base of the screen. This
changes depending on the setting for vertical lens shift.
CCenter of lens
a
If the screen is larger than 300 inches, fine text and images may not be
displayed clearly.
ELPLM08
This section shows the projection distances for models equipped with
standard lenses.
Unit: cm
4:3 Screen Size
AB
Minimum (Wide) to
Maximum (Tele)
Vertical lens shift
Bottom to Top
50" 102x76 147 to 239 -82 to +6
60" 122x91 178 to 288 -98 to +7
80" 163x122 239 to 385 -131 to +9
100" 203x152 299 to 482 -164 to +12
120" 244x183 360 to 580 -197 to +14
150" 305x229 452 to 726 -246 to +17
200" 406x305 604 to 969 -328 to +23
250" 508x381 756 to 1213 -410 to +29
300" 610x457 908 to 1456 -492 to +35
500" 1016x762 1517 to 2430 -820 to +58
800" 1626x1219 2431 to 3891 -1312 to +93
1000" 2032x1524 3040 to 4865 -1640 to +116
Unit: cm
16:9 Screen Size
AB
Minimum (Wide) to
Maximum (Tele)
Vertical lens shift
Bottom to Top
46" 102x57 148 to 240 -73 to +15
50" 111x62 161 to 261 -79 to +17
60" 133x75 194 to 314 -95 to +20
80" 177x100 260 to 420 -126 to +27
100" 221x125 327 to 526 -158 to +33
120" 266x149 393 to 632 -189 to +40
150" 332x187 493 to 791 -237 to +50
Screen Size and Projection Distance
247
16:9 Screen Size
AB
Minimum (Wide) to
Maximum (Tele)
Vertical lens shift
Bottom to Top
200" 443x249 658 to 1057 -316 to +67
250" 553x311 824 to 1322 -395 to +83
300" 664x374 990 to 1587 -474 to +100
500" 1107x623 1654 to 2648 -789 to +167
800" 1771x996 2649 to 4240 -1263 to +267
1000" 2214x1245 3312 to 5301 -1579 to +334
Unit: cm
16:10 Screen Size
AB
Minimum (Wide) to
Maximum (Tele)
Vertical lens shift
Bottom to Top
48" 103x65 150 to 243 -77 to +12
50" 108x67 156 to 254 -80 to +13
60" 130x81 189 to 305 -96 to +15
80" 172x108 253 to 408 -128 to +21
100" 215x135 318 to 512 -160 to +26
120" 258x162 382 to 615 -192 to +31
150" 323x202 479 to 770 -241 to +39
200" 431x269 640 to 1028 -321 to +51
250" 538x337 802 to 1286 -401 to +64
300" 646x404 963 to 1544 -481 to +77
500" 1077x673 1609 to 2576 -802 to +129
800" 1723x1077 2577 to 4125 -1283 to +206
1000" 2154x1346 3223 to 5157 -1603 to +257
ELPLX01/ELPLX01W
Zoom is not supported.
4:3 Screen Size A
B
Vertical lens shift
Bottom to Top
100" 203x152 71 0 to +12
120" 244x183 86 0 to +14
150" 305x229 109 0 to +17
200" 406x305 147 0 to +23
250" 508x381 185 0 to +29
300" 610x457 223 0 to +35
350" 711x533 261 0 to +40
400" 813x610 299 0 to +46
500" 1016x762 375 0 to +58
800" 1626x1219 603 0 to +93
1000" 2032x1524 755 0 to +116
Unit: cm
16:9 Screen Size A
B
Vertical lens shift
Bottom to Top
92" 204x115 71 +19 to +31
100" 221x125 77 +21 to +33
120" 266x149 94 +25 to +40
150" 332x187 119 +31 to +50
200" 443x249 160 +42 to +67
250" 553x311 202 +52 to +83
300" 664x374 243 +62 to +100
Screen Size and Projection Distance
248
16:9 Screen Size A
B
Vertical lens shift
Bottom to Top
350" 775x436 285 +73 to +117
500" 1107x623 409 +104 to +167
800" 1771x996 657 +166 to +267
Unit: cm
16:10 Screen Size A
B
Vertical lens shift
Bottom to Top
95" 205x128 71 +13 to +24
100" 215x135 75 +13 to +26
120" 258x162 91 +16 to +31
150" 323x202 116 +20 to +39
200" 431x269 156 +27 to +51
250" 538x337 196 +34 to +64
300" 646x404 236 +40 to +77
350" 754x471 277 +47 to +90
500" 1077x673 398 +67 to +129
800" 1723x1077 639 +108 to +206
ELPLU03
Unit: cm
4:3 Screen Size
AB
Minimum (Wide) to
Maximum (Tele)
Vertical lens shift
Bottom to Top
80" 163x122 107 to 129 -131 to +9
4:3 Screen Size
AB
Minimum (Wide) to
Maximum (Tele)
Vertical lens shift
Bottom to Top
100" 203x152 134 to 162 -164 to +12
120" 244x183 162 to 196 -197 to +14
150" 305x229 204 to 245 -246 to +17
200" 406x305 273 to 328 -328 to +23
250" 508x381 342 to 411 -410 to +29
300" 610x457 411 to 494 -492 to +35
500" 1016x762 687 to 826 -820 to +58
800" 1626x1219 1101 to 1323 -1312 to +93
1000" 2032x1524 1377 to 1655 -1640 to +116
Unit: cm
16:9 Screen Size
AB
Minimum (Wide) to
Maximum (Tele)
Vertical lens shift
Bottom to Top
74" 164x92 108 to 130 -117 to +25
80" 177x100 117 to 141 -126 to +27
100" 221x125 147 to 177 -158 to +33
120" 266x149 177 to 213 -189 to +40
150" 332x187 222 to 268 -237 to +50
200" 443x249 297 to 358 -316 to +67
250" 553x311 373 to 448 -395 to +83
300" 664x374 448 to 539 -474 to +100
500" 1107x623 749 to 900 -789 to +167
800" 1771x996 1200 to 1442 -1263 to +267
Screen Size and Projection Distance
249
Unit: cm
16:10 Screen Size
AB
Minimum (Wide) to
Maximum (Tele)
Vertical lens shift
Bottom to Top
76" 164x102 108 to 130 -122 to +20
80" 172x108 113 to 137 -128 to +21
100" 215x135 143 to 172 -160 to +26
120" 258x162 172 to 208 -192 to +31
150" 323x202 216 to 260 -241 to +39
200" 431x269 289 to 348 -321 to +51
250" 538x337 362 to 436 -401 to +64
300" 646x404 436 to 524 -481 to +77
500" 1077x673 728 to 876 -802 to +129
800" 1723x1077 1168 to 1403 -1283 to +206
ELPLU04/ELPLU02
Unit: cm
4:3 Screen Size
AB
Minimum (Wide) to
Maximum (Tele)
Vertical lens shift
Bottom to Top
50" 102x76 88 to 107 -82 to +6
60" 122x91 107 to 129 -98 to +7
80" 163x122 144 to 174 -131 to +9
100" 203x152 181 to 219 -164 to +12
120" 244x183 219 to 264 -197 to +14
150" 305x229 275 to 332 -246 to +17
200" 406x305 368 to 444 -328 to +23
250" 508x381 462 to 557 -410 to +29
4:3 Screen Size
AB
Minimum (Wide) to
Maximum (Tele)
Vertical lens shift
Bottom to Top
300" 610x457 555 to 669 -492 to +35
500" 1016x762 929 to 1119 -820 to +58
800" 1626x1219 1490 to 1794 -1312 to +93
1000" 2032x1524 1864 to 2244 -1640 to +116
Unit: cm
16:9 Screen Size
AB
Minimum (Wide) to
Maximum (Tele)
Vertical lens shift
Bottom to Top
46" 102x57 88 to 107 -73 to +15
50" 111x62 96 to 117 -79 to +17
60" 133x75 117 to 141 -95 to +20
80" 177x100 157 to 191 -126 to +27
100" 221x125 198 to 240 -158 to +33
120" 266x149 239 to 289 -189 to +40
150" 332x187 300 to 362 -237 to +50
200" 443x249 402 to 485 -316 to +67
250" 553x311 504 to 607 -395 to +83
300" 664x374 606 to 730 -474 to +100
500" 1107x623 1013 to 1220 -789 to +167
800" 1771x996 1624 to 1955 -1263 to +267
Screen Size and Projection Distance
250
Unit: cm
16:10 Screen Size
AB
Minimum (Wide) to
Maximum (Tele)
Vertical lens shift
Bottom to Top
48" 103x65 90 to 109 -77 to +12
50" 108x67 93 to 114 -80 to +13
60" 130x81 113 to 138 -96 to +15
80" 172x108 153 to 185 -128 to +21
100" 215x135 193 to 233 -160 to +26
120" 258x162 232 to 281 -192 to +31
150" 323x202 292 to 352 -241 to +39
200" 431x269 391 to 471 -321 to +51
250" 538x337 490 to 591 -401 to +64
300" 646x404 589 to 710 -481 to +77
500" 1077x673 985 to 1187 -802 to +129
800" 1723x1077 1580 to 1902 -1283 to +206
ELPLW05
Unit: cm
4:3 Screen Size
AB
Minimum (Wide) to
Maximum (Tele)
Vertical lens shift
Bottom to Top
50" 102x76 104 to 149 -82 to +6
60" 122x91 127 to 180 -98 to +7
80" 163x122 171 to 242 -131 to +9
100" 203x152 216 to 303 -164 to +12
120" 244x183 261 to 365 -197 to +14
150" 305x229 328 to 458 -246 to +17
4:3 Screen Size
AB
Minimum (Wide) to
Maximum (Tele)
Vertical lens shift
Bottom to Top
200" 406x305 440 to 612 -328 to +23
250" 508x381 552 to 767 -410 to +29
300" 610x457 664 to 922 -492 to +35
500" 1016x762 1112 to 1540 -820 to +58
800" 1626x1219 1784 to 2467 -1312 to +93
1000" 2032x1524 2232 to 3086 -1640 to +116
Unit: cm
16:9 Screen Size
AB
Minimum (Wide) to
Maximum (Tele)
Vertical lens shift
Bottom to Top
46" 102x57 104 to 149 -73 to +15
50" 111x62 114 to 163 -79 to +17
60" 133x75 139 to 196 -95 to +20
80" 177x100 187 to 264 -126 to +27
100" 221x125 236 to 331 -158 to +33
120" 266x149 285 to 398 -189 to +40
150" 332x187 358 to 499 -237 to +50
200" 443x249 480 to 668 -316 to +67
250" 553x311 602 to 836 -395 to +83
300" 664x374 724 to 1005 -474 to +100
500" 1107x623 1212 to 1678 -789 to +167
800" 1771x996 1944 to 2689 -1263 to +267
Screen Size and Projection Distance
251
Unit: cm
16:10 Screen Size
AB
Minimum (Wide) to
Maximum (Tele)
Vertical lens shift
Bottom to Top
48" 103x65 106 to 151 -77 to +12
50" 108x67 111 to 158 -80 to +13
60" 130x81 135 to 191 -96 to +15
80" 172x108 182 to 256 -128 to +21
100" 215x135 230 to 322 -160 to +26
120" 258x162 277 to 387 -192 to +31
150" 323x202 348 to 486 -241 to +39
200" 431x269 467 to 650 -321 to +51
250" 538x337 586 to 813 -401 to +64
300" 646x404 704 to 977 -481 to +77
500" 1077x673 1179 to 1633 -802 to +129
800" 1723x1077 1891 to 2616 -1283 to +206
ELPLW06/ELPLW04
Unit: cm
4:3 Screen Size
AB
Minimum (Wide) to
Maximum (Tele)
Vertical lens shift
Bottom to Top
50" 102x76 165 to 227 -82 to +6
60" 122x91 199 to 274 -98 to +7
80" 163x122 268 to 368 -131 to +9
100" 203x152 337 to 461 -164 to +12
120" 244x183 406 to 555 -197 to +14
150" 305x229 509 to 696 -246 to +17
4:3 Screen Size
AB
Minimum (Wide) to
Maximum (Tele)
Vertical lens shift
Bottom to Top
200" 406x305 682 to 930 -328 to +23
250" 508x381 854 to 1164 -410 to +29
300" 610x457 1026 to 1398 -492 to +35
500" 1016x762 1715 to 2336 -820 to +58
800" 1626x1219 2749 to 3741 -1312 to +93
1000" 2032x1524 3438 to 4678 -1640 to +116
Unit: cm
16:9 Screen Size
AB
Minimum (Wide) to
Maximum (Tele)
Vertical lens shift
Bottom to Top
46" 102x57 165 to 228 -73 to +15
50" 111x62 180 to 248 -79 to +17
60" 133x75 218 to 299 -95 to +20
80" 177x100 293 to 401 -126 to +27
100" 221x125 368 to 503 -158 to +33
120" 266x149 443 to 605 -189 to +40
150" 332x187 556 to 759 -237 to +50
200" 443x249 743 to 1014 -316 to +67
250" 553x311 931 to 1269 -395 to +83
300" 664x374 1119 to 1524 -474 to +100
500" 1107x623 1869 to 2545 -789 to +167
800" 1771x996 2995 to 4076 -1263 to +267
Screen Size and Projection Distance
252
Unit: cm
16:10 Screen Size
AB
Minimum (Wide) to
Maximum (Tele)
Vertical lens shift
Bottom to Top
48" 98x73 168 to 231 -77 to +12
50" 108x67 175 to 241 -80 to +13
60" 130x81 212 to 291 -96 to +15
80" 172x108 285 to 390 -128 to +21
100" 215x135 358 to 489 -160 to +26
120" 258x162 431 to 589 -192 to +31
150" 323x202 540 to 738 -241 to +39
200" 431x269 723 to 986 -321 to +51
250" 538x337 906 to 1234 -401 to +64
300" 646x404 1088 to 1483 -481 to +77
500" 1077x673 1818 to 2476 -802 to +129
800" 1723x1077 2914 to 3966 -1283 to +206
ELPLW08
Unit: cm
4:3 Screen Size
AB
Minimum (Wide) to
Maximum (Tele)
Vertical lens shift
Bottom to Top
50" 102x76 120 to 169 -82 to +6
60" 122x91 145 to 204 -98 to +7
80" 163x122 194 to 273 -131 to +9
100" 203x152 244 to 343 -164 to +12
120" 244x183 294 to 413 -197 to +14
150" 305x229 368 to 517 -246 to +17
4:3 Screen Size
AB
Minimum (Wide) to
Maximum (Tele)
Vertical lens shift
Bottom to Top
200" 406x305 493 to 692 -328 to +23
250" 508x381 617 to 866 -410 to +29
300" 610x457 741 to 1040 -492 to +35
500" 1016x762 1238 to 1737 -820 to +58
800" 1626x1219 1984 to 2782 -1312 to +93
1000" 2032x1524 2481 to 3479 -1640 to +116
Unit: cm
16:9 Screen Size
AB
Minimum (Wide) to
Maximum (Tele)
Vertical lens shift
Bottom to Top
46" 102x57 120 to 169 -73 to +15
60" 133x75 158 to 222 -95 to +20
80" 177x100 212 to 298 -126 to +27
100" 221x125 266 to 374 -158 to +33
120" 266x149 320 to 450 -189 to +40
150" 332x187 402 to 564 -237 to +50
200" 443x249 537 to 754 -316 to +67
250" 553x311 672 to 944 -395 to +83
300" 664x374 808 to 1134 -474 to +100
500" 1107x623 1349 to 1893 -789 to +167
800" 1771x996 2162 to 3032 -1263 to +267
Screen Size and Projection Distance
253
Unit: cm
16:10 Screen Size
AB
Minimum (Wide) to
Maximum (Tele)
Vertical lens shift
Bottom to Top
48" 103x65 122 to 172 -77 to +12
60" 130x81 154 to 216 -96 to +15
80" 172x108 206 to 290 -128 to +21
100" 215x135 259 to 364 -160 to +26
120" 258x162 312 to 438 -192 to +31
150" 323x202 391 to 549 -241 to +39
200" 431x269 522 to 733 -321 to +51
250" 538x337 654 to 918 -401 to +64
300" 646x404 786 to 1103 -481 to +77
500" 1077x673 1313 to 1842 -802 to +129
800" 1723x1077 2103 to 2950 -1283 to +206
ELPLM15/ELPLM09/ELPLS04
Unit: cm
4:3 Screen Size
AB
Minimum (Wide) to
Maximum (Tele)
Vertical lens shift
Bottom to Top
50" 102x76 219 to 358 -82 to +6
60" 122x91 265 to 431 -98 to +7
80" 163x122 356 to 578 -131 to +9
100" 203x152 447 to 724 -164 to +12
120" 244x183 538 to 870 -197 to +14
150" 305x229 674 to 1090 -246 to +17
200" 406x305 902 to 1456 -328 to +23
4:3 Screen Size
AB
Minimum (Wide) to
Maximum (Tele)
Vertical lens shift
Bottom to Top
250" 508x381 1129 to 1822 -410 to +29
300" 610x457 1357 to 2188 -492 to +35
500" 1016x762 2267 to 3652 -820 to +58
800" 1626x1219 3632 to 5848 -1312 to +93
1000" 2032x1524 4542 to 7312 -1640 to +116
Unit: cm
16:9 Screen Size
AB
Minimum (Wide) to
Maximum (Tele)
Vertical lens shift
Bottom to Top
46" 102x57 220 to 359 -73 to +15
50" 111x62 240 to 391 -79 to +17
60" 133x75 289 to 471 -95 to +20
80" 177x100 389 to 630 -126 to +27
100" 221x125 488 to 790 -158 to +33
120" 266x149 587 to 949 -189 to +40
150" 332x187 736 to 1188 -237 to +50
200" 443x249 983 to 1587 -316 to +67
250" 553x311 1231 to 1986 -395 to +83
300" 664x374 1479 to 2385 -474 to +100
500" 1107x623 2471 to 3980 -789 to +167
800" 1771x996 3958 to 6372 -1263 to +267
Screen Size and Projection Distance
254
Unit: cm
16:10 Screen Size
AB
Minimum (Wide) to
Maximum (Tele)
Vertical lens shift
Bottom to Top
48" 103x65 223 to 364 -77 to +12
50" 108x67 233 to 380 -80 to +13
60" 130x81 281 to 458 -96 to +15
80" 172x108 378 to 613 -128 to +21
100" 215x135 474 to 768 -160 to +26
120" 258x162 571 to 923 -192 to +31
150" 323x202 715 to 1156 -241 to +39
200" 431x269 957 to 1544 -321 to +51
250" 538x337 1198 to 1932 -401 to +64
300" 646x404 1439 to 2320 -481 to +77
500" 1077x673 2403 to 3872 -802 to +129
800" 1723x1077 3850 to 6199 -1283 to +206
ELPLM10/ELPLM06
Unit: cm
4:3 Screen Size
AB
Minimum (Wide) to
Maximum (Tele)
Vertical lens shift
Bottom to Top
50" 102x76 338 to 519 -82 to +6
60" 122x91 409 to 625 -98 to +7
80" 163x122 549 to 838 -131 to +9
100" 203x152 690 to 1051 -164 to +12
120" 244x183 831 to 1264 -197 to +14
150" 305x229 1041 to 1583 -246 to +17
4:3 Screen Size
AB
Minimum (Wide) to
Maximum (Tele)
Vertical lens shift
Bottom to Top
200" 406x305 1393 to 2115 -328 to +23
250" 508x381 1744 to 2647 -410 to +29
300" 610x457 2096 to 3179 -492 to +35
500" 1016x762 3502 to 5307 -820 to +58
800" 1626x1219 5611 to 8499 -1312 to +93
1000" 2032x1524 7017 to 10627 -1640 to +116
Unit: cm
16:9 Screen Size
AB
Minimum (Wide) to
Maximum (Tele)
Vertical lens shift
Bottom to Top
46" 102x57 339 to 520 -73 to +15
50" 111x62 370 to 567 -79 to +17
60" 133x75 446 to 682 -95 to +20
80" 177x100 600 to 914 -126 to +27
100" 221x125 753 to 1146 -158 to +33
120" 266x149 906 to 1378 -189 to +40
150" 332x187 1136 to 1726 -237 to +50
200" 443x249 1519 to 2305 -316 to +67
250" 553x311 1902 to 2885 -395 to +83
300" 664x374 2285 to 3465 -474 to +100
500" 1107x623 3816 to 5783 -789 to +167
800" 1771x996 6114 to 9261 -1263 to +267
Screen Size and Projection Distance
255
Unit: cm
16:10 Screen Size
AB
Minimum (Wide) to
Maximum (Tele)
Vertical lens shift
Bottom to Top
48" 103x65 345 to 528 -77 to +12
50" 108x67 360 to 551 -80 to +13
60" 130x81 434 to 664 -96 to +15
80" 172x108 583 to 889 -128 to +21
100" 215x135 732 to 1115 -160 to +26
120" 258x162 881 to 1340 -192 to +31
150" 323x202 1105 to 1679 -241 to +39
200" 431x269 1477 to 2243 -321 to +51
250" 538x337 1850 to 2807 -401 to +64
300" 646x404 2222 to 3370 -481 to +77
500" 1077x673 3713 to 5626 -802 to +129
800" 1723x1077 5948 to 9010 -1283 to +206
ELPLM11/ELPLM07
Unit: cm
4:3 Screen Size
AB
Minimum (Wide) to
Maximum (Tele)
Vertical lens shift
Bottom to Top
50" 102x76 492 to 755 -82 to +6
60" 122x91 595 to 910 -98 to +7
80" 163x122 801 to 1221 -131 to +9
100" 203x152 1007 to 1533 -164 to +12
120" 244x183 1213 to 1844 -197 to +14
150" 305x229 1523 to 2311 -246 to +17
4:3 Screen Size
AB
Minimum (Wide) to
Maximum (Tele)
Vertical lens shift
Bottom to Top
200" 406x305 2038 to 3089 -328 to +23
250" 508x381 2554 to 3867 -410 to +29
300" 610x457 3069 to 4645 -492 to +35
500" 1016x762 5131 to 7757 -820 to +58
800" 1626x1219 8224 to 12425 -1312 to +93
1000" 2032x1524 10286 to 15537 -1640 to +116
Unit: cm
16:9 Screen Size
AB
Minimum (Wide) to
Maximum (Tele)
Vertical lens shift
Bottom to Top
46" 102x57 493 to 756 -73 to +15
50" 111x62 538 to 824 -79 to +17
60" 133x75 650 to 994 -95 to +20
80" 177x100 875 to 1333 -126 to +27
100" 221x125 1100 to 1672 -158 to +33
120" 266x149 1324 to 2011 -189 to +40
150" 332x187 1661 to 2519 -237 to +50
200" 443x249 2223 to 3367 -316 to +67
250" 553x311 2784 to 4215 -395 to +83
300" 664x374 3346 to 5062 -474 to +100
500" 1107x623 5592 to 8453 -789 to +167
800" 1771x996 8962 to 13538 -1263 to +267
Screen Size and Projection Distance
256
Unit: cm
16:10 Screen Size
AB
Minimum (Wide) to
Maximum (Tele)
Vertical lens shift
Bottom to Top
48" 103x65 501 to 768 -77 to +12
50" 108x67 523 to 801 -80 to +13
60" 130x81 632 to 966 -96 to +15
80" 172x108 851 to 1296 -128 to +21
100" 215x135 1069 to 1626 -160 to +26
120" 258x162 1288 to 1956 -192 to +31
150" 323x202 1616 to 2451 -241 to +39
200" 431x269 2162 to 3275 -321 to +51
250" 538x337 2708 to 4100 -401 to +64
300" 646x404 3255 to 4925 -481 to +77
500" 1077x673 5441 to 8223 -802 to +129
800" 1723x1077 8719 to 13171 -1283 to +206
ELPLL08/ELPLL07
Unit: cm
4:3 Screen Size
AB
Minimum (Wide) to
Maximum (Tele)
Vertical lens shift
Bottom to Top
50" 102x76 732 to 1034 -82 to +6
60" 122x91 885 to 1247 -98 to +7
80" 163x122 1191 to 1674 -131 to +9
100" 203x152 1497 to 2100 -164 to +12
120" 244x183 1802 to 2527 -197 to +14
150" 305x229 2261 to 3166 -246 to +17
4:3 Screen Size
AB
Minimum (Wide) to
Maximum (Tele)
Vertical lens shift
Bottom to Top
200" 406x305 3025 to 4232 -328 to +23
250" 508x381 3790 to 5298 -410 to +29
300" 610x457 4554 to 6364 -492 to +35
500" 1016x762 7611 to 10627 -820 to +58
800" 1626x1219 12197 to 17023 -1312 to +93
1000" 2032x1524 15255 to 21287 -1640 to +116
Unit: cm
16:9 Screen Size
AB
Minimum (Wide) to
Maximum (Tele)
Vertical lens shift
Bottom to Top
46" 102x57 734 to 1037 -73 to +15
50" 111x62 801 to 1130 -79 to +17
60" 133x75 967 to 1362 -95 to +20
80" 177x100 1300 to 1826 -126 to +27
100" 221x125 1633 to 2291 -158 to +33
120" 266x149 1967 to 2755 -189 to +40
150" 332x187 2466 to 3452 -237 to +50
200" 443x249 3299 to 4613 -316 to +67
250" 553x311 4132 to 5775 -395 to +83
300" 664x374 4964 to 6939 -474 to +100
500" 1107x623 8295 to 11581 -789 to +167
800" 1771x996 13292 to 18549 -1263 to +267
Screen Size and Projection Distance
257
Unit: cm
16:10 Screen Size
AB
Minimum (Wide) to
Maximum (Tele)
Vertical lens shift
Bottom to Top
48" 103x65 746 to 1053 -77 to +12
50" 108x67 778 to 1098 -80 to +13
60" 130x81 940 to 1324 -96 to +15
80" 172x108 1264 to 1776 -128 to +21
100" 215x135 1588 to 2228 -160 to +26
120" 258x162 1913 to 2680 -192 to +31
150" 323x202 2399 to 3358 -241 to +39
200" 431x269 3209 to 4488 -321 to +51
250" 538x337 4019 to 5618 -401 to +64
300" 646x404 4829 to 6748 -481 to +77
500" 1077x673 8070 to 11267 -802 to +129
800" 1723x1077 12931 to 18046 -1283 to +206
ELPLR04
Zoom and lens shift are not supported.
Unit: cm
4:3 Screen Size AB
50" 102x76 96 -38
60" 122x91 116 -46
80" 163x122 157 -61
100" 203x152 198 -76
120" 244x183 239 -91
150" 305x229 300 -114
4:3 Screen Size AB
200" 406x305 402 -152
250" 508x381 504 -191
300" 610x457 606 -229
500" 1016x762 1015 -381
800" 1626x1219 1627 -610
1000" 2032x1524 2035 -762
Unit: cm
16:9 Screen Size AB
46" 102x57 96 -29
50" 111x62 105 -31
60" 133x75 127 -37
80" 177x100 172 -50
100" 221x125 216 -62
120" 266x149 261 -75
150" 332x187 327 -93
200" 443x249 439 -125
250" 553x311 550 -156
300" 664x374 661 -187
500" 1107x623 1106 -311
800" 1771x996 1773 -498
Unit: cm
16:10 Screen Size AB
48" 103x65 98 -32
50" 108x67 102 -34
60" 130x81 124 -40
Screen Size and Projection Distance
258
16:10 Screen Size AB
80" 172x108 167 -54
100" 215x135 210 -67
120" 258x162 254 -81
150" 323x202 318 -101
200" 431x269 427 -135
250" 538x337 535 -168
300" 646x404 643 -202
500" 1077x673 1076 -337
800" 1723x1077 1725 -538
Polarizer (ELPPL01) Installation Distance
APossible installation range of the polarizer
BShortest distance from the projection lens to the polarizer
CLongest distance from the projection lens to the polarizer
DPolarizer (ELPPL01)
EB-L1075U/EB-L1070U/EB-L1065U/EB-L1060U/EB-L1050U
Units: mm
Lens type
A
BC
ELPLM08 140 170
ELPLW06/ELPLW04 120 170
ELPLW08 100 130
ELPLM15/ELPLM09/
ELPLS04
180 240
ELPLM10/ELPLM06 260 340
EB-L1070W/EB-L1060W
Units: mm
Lens type
A
BC
ELPLM08 150 170
ELPLW06/ELPLW04 120 170
ELPLW08 100 130
ELPLM15/ELPLM09/
ELPLS04
200 240
ELPLM10/ELPLM06 300 340
EB-L1070
Units: mm
Lens type
A
BC
ELPLM08 130 170
ELPLW06/ELPLW04 120 170
Screen Size and Projection Distance
259
Lens type
A
BC
ELPLW08 100 130
ELPLM15/ELPLM09/
ELPLS04
170 240
ELPLM10/ELPLM06 230 340
Screen Size and Projection Distance
260
H/V-Keystone
s "H/V-Keystone" p.65
Lens type Vertical Horizontal
ELPLM08 -45˚ to 45˚ -30˚ to 30˚
ELPLX01/ELPLX01W -16˚ to 16˚ -16˚ to 16˚
ELPLU03 -28˚ to 28˚ -28˚ to 28˚
ELPLU04/ELPLU02 -35˚ to 35˚ -30˚ to 30˚
ELPLR04 -34˚ to 34˚ -30˚ to 30˚
ELPLW05 -40˚ to 40˚ -30˚ to 30˚
ELPLW06/ELPLW04 -45˚ to 45˚ -30˚ to 30˚
ELPLW08 -40˚ to 40˚ -30˚ to 30˚
ELPLM15/ELPLM09/
ELPLS04
-45˚ to 45˚ -30˚ to 30˚
ELPLM10/ELPLM06 -45˚ to 45˚ -30˚ to 30˚
ELPLM11/ELPLM07 -45˚ to 45˚ -30˚ to 30˚
ELPLL08/ELPLL07 -45˚ to 45˚ -30˚ to 30˚
Curved Surface
s "Curved Surface" p.67
The values in the table are the minimum values for R/L in the illustration.
(Approximate value when projecting at maximum zoom. ELPLR04 does not
support lens shift.)
EB-L1075U/EB-L1070U/EB-L1065U/EB-L1060U/EB-L1050U/EB-L1070W/
EB-L1060W
Horizontally curved surface (concave)
L
R
AScreen
BCenter of the circle of which the
curved surface is an arc
L Projection distance
R Radius of the circle of which the
curved surface is an arc
Top view
Lens type Vertical lens shift:
Home position
Side view
Vertical lens shift: Top
Side view
ELPLM08 0.29 0.30
ELPLX01/ELPLX01W - 2.74
ELPLU03 0.45 0.56
ELPLU04/ELPLU02 0.39 0.40
ELPLR04 0.37 -
ELPLW05 0.35 0.37
ELPLW06/ELPLW04 0.26 0.27
ELPLW08 0.33 0.34
ELPLM15/ELPLM09/
ELPLS04
0.21 0.22
ELPLM10/ELPLM06 0.15 0.15
Adjustment Range for Projected Images
261
Lens type Vertical lens shift:
Home position
Side view
Vertical lens shift: Top
Side view
ELPLM11/ELPLM07 0.11 0.11
ELPLL08/ELPLL07 0.08 0.08
Horizontally curved surface (convex)
L
R
AScreen
BCenter of the circle of which the
curved surface is an arc
L Projection distance
R Radius of the circle of which the
curved surface is an arc
Top view
Lens type Vertical lens shift:
Home position
Side view
Vertical lens shift: Top
Side view
ELPLM08 0.58 0.62
ELPLX01/ELPLX01W - 3.52
ELPLU03 2.13 2.31
ELPLU04/ELPLU02 1.27 1.37
ELPLR04 1.10 -
ELPLW05 0.95 1.01
ELPLW06/ELPLW04 0.49 0.52
ELPLW08 0.79 0.84
ELPLM15/ELPLM09/
ELPLS04
0.33 0.35
ELPLM10/ELPLM06 0.20 0.20
ELPLM11/ELPLM07 0.13 0.13
ELPLL08/ELPLL07 0.09 0.09
Adjustment Range for Projected Images
262
Vertically curved surface (concave)
L
R
AScreen
BCenter of the circle of which the
curved surface is an arc
L Projection distance
R Radius of the circle of which the
curved surface is an arc
Side view
Lens type Vertical lens shift:
Home position
Side view
Vertical lens shift: Top
Side view
ELPLM08 0.21 0.25
ELPLX01/ELPLX01W - 1.98
ELPLU03 0.37 0.67
ELPLU04/ELPLU02 0.31 0.43
ELPLR04 0.29 -
ELPLW05 0.27 0.35
ELPLW06/ELPLW04 0.19 0.22
ELPLW08 0.25 0.31
ELPLM15/ELPLM09/
ELPLS04
0.15 0.17
ELPLM10/ELPLM06 0.11 0.11
ELPLM11/ELPLM07 0.08 0.08
Lens type Vertical lens shift:
Home position
Side view
Vertical lens shift: Top
Side view
ELPLL08/ELPLL07 0.06 0.06
Adjustment Range for Projected Images
263
Vertically curved surface (convex)
L
R
AScreen
BCenter of the circle of which the
curved surface is an arc
L Projection distance
R Radius of the circle of which the
curved surface is an arc
Side view
Lens type Vertical lens shift:
Home position
Side view
Vertical lens shift: Top
Side view
ELPLM08 0.31 0.37
ELPLX01/ELPLX01W - 3.52
ELPLU03 1.07 1.29
ELPLU04/ELPLU02 0.65 0.79
ELPLR04 0.57 -
ELPLW05 0.49 0.59
ELPLW06/ELPLW04 0.26 0.32
ELPLW08 0.42 0.50
ELPLM15/ELPLM09/
ELPLS04
0.18 0.22
ELPLM10/ELPLM06 0.12 0.13
ELPLM11/ELPLM07 0.08 0.09
Lens type Vertical lens shift:
Home position
Side view
Vertical lens shift: Top
Side view
ELPLL08/ELPLL07 0.06 0.06
Adjustment Range for Projected Images
264
EB-L1070
Horizontally curved surface (concave)
L
R
AScreen
BCenter of the circle of which the
curved surface is an arc
L Projection distance
R Radius of the circle of which the
curved surface is an arc
Top view
Lens type Vertical lens shift:
Home position
Side view
Vertical lens shift: Top
Side view
ELPLM08 0.27 0.27
ELPLX01/ELPLX01W - 1.66
ELPLU03 0.44 0.60
ELPLU04/ELPLU02 0.37 0.40
ELPLR04 0.35 -
ELPLW05 0.33 0.34
ELPLW06/ELPLW04 0.25 0.25
ELPLW08 0.31 0.32
ELPLM15/ELPLM09/
ELPLS04
0.20 0.20
ELPLM10/ELPLM06 0.14 0.14
ELPLM11/ELPLM07 0.11 0.11
Lens type Vertical lens shift:
Home position
Side view
Vertical lens shift: Top
Side view
ELPLL08/ELPLL07 0.08 0.08
Adjustment Range for Projected Images
265
Horizontally curved surface (convex)
L
R
AScreen
BCenter of the circle of which the
curved surface is an arc
L Projection distance
R Radius of the circle of which the
curved surface is an arc
Top view
Lens type Vertical lens shift:
Home position
Side view
Vertical lens shift: Top
Side view
ELPLM08 0.52 0.54
ELPLX01/ELPLX01W - 3.52
ELPLU03 1.81 1.88
ELPLU04/ELPLU02 1.10 1.14
ELPLR04 0.95 -
ELPLW05 0.83 0.86
ELPLW06/ELPLW04 0.44 0.45
ELPLW08 0.70 0.72
ELPLM15/ELPLM09/
ELPLS04
0.31 0.31
ELPLM10/ELPLM06 0.19 0.19
ELPLM11/ELPLM07 0.13 0.13
ELPLL08/ELPLL07 0.09 0.09
Vertically curved surface (concave)
L
R
AScreen
BCenter of the circle of which the
curved surface is an arc
L Projection distance
R Radius of the circle of which the
curved surface is an arc
Side view
Lens type Vertical lens shift:
Home position
Side view
Vertical lens shift: Top
Side view
ELPLM08 0.22 0.28
ELPLX01/ELPLX01W - 1.73
ELPLU03 0.37 0.65
ELPLU04/ELPLU02 0.32 0.46
ELPLR04 - 0.30
ELPLW05 0.28 0.38
ELPLW06/ELPLW04 0.20 0.25
ELPLW08 0.26 0.34
ELPLM15/ELPLM09/
ELPLS04
0.16 0.19
ELPLM10/ELPLM06 0.11 0.13
ELPLM11/ELPLM07 0.08 0.09
Adjustment Range for Projected Images
266
Lens type Vertical lens shift:
Home position
Side view
Vertical lens shift: Top
Side view
ELPLL08/ELPLL07 0.06 0.07
Vertically curved surface (convex)
L
R
AScreen
BCenter of the circle of which the
curved surface is an arc
L Projection distance
R Radius of the circle of which the
curved surface is an arc
Side view
Lens type Vertical lens shift:
Home position
Side view
Vertical lens shift: Top
Side view
ELPLM08 0.34 0.44
ELPLX01/ELPLX01W - 3.52
ELPLU03 1.08 1.57
ELPLU04/ELPLU02 0.66 0.94
ELPLR04 0.57 -
ELPLW05 0.50 0.71
ELPLW06/ELPLW04 0.29 0.37
ELPLW08 0.43 0.59
ELPLM15/ELPLM09/
ELPLS04
0.21 0.26
ELPLM10/ELPLM06 0.14 0.15
ELPLM11/ELPLM07 0.10 0.10
Adjustment Range for Projected Images
267
Lens type Vertical lens shift:
Home position
Side view
Vertical lens shift: Top
Side view
ELPLL08/ELPLL07 0.07 0.07
Corner Wall
s "Corner Wall" p.71
The α in the figure is the maximum angle in which the projector can move.
See the table below for detailed values. (Approximate value when projecting
at maximum zoom. ELPLR04 does not support lens shift.)
EB-L1075U/EB-L1070U/EB-L1065U/EB-L1060U/EB-L1050U/EB-L1070W/
EB-L1060W
Concave horizontal corner correction (correction to bilateral symmetry by
using corners as the center line)
Ș
AScreen
α Angle of possible projector
motion
Top view
Lens type Vertical lens shift:
Home position
Side view
Vertical lens shift: Top
Side view
ELPLM08 31˚ 23˚
ELPLX01/ELPLX01W - -
ELPLU03 29˚ 9˚
ELPLU04/ELPLU02 31˚ 14˚
ELPLR04 32˚ -
ELPLW05 33˚ 18˚
ELPLW06/ELPLW04 31˚ 25˚
ELPLW08 32˚ 20˚
ELPLM15/ELPLM09/
ELPLS04
30˚ 29˚
ELPLM10/ELPLM06 29˚ 29˚
Adjustment Range for Projected Images
268
Lens type Vertical lens shift:
Home position
Side view
Vertical lens shift: Top
Side view
ELPLM11/ELPLM07 29˚ 28˚
ELPLL08/ELPLL07 28˚ 28˚
Convex horizontal corner correction (correction to bilateral symmetry by
using corners as the center line)
Ș
AScreen
α Angle of possible projector
motion
Top view
Lens type Vertical lens shift:
Home position
Side view
Vertical lens shift: Top
Side view
ELPLM08 14˚ 13˚
ELPLX01/ELPLX01W - -
ELPLU03 0˚ *
ELPLU04/ELPLU02 6˚ 4˚
Lens type Vertical lens shift:
Home position
Side view
Vertical lens shift: Top
Side view
ELPLR04 8˚ -
ELPLW05 9˚ 8˚
ELPLW06/ELPLW04 16˚ 15˚
ELPLW08 11˚ 10˚
ELPLM15/ELPLM09/
ELPLS04
18˚ 18˚
ELPLM10/ELPLM06 22˚ 21˚
ELPLM11/ELPLM07 23˚ 23˚
ELPLL08/ELPLL07 24˚ 24˚
*Cannot be corrected accurately. Move the lens position to the home position.
Concave vertical corner correction (correction to horizontal symmetry by
using corners as the center line)
Ș
AScreen
α Angle of possible projector
motion
Side view
Adjustment Range for Projected Images
269
Lens type Vertical lens shift:
Home position
Ș
Side view
Vertical lens shift: Top
Ș
Side view
ELPLM08 30˚ 12˚
ELPLX01/ELPLX01W - -
ELPLU03 33˚ *
ELPLU04/ELPLU02 31˚ 6˚
ELPLR04 31˚ -
ELPLW05 31˚ 10˚
ELPLW06/ELPLW04 28˚ 13˚
ELPLW08 31˚ 11˚
ELPLM15/ELPLM09/
ELPLS04
26˚ 14˚
ELPLM10/ELPLM06 24˚ 16˚
ELPLM11/ELPLM07 23˚ 18˚
ELPLL08/ELPLL07 23˚ 19˚
*Cannot be corrected accurately. Move the lens position to the home position.
Convex vertical corner correction (correction to horizontal symmetry by
using corners as the center line)
Ș
AScreen
α Angle of possible projector
motion
Side view
Lens type Vertical lens shift:
Home position
Ș
Side view
Vertical lens shift: Top
Ș
Side view
ELPLM08 19˚ 5˚
ELPLX01/ELPLX01W - -
ELPLU03 9˚ *
ELPLU04/ELPLU02 14˚ *
ELPLR04 15˚ -
ELPLW05 16˚ *
ELPLW06/ELPLW04 20˚ 7˚
ELPLW08 17˚ 1˚
ELPLM15/ELPLM09/
ELPLS04
22˚ 12˚
ELPLM10/ELPLM06 22˚ 15˚
ELPLM11/ELPLM07 22˚ 17˚
ELPLL08/ELPLL07 22˚ 18˚
*Cannot be corrected accurately. Move the lens position to the home position.
Adjustment Range for Projected Images
270
EB-L1070
Concave horizontal corner correction (correction to bilateral symmetry by
using corners as the center line)
Ș
AScreen
α Angle of possible projector
motion
Top view
Lens type Vertical lens shift:
Home position
Side view
Vertical lens shift: Top
Side view
ELPLM08 31˚ 21˚
ELPLX01/ELPLX01W - -
ELPLU03 26˚ 7˚
ELPLU04/ELPLU02 29˚ 13˚
ELPLR04 30˚ -
ELPLW05 31˚ 16˚
ELPLW06/ELPLW04 31˚ 23˚
ELPLW08 32˚ 18˚
ELPLM15/ELPLM09/
ELPLS04
30˚ 27˚
ELPLM10/ELPLM06 29˚ 29˚
ELPLM11/ELPLM07 29˚ 29˚
Lens type Vertical lens shift:
Home position
Side view
Vertical lens shift: Top
Side view
ELPLL08/ELPLL07 28˚ 28˚
Convex horizontal corner correction (correction to bilateral symmetry by
using corners as the center line)
Ș
AScreen
α Angle of possible projector
motion
Top view
Lens type Vertical lens shift:
Home position
Side view
Vertical lens shift: Top
Side view
ELPLM08 14˚ 14˚
ELPLX01/ELPLX01W - -
ELPLU03 0˚ *
ELPLU04/ELPLU02 6˚ 2˚
ELPLR04 8˚ -
Adjustment Range for Projected Images
271
Lens type Vertical lens shift:
Home position
Side view
Vertical lens shift: Top
Side view
ELPLW05 10˚ 7˚
ELPLW06/ELPLW04 16˚ 16˚
ELPLW08 12˚ 10˚
ELPLM15/ELPLM09/
ELPLS04
19˚ 18˚
ELPLM10/ELPLM06 22˚ 21˚
ELPLM11/ELPLM07 23˚ 23˚
ELPLL08/ELPLL07 24˚ 24˚
*Cannot be corrected accurately. Move the lens position to the home position.
Concave vertical corner correction (correction to horizontal symmetry by
using corners as the center line)
Ș
AScreen
α Angle of possible projector
motion
Side view
Lens type Vertical lens shift:
Home position
Ș
Side view
Vertical lens shift: Top
Ș
Side view
ELPLM08 31˚ 14˚
ELPLX01/ELPLX01W - -
ELPLU03 33˚ *
ELPLU04/ELPLU02 32˚ 7˚
ELPLR04 32˚ -
ELPLW05 31˚ 10˚
ELPLW06/ELPLW04 30˚ 16˚
ELPLW08 31˚ 12˚
ELPLM15/ELPLM09/
ELPLS04
29˚ 17˚
ELPLM10/ELPLM06 27˚ 19˚
ELPLM11/ELPLM07 26˚ 21˚
ELPLL08/ELPLL07 26˚ 22˚
*Cannot be corrected accurately. Move the lens position to the home position.
Convex vertical corner correction (correction to horizontal symmetry by
using corners as the center line)
Ș
AScreen
α Angle of possible projector
motion
Adjustment Range for Projected Images
272
Side view
Lens type Vertical lens shift:
Home position
Ș
Side view
Vertical lens shift: Top
Ș
Side view
ELPLM08 18˚ 4˚
ELPLX01/ELPLX01W - -
ELPLU03 6˚ *
ELPLU04/ELPLU02 12˚ *
ELPLR04 13˚ -
ELPLW05 14˚ *
ELPLW06/ELPLW04 19˚ 6˚
ELPLW08 16˚ 0˚
ELPLM15/ELPLM09/
ELPLS04
21˚ 11˚
ELPLM10/ELPLM06 23˚ 16˚
ELPLM11/ELPLM07 24˚ 19˚
ELPLL08/ELPLL07 25˚ 21˚
*Cannot be corrected accurately. Move the lens position to the home position.
Adjustment Range for Projected Images
273
Supported Monitor Displays
When the resolution of the input signals is larger than the projector's panel resolution, the image quality may decline.
Signals with a check mark are supported.
PC
Signal
Format
Resolution
(Dot)
V Sync
(Hz)
Computer/BNC HDMI/HDBaseT DVI-D
RGB YCbCr RGB YCbCr RGB YCbCr
4:4:4 4:2:2 4:2:0 4:4:4 4:2:2
81012810128101281012 8 8 8
VGA 640 480 60
72
75
85
SVGA 800 600 60
72
75
85
XGA 1024 768 60
70
75
85
WXGA 1280 768 60
1280 800 60
75
85
1366 768 60
Supported Monitor Displays
274
Signal
Format
Resolution
(Dot)
V Sync
(Hz)
Computer/BNC HDMI/HDBaseT DVI-D
RGB YCbCr RGB YCbCr RGB YCbCr
4:4:4 4:2:2 4:2:0 4:4:4 4:2:2
81012810128101281012 8 8 8
WXGA+ 1440 900 60
75
85
WXGA++ 1600 900 60
SXGA 1152 864 70
75
85
1280 960 60
75
85
1280 1024 60
75
85
SXGA+ 1400 1050 60
75
WSXGA+ 1680 1050 60
*2, 3 *3*3
UXGA 1600 1200 60
1920x1080 1920 1080 50
60
WUXGA RB
*1
1920 1200 60
*4
QXGA 2048 1536 60
*4
WQHD 2560 1440 60
*4
Supported Monitor Displays
275
Signal
Format
Resolution
(Dot)
V Sync
(Hz)
Computer/BNC HDMI/HDBaseT DVI-D
RGB YCbCr RGB YCbCr RGB YCbCr
4:4:4 4:2:2 4:2:0 4:4:4 4:2:2
81012810128101281012 8 8 8
WQXGA RB
*1
2560 1600 60
*4
*1 Based on VESA CVT-RB (Reduced Blanking)
*2 Only when Wide is selected in Resolution from the Signal menu
*3 EB-L1075U/EB-L1070U/EB-L1065U/EB-L1060U/EB-L1050U/EB-L1070W/EB-L1060W only
*4 EB-L1075U/EB-L1070U/EB-L1065U/EB-L1060U/EB-L1050U only
SD
Signal
Format
Resolution
(Dot)
V Sync
(Hz)
Computer/BNC HDMI/HDBaseT DVI-D
RGB YCbCr RGB YCbCr RGB YCbCr
4:4:4 4:2:2 4:2:0 4:4:4 4:2:2
81012810128101281012 8 8 8
SDTV (480i) 720 480 59.94
SDTV (576i) 720 576 50
SDTV (480p) 720 480 59.94
SDTV (576p) 720 576 50
HD
Signal
Format
Resolution
(Dot)
V Sync
(Hz)
Computer/BNC HDMI/HDBaseT DVI-D
RGB YCbCr RGB YCbCr RGB YCbCr
4:4:4 4:2:2 4:2:0 4:4:4 4:2:2
81012810128101281012 8 8 8
HDTV (720p) 1280 720 50
Supported Monitor Displays
276
Signal
Format
Resolution
(Dot)
V Sync
(Hz)
Computer/BNC HDMI/HDBaseT DVI-D
RGB YCbCr RGB YCbCr RGB YCbCr
4:4:4 4:2:2 4:2:0 4:4:4 4:2:2
81012810128101281012 8 8 8
59.94
60
HDTV (1080i) 1920 1080 50
59.94
60
HDTV (1080p) 1920 1080 23.98
24
25
29.97
30
50
59.94
60
4K (EB-L1075U/EB-L1070U/EB-L1065U/EB-L1060U/EB-L1050U only)
Signal
Format
Resolution
(Dot)
V Sync
(Hz)
Computer/BNC HDMI/HDBaseT DVI-D
RGB YCbCr RGB YCbCr RGB YCbCr
4:4:4 4:2:2 4:2:0 4:4:4 4:2:2
81012810128101281012 8 8 8
3840x2160 3840 2160 23.98
24
25
29.97
Supported Monitor Displays
277
Signal
Format
Resolution
(Dot)
V Sync
(Hz)
Computer/BNC HDMI/HDBaseT DVI-D
RGB YCbCr RGB YCbCr RGB YCbCr
4:4:4 4:2:2 4:2:0 4:4:4 4:2:2
81012810128101281012 8 8 8
30
50
59.94
60
4096x2160
SMPTE
4096 2160 23.98
24
25
29.97
30
50
59.94
60
Supported Monitor Displays
278
Projector General Specifications
Product name EB-L1075U
EB-L1070U
EB-L1065U
EB-L1060U
EB-L1050U EB-L1070W EB-L1060W EB-L1070
Dimensions 545 (W) x 164 (H) x 436 (D) mm (not including raised section)
LCD panel size 0.76" Wide 0.79"
Display method Polysilicon TFT active matrix
Resolution 2,304,000
WUXGA (1920 (W) x 1200 (H) dots) x 3
1,024,000
WXGA (1280 (W) x 800 (H) dots) x 3
786,432
XGA (1024 (W) x
768 (H) dots) x 3
Focus adjustment Automatic
Zoom adjustment
*1
Automatic (1-1.6)
Lens shift
*2
Automatic (Maximum vertical direction of approx. 67%, Maximum horizontal direction of approx. 30%)
*3
Automatic (Maxi‐
mum vertical direc‐
tion of approx. 57%,
Maximum horizontal
direction of approx.
30%)
*4
Light source Laser diode
Light source output power 125W 104.5W 104.5W 125W 104.5W 125W
Wavelength 449 - 461 nm
Light source life
expectancy
*5
Approximately 20,000 hours (Light Source Mode: Normal, Medium, Quiet)
Approximately 30,000 hours (Light Source Mode: Extended)
Power supply 100-240V AC±10%
50/60Hz 4.4-2.0A
100-240V AC±10%
50/60Hz 3.7-1.7A
100-240V AC±10%
50/60Hz 3.7-1.7A
100-240V AC±10%
50/60Hz 4.4-2.0A
100-240V AC±10%
50/60Hz 3.7-1.7A
100-240V AC±10%
50/60Hz 4.4-2.0A
Specifications
279
Power
con-
sump-
tion
100 to 120 V area Rated power con‐
sumption: 439 W
Standby power con‐
sumption (Commu‐
nication On): 2.0 W
Standby power con‐
sumption (Commu‐
nication Off): 0.5 W
Rated power con‐
sumption: 361 W
Standby power con‐
sumption (Commu‐
nication On): 2.0 W
Standby power con‐
sumption (Commu‐
nication Off): 0.5 W
Rated power con‐
sumption: 361 W
Standby power con‐
sumption (Commu‐
nication On): 2.0 W
Standby power con‐
sumption (Commu‐
nication Off): 0.5 W
Rated power con‐
sumption: 439 W
Standby power con‐
sumption (Commu‐
nication On): 2.0 W
Standby power con‐
sumption (Commu‐
nication Off): 0.5 W
Rated power con‐
sumption: 361 W
Standby power con‐
sumption (Commu‐
nication On): 2.0 W
Standby power con‐
sumption (Commu‐
nication Off): 0.5 W
Rated power con‐
sumption: 439 W
Standby power con‐
sumption (Commu‐
nication On): 2.0 W
Standby power con‐
sumption (Commu‐
nication Off): 0.5 W
220 to 240 V area Rated power con‐
sumption: 416 W
Standby power con‐
sumption (Commu‐
nication On): 2.0 W
Standby power con‐
sumption (Commu‐
nication Off): 0.5 W
Rated power con‐
sumption: 345 W
Standby power con‐
sumption (Commu‐
nication On): 2.0 W
Standby power con‐
sumption (Commu‐
nication Off): 0.5 W
Rated power con‐
sumption: 345 W
Standby power con‐
sumption (Commu‐
nication On): 2.0 W
Standby power con‐
sumption (Commu‐
nication Off): 0.5 W
Rated power con‐
sumption: 416 W
Standby power con‐
sumption (Commu‐
nication On): 2.0 W
Standby power con‐
sumption (Commu‐
nication Off): 0.5 W
Rated power con‐
sumption: 345 W
Standby power con‐
sumption (Commu‐
nication On): 2.0 W
Standby power con‐
sumption (Commu‐
nication Off): 0.5 W
Rated power con‐
sumption: 416 W
Standby power con‐
sumption (Commu‐
nication On): 2.0 W
Standby power con‐
sumption (Commu‐
nication Off): 0.5 W
Operating altitude Altitude 0 to 3,048 m
Operating temperature
range
0 to +45˚C
*6
(Altitude of 0 to 2,286 m, no condensation)
0 to +40˚C
*6
(Altitude of 2,287 to 3,048 m, no condensation)
Storage temperature -10 to +60˚C (No condensation)
Mass
*1
Approx. 16.9kg
*1 The specifications are when ELPLM08 is attached.
*2 ELPLR04 does not support lens shift.
*3 ELPLX01/ELPLX01W has a maximum vertical direction of approx. 17% and a maximum horizontal direction of approx. 10%.
*4 ELPLX01/ELPLX01W has a maximum vertical direction of approx. 7% and a maximum horizontal direction of approx. 8%.
*5 Approximate time until light source brightness is reduced by half.
(Assuming the projector is being used in an environment containing airborne particles of 0.04 to 0.2 mg/m
3
. This is an approximate guide only and may change depending on
the projector’s usage and surroundings.)
*6 If the surrounding temperature gets too high, the brightness is automatically dimmed.
(Approximately 40˚C at an altitude of 0 to 2,286 m, and approximately 35˚C at an altitude of 2,287 to 3,048 m; however, this may vary depending on the surroundings and so
on.)
Specifications
280
Product name EB-L1075U
EB-L1070U
EB-L1065U
EB-L1060U
EB-L1050U EB-L1070W EB-L1060W EB-L1070
Connec-
tors
Computer Port 1 Mini D-Sub15-pin (female) blue
Audio1 port 1 Stereo mini jack (3.5Φ)
BNC port 1 5BNC (female)
Audio2 port 1 Stereo mini jack (3.5Φ)
DVI-D port 1 DVI-D 24pin Single link HDCP compatible
HDMI port 1 HDMI HDCP2.2 supported (Audio is only supported
by PCM)
HDMI HDCP supported (Audio is only supported by
PCM)
Audio3 port 1 Stereo mini jack (3.5Φ)
Audio Out port 1 Stereo mini jack (3.5Φ)
Monitor Out port 1 Mini D-Sub15-pin (female) black
HDBaseT port 1 RJ-45 (HDCP2.2 supported) RJ-45 (HDCP supported)
LAN port 1 RJ-45
Service port
*
1USB connector (Type B)
RS-232C port 1 Mini D-Sub 9-pin (male)
Remote port 1 Stereo mini jack (3.5Φ)
USB port
*
1USB connector (Type A)
* Supports USB 2.0. However, USB ports are not guaranteed to operate all devices that support USB.
Specifications
281
This product is also designed for IT power distribution system with phase-to-phase voltage 230V.
Specifications
282
Supplier's DECLARATION of CONFORMITY
According to 47CFR, Part 2 and 15
Class B Personal Computers and Peripherals; and/or
CPU Boards and Power Supplies used with Class B Personal Computers
We: Epson America, Inc.
Located at: 3840 Kilroy Airport Way
Long Beach, CA 90806
Tel: 562-981-3840
Declare under sole responsibility that the product identified herein,
complies with 47CFR Part 2 and 15 of the FCC rules as a Class B digital
device. Each product marketed, is identical to the representative unit tested
and found to be compliant with the standards. Records maintained continue
to reflect the equipment being produced can be expected to be within the
variation accepted, due to quantity production and testing on a statistical
basis as required by 47CFR 2.906. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions : (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this
device must accept any interference received, including interference that
may cause undesired operation.
Trade Name: EPSON
Type of Product: LCD Projector
Model: H940C/H941C/H957C
Options: Product Name: Remote Controller
Model: 2173310 xx (x=0-9)
FCC Compliance Statement
For United States Users
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a
Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits
are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference
in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate
radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the
instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications.
However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a
particular installation. If this equipment does cause interference to radio or
television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off
and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or
more of the following measures.
•Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
•Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
•Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to
which the receiver is connected.
•Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
WARNING
The connection of a non-shielded equipment interface cable to this
equipment will invalidate the FCC Certification or Declaration of this
device and may cause interference levels which exceed the limits established
by the FCC for this equipment. It is the responsibility of the user to obtain
and use a shielded equipment interface cable with this device. If this
equipment has more than one interface connector, do not leave cables
connected to unused interfaces. Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the manufacturer could void the user's authority to operate the
equipment.
Specifications
283
545
272.5
89
189
ACenter of lens
BDistance from center of lens to suspension bracket fixing point
484
436
309
180
166
190
176
458
494
4-M4x8
348
322
4-M6x14
Units: mm
Appearance
284
All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval
system, or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical,
photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without the prior written permission of Seiko
Epson Corporation. No patent liability is assumed with respect to the use of the
information contained herein. Neither is any liability assumed for damages resulting
from the use of the information contained herein.
Neither Seiko Epson Corporation nor its affiliates shall be liable to the purchaser of this
product or third parties for damages, losses, costs, or expenses incurred by the
purchaser or third parties as a result of: accident, misuse, or abuse of this product or
unauthorized modifications, repairs, or alterations to this product, or (excluding the
U.S.) failure to strictly comply with Seiko Epson Corporation's operating and
maintenance instructions.
Seiko Epson Corporation shall not be liable against any damages or problems arising
from the use of any options or any consumable products other than those designated as
Original Epson Products or Epson Approved Products by Seiko Epson Corporation.
The contents of this guide may be changed or updated without further notice.
Illustrations in this guide and the actual projector may differ.
Restriction of Use
When this product is used for applications requiring high reliability/safety such as
transportation devices related to aviation, rail, marine, automotive etc.; disaster
prevention devices; various safety devices etc; or functional/precision devices etc, you
should use this product only after giving consideration to including fail-safes and
redundancies into your design to maintain safety and total system reliability. Because
this product was not intended for use in applications requiring extremely high
reliability/safety such as aerospace equipment, main communication equipment,
nuclear power control equipment, or medical equipment related to direct medical care
etc, please make your own judgment on this product’s suitability after a full evaluation.
About Notations
Microsoft
®
Windows Vista
®
operating system
Microsoft
®
Windows
®
7 operating system
Microsoft
®
Windows
®
8 operating system
Microsoft
®
Windows
®
8.1 operating system
Microsoft
®
Windows
®
10 operating system
In this guide, the operating systems above are referred to as "Windows
Vista", "Windows 7", "Windows 8", "Windows 8.1", and "Windows 10".
Furthermore, these may be referred to as the collective term Windows, and
multiple versions of Windows may be referred to as, for example, Windows
Vista/7/8/8.1/10, with the Windows notation omitted.
OS X 10.7.x
OS X 10.8.x
OS X 10.9.x
OS X 10.10.x
OS X 10.11.x
macOS 10.12.x
In this guide, the operating systems above are referred to as "OS X 10.7.x",
"OS X 10.8.x", "OS X 10.9.x", "OS X 10.10.x", "OS X 10.11.x", and "macOS
10.12.x". Furthermore, the collective term "Mac" is used to refer to them
all.
Trademarks and Copyrights
"EPSON" is a registered trademark of Seiko Epson Corporation. "EXCEED YOUR
VISION” is a trademark or registered trademark of Seiko Epson Corporation.
General Notes
285
Mac, Mac OS, OS X, and iOS are trademarks of Apple Inc.
Microsoft, Windows, Windows Vista, Microsoft Edge, Windows Media, PowerPoint,
and the Windows logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
App Store is a service mark of Apple Inc.
Android, Chrome, Chromebook, and Google Play are trademarks of Google LLC.
HDMI, the HDMI Logo and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or
registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing Administrator, Inc.
PJLink trademark is a trademark applied for registration or is already registered in
Japan, the United States of America and other countries and areas.
WPA
™
and WPA2
™
are registered trademarks of the Wi-Fi Alliance.
"QR Code" is a registered trademark of DENSO WAVE INCORPORATED.
Crestron, Crestron Connected, Crestron RoomView, and Crestron Fusion are
registered trademarks of Crestron Electronics, Inc.
Extron
®
and XTP
®
are registered trademarks of Extron Electronics.
HDBaseT
™
and the HDBaseT Alliance logo are trademarks of the HDBaseT Alliance.
Other product names used herein are also for identification purposes only and may be
trademarks of their respective owners. Epson disclaims any and all rights in those marks.
©SEIKO EPSON CORPORATION 2019. All rights reserved.
Indication of the manufacturer and the importer in accordance with
requirements of directive 2011/65/EU (RoHS)
Manufacturer: SEIKO EPSON CORPORATION
Address: 3-5, Owa 3-chome, Suwa-shi, Nagano-ken 392-8502 Japan
Telephone: 81-266-52-3131
https://epson.com/
Importer: EPSON EUROPE B.V.
Address: Atlas Arena, Asia Building, Hoogoorddreef 5, 1101 BA Amsterdam
Zuidoost The Netherlands
Telephone: 31-20-314-5000
https://www.epson.eu/
General Notes
286
The following table lists the meaning of the safety symbols labeled on the
equipment.
No. Symbol mark Approved
standards
Meaning
AIEC60417
No. 5007
"ON" (power)
To indicate connection to the mains.
BIEC60417
No. 5008
"OFF" (power)
To indicate disconnection from the mains.
CIEC60417
No. 5009
Stand-by
To identify the switch or switch position
by means of which part of the equipment is
switched on in order to bring it into the
stand-by condition.
DISO7000
No.0434B
IEC3864-B3.1
Caution
To identify general caution when using the
product.
EIEC60417
No. 5041
Caution, hot surface
To indicate that the marked item can be
hot and should not be touched without
taking care.
FIEC60417
No.6042
ISO3864-B3.6
Caution, risk of electric shock
To identify equipment that has risk of
electric shock.
GIEC60417
No. 5957
For indoor use only
To identify electrical equipment designed
primarily for indoor use.
HIEC60417
No. 5926
Polarity of d.c. power connector
To identify the positive and negative
connections (the polarity) on a piece of
equipment to which a d.c. power supply
may be connected.
I-The same as No. 8
No. Symbol mark Approved
standards
Meaning
JIEC60417
No. 5001B
Battery, general
On battery powered equipment. To
identify a device for instance a cover for
the battery compartment, or the
connector terminals.
KIEC60417
No. 5002
Positioning of cell
To identify the battery holder itself and to
identify the positioning of the cell(s)
inside the battery holder.
L- The same as No. 11
MIEC60417
No. 5019
Protective earth
To identify any terminal which is intended
for connection to an external conductor
for protection against electric shock in
case of a fault, or the terminal of a
protective earth electrode.
NIEC60417
No. 5017
Earth
To identify an earth (ground) terminal in
cases where symbol No. 13 is not explicitly
required.
OIEC60417
No. 5032
Alternating current
To indicate on the rating plate that the
equipment is suitable for alternating
current only; to identify relevant
terminals.
PIEC60417
No. 5031
Direct current
To indicate on the rating plate that the
equipment is suitable for direct current
only; to identify relevant terminals.
QIEC60417
No. 5172
Class II equipment
To identify equipment meeting the safety
requirements specified for Class II
equipment according to IEC 61140.
List of Safety Symbols
287
No. Symbol mark Approved
standards
Meaning
RISO 3864 General prohibition
To identify actions or operations that are
prohibited.
SISO 3864 Contact prohibition
To indicate injury that could occur due to
touching a specific part of the equipment.
T--- Never look into the projection lens while
the projector is on.
U--- To indicate that the marked item don't
place anything on projector.
VISO3864
IEC60825-1
Caution, laser radiation
To indicate the equipment has a laser
radiation part.
WISO 3864 Disassembly prohibition
To indicate a risk of injury, such as electric
shock, if the equipment is disassembled.
XIEC60417
No. 5266
Standby, partial standby
To indicate that part of the equipment is in
the ready status.
YISO3864
IEC60417
No.5057
Caution, movable parts
To indicate that you must keep away from
movable parts according to protection
standards.
ZIEC
60417-6056
Caution (Moving Fan Blades)
As a safety precaution, stay away from the
moving fan blades.
aIEC
60417-6043
Caution (Sharp Corners)
To indicate sharp corners that should not
be touched.
b-- To indicate that looking into the lens while
projecting is prohibited.
No. Symbol mark Approved
standards
Meaning
cISO7010
No. W027
ISO 3864
Warning, light emission (UV, visible light,
IR, etc.)
When you are close to the light emissions,
be careful not to injure your eyes or skin.
dIEC60417
No. 5109
Usage prohibition in residential areas
To indicate that this is an electrical device
or a device that is not suitable for use in
residential areas.
List of Safety Symbols
288
A
A/V Mute .............................................. 19, 102
A/V settings ................................................ 149
Air exhaust vent ........................................... 16
Air filter notice ........................................... 147
Air filter replacement period ................... 208
AMX Device Discovery ............................ 159
Aspect .................................................... 80, 142
Audio Out port ............................................ 17
Audio1 port .................................................. 17
Audio2 port .................................................. 17
Audio3 port .................................................. 17
Auto setup .................................................. 142
B
Basic menu ................................................. 153
Batch setup function ................................. 164
Beep ............................................................. 148
Black level ................................................... 150
BNC port ....................................................... 17
Brightness ................................................... 140
BT.709 ........................................................... 76
C
Ceiling mount ............................................ 147
Ceiling mount fixing points ....................... 18
Cinema .......................................................... 76
Cleaning ...................................................... 204
Cleaning the air filter and air intake vent
........................................................................ 204
Cleaning the projector .............................. 204
Color adjustment ....................................... 141
Color Mode .......................................... 76, 140
Color saturation ......................................... 140
Color Uniformity ....................................... 147
Computer port ............................................. 17
Configuration menu ................................. 136
Consumables .............................................. 233
Contrast ...................................................... 140
Control panel ............................................... 18
Corner wall ................................................... 71
Crestron Connected .......................... 159, 228
Cross ............................................................ 104
D
Date & Time ............................................... 148
DHCP .................................................. 155, 157
DICOM SIM ................................................. 76
Direct Power On ........................................ 148
Display ........................................................ 147
Display background .................................. 147
Document camera ..................................... 233
DVI-D port ................................................... 17
Dynamic ........................................................ 76
E
Edge Blending ...................................... 91, 150
EDID ........................................................... 143
Epson Projector Management ................. 215
Epson Web Control ................................... 215
Esc .................................................................. 19
ESC/VP21 ................................................... 226
Event ID ...................................................... 161
Extended menu .......................................... 146
Extron XTP ................................................. 149
E-Zoom ....................................................... 104
F
Filter indicator ........................................... 175
Focus .............................................................. 38
Freeze .......................................................... 103
Front ............................................................ 147
Front feet ....................................................... 18
Full lock ....................................................... 117
G
Gateway Address ............................... 155, 157
Geometry correction ................................. 144
H
HDBaseT ..................................................... 149
HDBaseT port .............................................. 17
HDBaseT signal quality ............................ 161
HDMI port ................................................... 17
Help function ............................................. 173
High altitude mode ................................... 148
Home Screen ................................................ 59
I
Image adjustment menu ........................... 140
Indicator ..................................................... 175
Info menu ................................................... 161
Input signal ................................................. 161
Installation requirements ........................... 31
Installation settings ..................................... 31
IP address ........................................... 155, 157
Index
289
K
Keystone distortion ................................... 144
L
Language ..................................................... 150
Lens operation lock ................................... 118
Lens replacement cover .............................. 27
Lens Shift ...................................................... 34
Light Source Calibration ...................... 7, 112
M
Mail notification ................................ 158, 225
Memory ....................................................... 145
Menu ..................................................... 18, 136
Message broadcasting ............................... 160
Messages ..................................................... 147
Monitor Out port ......................................... 17
Multi-Projection .................................. 76, 150
Multi-Projection function .......................... 90
N
Natural .......................................................... 76
Network configuration ............................. 152
Network information ................................ 151
Network menu ........................................... 151
Notification email address 1/2/3 ............. 159
O
Operating temperature ............................. 280
Operation .................................................... 148
Optional accessories .................................. 233
Overheating ................................................ 177
Overscan ..................................................... 142
P
Panel alignment ......................................... 147
Part names and functions ........................... 15
Password protect ....................................... 115
PJLink .......................................................... 227
PJLink password ........................................ 153
Port number ............................................... 158
Position ....................................................... 142
Power inlet .................................................... 16
Power on protection .................................. 115
Presentation .................................................. 76
Priority gateway ......................................... 159
Projection ................................................... 147
Projection distance .................................... 234
Projection lens .............................................. 27
Projector ................................................. 58, 60
Projector ID .................................................. 42
Projector Keyword .................................... 153
Projector name ........................................... 153
Q
Quick Corner ............................................. 144
R
Reading mail ............................................... 225
Rear .............................................................. 147
Rear feet ........................................................ 18
Refresh Rate ................................................ 161
Remote control ............................................ 20
Remote control button lock ..................... 118
Remote control ID ....................................... 43
Remote port .................................................. 17
Remote receiver ........................................... 15
Replacing batteries ....................................... 23
Replacing the air filter ............................... 208
Reset all config ........................................... 163
Reset memory ............................................ 162
Reset menu ................................................. 162
Resolution .......................................... 142, 161
Resolutions ................................................. 274
RS-232C port ................................................ 17
S
Scale ..................................................... 143, 150
Schedule ...................................................... 112
Schedule settings ........................................ 150
Screen settings ...................................... 32, 147
Screen Size .......................................... 101, 234
Search access point .................................... 156
Serial number ............................................. 161
Settings menu ............................................. 143
Sharpness .................................................... 140
Signal menu ................................................ 142
SMTP server ............................................... 158
SNMP .......................................................... 226
Soft keyboard ............................................. 152
Source ................................................. 100, 161
Source Search ......................................... 18, 61
Specifications ............................................. 279
Split screen .................................................. 144
Split Screen Setup ...................................... 100
Standby mode ............................................ 149
Startup screen ............................................. 147
Status ........................................................... 161
Index
290
Status indicators ........................................... 15
Storage temperature .................................. 280
Subnet mask ....................................... 155, 157
Supported resolutions ............................... 274
Swap screens ............................................... 101
Sync info ..................................................... 161
Sync. ............................................................ 142
T
Test Pattern .......................................... 33, 145
Tint .............................................................. 140
Tracking ...................................................... 142
Trap IP address 1/2 ................................... 159
U
User Button ................................................ 145
User's Logo ................................................. 104
User's logo protection ............................... 115
V
Volume ........................................................ 144
W
WEB API .................................................... 232
Web browser .............................................. 215
Web control password .............................. 153
White Balance ............................................ 140
Wired LAN menu ...................................... 157
Wireless LAN menu .................................. 154
Index
291